]>
Commit | Line | Data |
---|---|---|
230d793d RS |
1 | /* Optimize by combining instructions for GNU compiler. |
2 | Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | |
3 | ||
4 | This file is part of GNU CC. | |
5 | ||
6 | GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | |
7 | it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | |
8 | the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) | |
9 | any later version. | |
10 | ||
11 | GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | |
12 | but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | |
13 | MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | |
14 | GNU General Public License for more details. | |
15 | ||
16 | You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
17 | along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to | |
18 | the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */ | |
19 | ||
20 | ||
21 | /* This module is essentially the "combiner" phase of the U. of Arizona | |
22 | Portable Optimizer, but redone to work on our list-structured | |
23 | representation for RTL instead of their string representation. | |
24 | ||
25 | The LOG_LINKS of each insn identify the most recent assignment | |
26 | to each REG used in the insn. It is a list of previous insns, | |
27 | each of which contains a SET for a REG that is used in this insn | |
28 | and not used or set in between. LOG_LINKs never cross basic blocks. | |
29 | They were set up by the preceding pass (lifetime analysis). | |
30 | ||
31 | We try to combine each pair of insns joined by a logical link. | |
32 | We also try to combine triples of insns A, B and C when | |
33 | C has a link back to B and B has a link back to A. | |
34 | ||
35 | LOG_LINKS does not have links for use of the CC0. They don't | |
36 | need to, because the insn that sets the CC0 is always immediately | |
37 | before the insn that tests it. So we always regard a branch | |
38 | insn as having a logical link to the preceding insn. The same is true | |
39 | for an insn explicitly using CC0. | |
40 | ||
41 | We check (with use_crosses_set_p) to avoid combining in such a way | |
42 | as to move a computation to a place where its value would be different. | |
43 | ||
44 | Combination is done by mathematically substituting the previous | |
45 | insn(s) values for the regs they set into the expressions in | |
46 | the later insns that refer to these regs. If the result is a valid insn | |
47 | for our target machine, according to the machine description, | |
48 | we install it, delete the earlier insns, and update the data flow | |
49 | information (LOG_LINKS and REG_NOTES) for what we did. | |
50 | ||
51 | There are a few exceptions where the dataflow information created by | |
52 | flow.c aren't completely updated: | |
53 | ||
54 | - reg_live_length is not updated | |
55 | - reg_n_refs is not adjusted in the rare case when a register is | |
56 | no longer required in a computation | |
57 | - there are extremely rare cases (see distribute_regnotes) when a | |
58 | REG_DEAD note is lost | |
59 | - a LOG_LINKS entry that refers to an insn with multiple SETs may be | |
60 | removed because there is no way to know which register it was | |
61 | linking | |
62 | ||
63 | To simplify substitution, we combine only when the earlier insn(s) | |
64 | consist of only a single assignment. To simplify updating afterward, | |
65 | we never combine when a subroutine call appears in the middle. | |
66 | ||
67 | Since we do not represent assignments to CC0 explicitly except when that | |
68 | is all an insn does, there is no LOG_LINKS entry in an insn that uses | |
69 | the condition code for the insn that set the condition code. | |
70 | Fortunately, these two insns must be consecutive. | |
71 | Therefore, every JUMP_INSN is taken to have an implicit logical link | |
72 | to the preceding insn. This is not quite right, since non-jumps can | |
73 | also use the condition code; but in practice such insns would not | |
74 | combine anyway. */ | |
75 | ||
230d793d RS |
76 | #include "config.h" |
77 | #include "gvarargs.h" | |
78 | #include "rtl.h" | |
79 | #include "flags.h" | |
80 | #include "regs.h" | |
81 | #include "expr.h" | |
82 | #include "basic-block.h" | |
83 | #include "insn-config.h" | |
84 | #include "insn-flags.h" | |
85 | #include "insn-codes.h" | |
86 | #include "insn-attr.h" | |
87 | #include "recog.h" | |
88 | #include "real.h" | |
f8d97cf4 | 89 | #include <stdio.h> |
230d793d RS |
90 | |
91 | /* It is not safe to use ordinary gen_lowpart in combine. | |
92 | Use gen_lowpart_for_combine instead. See comments there. */ | |
93 | #define gen_lowpart dont_use_gen_lowpart_you_dummy | |
94 | ||
95 | /* Number of attempts to combine instructions in this function. */ | |
96 | ||
97 | static int combine_attempts; | |
98 | ||
99 | /* Number of attempts that got as far as substitution in this function. */ | |
100 | ||
101 | static int combine_merges; | |
102 | ||
103 | /* Number of instructions combined with added SETs in this function. */ | |
104 | ||
105 | static int combine_extras; | |
106 | ||
107 | /* Number of instructions combined in this function. */ | |
108 | ||
109 | static int combine_successes; | |
110 | ||
111 | /* Totals over entire compilation. */ | |
112 | ||
113 | static int total_attempts, total_merges, total_extras, total_successes; | |
114 | \f | |
115 | /* Vector mapping INSN_UIDs to cuids. | |
5089e22e | 116 | The cuids are like uids but increase monotonically always. |
230d793d RS |
117 | Combine always uses cuids so that it can compare them. |
118 | But actually renumbering the uids, which we used to do, | |
119 | proves to be a bad idea because it makes it hard to compare | |
120 | the dumps produced by earlier passes with those from later passes. */ | |
121 | ||
122 | static int *uid_cuid; | |
123 | ||
124 | /* Get the cuid of an insn. */ | |
125 | ||
126 | #define INSN_CUID(INSN) (uid_cuid[INSN_UID (INSN)]) | |
127 | ||
128 | /* Maximum register number, which is the size of the tables below. */ | |
129 | ||
130 | static int combine_max_regno; | |
131 | ||
132 | /* Record last point of death of (hard or pseudo) register n. */ | |
133 | ||
134 | static rtx *reg_last_death; | |
135 | ||
136 | /* Record last point of modification of (hard or pseudo) register n. */ | |
137 | ||
138 | static rtx *reg_last_set; | |
139 | ||
140 | /* Record the cuid of the last insn that invalidated memory | |
141 | (anything that writes memory, and subroutine calls, but not pushes). */ | |
142 | ||
143 | static int mem_last_set; | |
144 | ||
145 | /* Record the cuid of the last CALL_INSN | |
146 | so we can tell whether a potential combination crosses any calls. */ | |
147 | ||
148 | static int last_call_cuid; | |
149 | ||
150 | /* When `subst' is called, this is the insn that is being modified | |
151 | (by combining in a previous insn). The PATTERN of this insn | |
152 | is still the old pattern partially modified and it should not be | |
153 | looked at, but this may be used to examine the successors of the insn | |
154 | to judge whether a simplification is valid. */ | |
155 | ||
156 | static rtx subst_insn; | |
157 | ||
158 | /* This is the lowest CUID that `subst' is currently dealing with. | |
159 | get_last_value will not return a value if the register was set at or | |
160 | after this CUID. If not for this mechanism, we could get confused if | |
161 | I2 or I1 in try_combine were an insn that used the old value of a register | |
162 | to obtain a new value. In that case, we might erroneously get the | |
163 | new value of the register when we wanted the old one. */ | |
164 | ||
165 | static int subst_low_cuid; | |
166 | ||
167 | /* This is the value of undobuf.num_undo when we started processing this | |
168 | substitution. This will prevent gen_rtx_combine from re-used a piece | |
169 | from the previous expression. Doing so can produce circular rtl | |
170 | structures. */ | |
171 | ||
172 | static int previous_num_undos; | |
173 | \f | |
174 | /* The next group of arrays allows the recording of the last value assigned | |
175 | to (hard or pseudo) register n. We use this information to see if a | |
5089e22e | 176 | operation being processed is redundant given a prior operation performed |
230d793d RS |
177 | on the register. For example, an `and' with a constant is redundant if |
178 | all the zero bits are already known to be turned off. | |
179 | ||
180 | We use an approach similar to that used by cse, but change it in the | |
181 | following ways: | |
182 | ||
183 | (1) We do not want to reinitialize at each label. | |
184 | (2) It is useful, but not critical, to know the actual value assigned | |
185 | to a register. Often just its form is helpful. | |
186 | ||
187 | Therefore, we maintain the following arrays: | |
188 | ||
189 | reg_last_set_value the last value assigned | |
190 | reg_last_set_label records the value of label_tick when the | |
191 | register was assigned | |
192 | reg_last_set_table_tick records the value of label_tick when a | |
193 | value using the register is assigned | |
194 | reg_last_set_invalid set to non-zero when it is not valid | |
195 | to use the value of this register in some | |
196 | register's value | |
197 | ||
198 | To understand the usage of these tables, it is important to understand | |
199 | the distinction between the value in reg_last_set_value being valid | |
200 | and the register being validly contained in some other expression in the | |
201 | table. | |
202 | ||
203 | Entry I in reg_last_set_value is valid if it is non-zero, and either | |
204 | reg_n_sets[i] is 1 or reg_last_set_label[i] == label_tick. | |
205 | ||
206 | Register I may validly appear in any expression returned for the value | |
207 | of another register if reg_n_sets[i] is 1. It may also appear in the | |
208 | value for register J if reg_last_set_label[i] < reg_last_set_label[j] or | |
209 | reg_last_set_invalid[j] is zero. | |
210 | ||
211 | If an expression is found in the table containing a register which may | |
212 | not validly appear in an expression, the register is replaced by | |
213 | something that won't match, (clobber (const_int 0)). | |
214 | ||
215 | reg_last_set_invalid[i] is set non-zero when register I is being assigned | |
216 | to and reg_last_set_table_tick[i] == label_tick. */ | |
217 | ||
218 | /* Record last value assigned to (hard or pseudo) register n. */ | |
219 | ||
220 | static rtx *reg_last_set_value; | |
221 | ||
222 | /* Record the value of label_tick when the value for register n is placed in | |
223 | reg_last_set_value[n]. */ | |
224 | ||
225 | static short *reg_last_set_label; | |
226 | ||
227 | /* Record the value of label_tick when an expression involving register n | |
228 | is placed in reg_last_set_value. */ | |
229 | ||
230 | static short *reg_last_set_table_tick; | |
231 | ||
232 | /* Set non-zero if references to register n in expressions should not be | |
233 | used. */ | |
234 | ||
235 | static char *reg_last_set_invalid; | |
236 | ||
237 | /* Incremented for each label. */ | |
238 | ||
239 | static short label_tick; | |
240 | ||
241 | /* Some registers that are set more than once and used in more than one | |
242 | basic block are nevertheless always set in similar ways. For example, | |
243 | a QImode register may be loaded from memory in two places on a machine | |
244 | where byte loads zero extend. | |
245 | ||
246 | We record in the following array what we know about the significant | |
247 | bits of a register, specifically which bits are known to be zero. | |
248 | ||
249 | If an entry is zero, it means that we don't know anything special. */ | |
250 | ||
5f4f0e22 | 251 | static HOST_WIDE_INT *reg_significant; |
230d793d RS |
252 | |
253 | /* Mode used to compute significance in reg_significant. It is the largest | |
5f4f0e22 | 254 | integer mode that can fit in HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT. */ |
230d793d RS |
255 | |
256 | static enum machine_mode significant_mode; | |
257 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
258 | /* Nonzero if we know that a register has some leading bits that are always |
259 | equal to the sign bit. */ | |
260 | ||
261 | static char *reg_sign_bit_copies; | |
262 | ||
263 | /* Nonzero when reg_significant and reg_sign_bit_copies can be safely used. | |
1a26b032 RK |
264 | It is zero while computing them and after combine has completed. This |
265 | former test prevents propagating values based on previously set values, | |
266 | which can be incorrect if a variable is modified in a loop. */ | |
230d793d RS |
267 | |
268 | static int significant_valid; | |
269 | \f | |
270 | /* Record one modification to rtl structure | |
271 | to be undone by storing old_contents into *where. | |
272 | is_int is 1 if the contents are an int. */ | |
273 | ||
274 | struct undo | |
275 | { | |
230d793d | 276 | int is_int; |
7c046e4e RK |
277 | union {rtx rtx; int i;} old_contents; |
278 | union {rtx *rtx; int *i;} where; | |
230d793d RS |
279 | }; |
280 | ||
281 | /* Record a bunch of changes to be undone, up to MAX_UNDO of them. | |
282 | num_undo says how many are currently recorded. | |
283 | ||
284 | storage is nonzero if we must undo the allocation of new storage. | |
285 | The value of storage is what to pass to obfree. | |
286 | ||
287 | other_insn is nonzero if we have modified some other insn in the process | |
288 | of working on subst_insn. It must be verified too. */ | |
289 | ||
290 | #define MAX_UNDO 50 | |
291 | ||
292 | struct undobuf | |
293 | { | |
294 | int num_undo; | |
295 | char *storage; | |
296 | struct undo undo[MAX_UNDO]; | |
297 | rtx other_insn; | |
298 | }; | |
299 | ||
300 | static struct undobuf undobuf; | |
301 | ||
cc876596 | 302 | /* Substitute NEWVAL, an rtx expression, into INTO, a place in some |
230d793d | 303 | insn. The substitution can be undone by undo_all. If INTO is already |
cc876596 RK |
304 | set to NEWVAL, do not record this change. Because computing NEWVAL might |
305 | also call SUBST, we have to compute it before we put anything into | |
306 | the undo table. */ | |
230d793d RS |
307 | |
308 | #define SUBST(INTO, NEWVAL) \ | |
cc876596 RK |
309 | do { rtx _new = (NEWVAL); \ |
310 | if (undobuf.num_undo < MAX_UNDO) \ | |
230d793d | 311 | { \ |
230d793d | 312 | undobuf.undo[undobuf.num_undo].is_int = 0; \ |
7c046e4e RK |
313 | undobuf.undo[undobuf.num_undo].where.rtx = &INTO; \ |
314 | undobuf.undo[undobuf.num_undo].old_contents.rtx = INTO; \ | |
cc876596 | 315 | INTO = _new; \ |
7c046e4e | 316 | if (undobuf.undo[undobuf.num_undo].old_contents.rtx != INTO) \ |
230d793d RS |
317 | undobuf.num_undo++; \ |
318 | } \ | |
319 | } while (0) | |
320 | ||
321 | /* Similar to SUBST, but NEWVAL is an int. INTO will normally be an XINT | |
322 | expression. | |
323 | Note that substitution for the value of a CONST_INT is not safe. */ | |
324 | ||
325 | #define SUBST_INT(INTO, NEWVAL) \ | |
326 | do { if (undobuf.num_undo < MAX_UNDO) \ | |
327 | { \ | |
7c046e4e RK |
328 | undobuf.undo[undobuf.num_undo].is_int = 1; \ |
329 | undobuf.undo[undobuf.num_undo].where.i = (int *) &INTO; \ | |
330 | undobuf.undo[undobuf.num_undo].old_contents.i = INTO; \ | |
230d793d | 331 | INTO = NEWVAL; \ |
7c046e4e | 332 | if (undobuf.undo[undobuf.num_undo].old_contents.i != INTO) \ |
230d793d RS |
333 | undobuf.num_undo++; \ |
334 | } \ | |
335 | } while (0) | |
336 | ||
337 | /* Number of times the pseudo being substituted for | |
338 | was found and replaced. */ | |
339 | ||
340 | static int n_occurrences; | |
341 | ||
342 | static void set_significant (); | |
343 | static void move_deaths (); | |
344 | rtx remove_death (); | |
345 | static void record_value_for_reg (); | |
346 | static void record_dead_and_set_regs (); | |
347 | static int use_crosses_set_p (); | |
348 | static rtx try_combine (); | |
349 | static rtx *find_split_point (); | |
350 | static rtx subst (); | |
351 | static void undo_all (); | |
352 | static int reg_dead_at_p (); | |
353 | static rtx expand_compound_operation (); | |
354 | static rtx expand_field_assignment (); | |
355 | static rtx make_extraction (); | |
356 | static int get_pos_from_mask (); | |
77fa0940 | 357 | static rtx force_to_mode (); |
1a26b032 | 358 | static rtx known_cond (); |
230d793d RS |
359 | static rtx make_field_assignment (); |
360 | static rtx make_compound_operation (); | |
361 | static rtx apply_distributive_law (); | |
362 | static rtx simplify_and_const_int (); | |
5f4f0e22 | 363 | static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT significant_bits (); |
d0ab8cd3 | 364 | static int num_sign_bit_copies (); |
230d793d RS |
365 | static int merge_outer_ops (); |
366 | static rtx simplify_shift_const (); | |
367 | static int recog_for_combine (); | |
368 | static rtx gen_lowpart_for_combine (); | |
369 | static rtx gen_rtx_combine (); | |
370 | static rtx gen_binary (); | |
371 | static rtx gen_unary (); | |
372 | static enum rtx_code simplify_comparison (); | |
373 | static int reversible_comparison_p (); | |
374 | static int get_last_value_validate (); | |
375 | static rtx get_last_value (); | |
376 | static void distribute_notes (); | |
377 | static void distribute_links (); | |
378 | \f | |
379 | /* Main entry point for combiner. F is the first insn of the function. | |
380 | NREGS is the first unused pseudo-reg number. */ | |
381 | ||
382 | void | |
383 | combine_instructions (f, nregs) | |
384 | rtx f; | |
385 | int nregs; | |
386 | { | |
387 | register rtx insn, next, prev; | |
388 | register int i; | |
389 | register rtx links, nextlinks; | |
390 | ||
391 | combine_attempts = 0; | |
392 | combine_merges = 0; | |
393 | combine_extras = 0; | |
394 | combine_successes = 0; | |
395 | ||
396 | combine_max_regno = nregs; | |
397 | ||
398 | reg_last_death = (rtx *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (rtx)); | |
399 | reg_last_set = (rtx *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (rtx)); | |
400 | reg_last_set_value = (rtx *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (rtx)); | |
401 | reg_last_set_table_tick = (short *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (short)); | |
402 | reg_last_set_label = (short *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (short)); | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
403 | reg_last_set_invalid = (char *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (char)); |
404 | reg_significant = (HOST_WIDE_INT *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (HOST_WIDE_INT)); | |
d0ab8cd3 | 405 | reg_sign_bit_copies = (char *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (char)); |
230d793d RS |
406 | |
407 | bzero (reg_last_death, nregs * sizeof (rtx)); | |
408 | bzero (reg_last_set, nregs * sizeof (rtx)); | |
409 | bzero (reg_last_set_value, nregs * sizeof (rtx)); | |
410 | bzero (reg_last_set_table_tick, nregs * sizeof (short)); | |
411 | bzero (reg_last_set_invalid, nregs * sizeof (char)); | |
5f4f0e22 | 412 | bzero (reg_significant, nregs * sizeof (HOST_WIDE_INT)); |
d0ab8cd3 | 413 | bzero (reg_sign_bit_copies, nregs * sizeof (char)); |
230d793d RS |
414 | |
415 | init_recog_no_volatile (); | |
416 | ||
417 | /* Compute maximum uid value so uid_cuid can be allocated. */ | |
418 | ||
419 | for (insn = f, i = 0; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn)) | |
420 | if (INSN_UID (insn) > i) | |
421 | i = INSN_UID (insn); | |
422 | ||
423 | uid_cuid = (int *) alloca ((i + 1) * sizeof (int)); | |
424 | ||
5f4f0e22 | 425 | significant_mode = mode_for_size (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT, MODE_INT, 0); |
230d793d RS |
426 | |
427 | /* Don't use reg_significant when computing it. This can cause problems | |
428 | when, for example, we have j <<= 1 in a loop. */ | |
429 | ||
430 | significant_valid = 0; | |
431 | ||
432 | /* Compute the mapping from uids to cuids. | |
433 | Cuids are numbers assigned to insns, like uids, | |
434 | except that cuids increase monotonically through the code. | |
435 | ||
436 | Scan all SETs and see if we can deduce anything about what | |
437 | bits are significant for some registers. */ | |
438 | ||
439 | for (insn = f, i = 0; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn)) | |
440 | { | |
441 | INSN_CUID (insn) = ++i; | |
442 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i') | |
443 | note_stores (PATTERN (insn), set_significant); | |
444 | } | |
445 | ||
446 | significant_valid = 1; | |
447 | ||
448 | /* Now scan all the insns in forward order. */ | |
449 | ||
450 | label_tick = 1; | |
451 | last_call_cuid = 0; | |
452 | mem_last_set = 0; | |
453 | ||
454 | for (insn = f; insn; insn = next ? next : NEXT_INSN (insn)) | |
455 | { | |
456 | next = 0; | |
457 | ||
458 | if (GET_CODE (insn) == CODE_LABEL) | |
459 | label_tick++; | |
460 | ||
461 | else if (GET_CODE (insn) == INSN | |
462 | || GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN | |
463 | || GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN) | |
464 | { | |
465 | /* Try this insn with each insn it links back to. */ | |
466 | ||
467 | for (links = LOG_LINKS (insn); links; links = XEXP (links, 1)) | |
5f4f0e22 | 468 | if ((next = try_combine (insn, XEXP (links, 0), NULL_RTX)) != 0) |
230d793d RS |
469 | goto retry; |
470 | ||
471 | /* Try each sequence of three linked insns ending with this one. */ | |
472 | ||
473 | for (links = LOG_LINKS (insn); links; links = XEXP (links, 1)) | |
474 | for (nextlinks = LOG_LINKS (XEXP (links, 0)); nextlinks; | |
475 | nextlinks = XEXP (nextlinks, 1)) | |
476 | if ((next = try_combine (insn, XEXP (links, 0), | |
477 | XEXP (nextlinks, 0))) != 0) | |
478 | goto retry; | |
479 | ||
480 | #ifdef HAVE_cc0 | |
481 | /* Try to combine a jump insn that uses CC0 | |
482 | with a preceding insn that sets CC0, and maybe with its | |
483 | logical predecessor as well. | |
484 | This is how we make decrement-and-branch insns. | |
485 | We need this special code because data flow connections | |
486 | via CC0 do not get entered in LOG_LINKS. */ | |
487 | ||
488 | if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN | |
489 | && (prev = prev_nonnote_insn (insn)) != 0 | |
490 | && GET_CODE (prev) == INSN | |
491 | && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev))) | |
492 | { | |
5f4f0e22 | 493 | if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, NULL_RTX)) != 0) |
230d793d RS |
494 | goto retry; |
495 | ||
496 | for (nextlinks = LOG_LINKS (prev); nextlinks; | |
497 | nextlinks = XEXP (nextlinks, 1)) | |
498 | if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, | |
499 | XEXP (nextlinks, 0))) != 0) | |
500 | goto retry; | |
501 | } | |
502 | ||
503 | /* Do the same for an insn that explicitly references CC0. */ | |
504 | if (GET_CODE (insn) == INSN | |
505 | && (prev = prev_nonnote_insn (insn)) != 0 | |
506 | && GET_CODE (prev) == INSN | |
507 | && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev)) | |
508 | && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET | |
509 | && reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))) | |
510 | { | |
5f4f0e22 | 511 | if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, NULL_RTX)) != 0) |
230d793d RS |
512 | goto retry; |
513 | ||
514 | for (nextlinks = LOG_LINKS (prev); nextlinks; | |
515 | nextlinks = XEXP (nextlinks, 1)) | |
516 | if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, | |
517 | XEXP (nextlinks, 0))) != 0) | |
518 | goto retry; | |
519 | } | |
520 | ||
521 | /* Finally, see if any of the insns that this insn links to | |
522 | explicitly references CC0. If so, try this insn, that insn, | |
5089e22e | 523 | and its predecessor if it sets CC0. */ |
230d793d RS |
524 | for (links = LOG_LINKS (insn); links; links = XEXP (links, 1)) |
525 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (links, 0)) == INSN | |
526 | && GET_CODE (PATTERN (XEXP (links, 0))) == SET | |
527 | && reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, SET_SRC (PATTERN (XEXP (links, 0)))) | |
528 | && (prev = prev_nonnote_insn (XEXP (links, 0))) != 0 | |
529 | && GET_CODE (prev) == INSN | |
530 | && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev)) | |
531 | && (next = try_combine (insn, XEXP (links, 0), prev)) != 0) | |
532 | goto retry; | |
533 | #endif | |
534 | ||
535 | /* Try combining an insn with two different insns whose results it | |
536 | uses. */ | |
537 | for (links = LOG_LINKS (insn); links; links = XEXP (links, 1)) | |
538 | for (nextlinks = XEXP (links, 1); nextlinks; | |
539 | nextlinks = XEXP (nextlinks, 1)) | |
540 | if ((next = try_combine (insn, XEXP (links, 0), | |
541 | XEXP (nextlinks, 0))) != 0) | |
542 | goto retry; | |
543 | ||
544 | if (GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE) | |
545 | record_dead_and_set_regs (insn); | |
546 | ||
547 | retry: | |
548 | ; | |
549 | } | |
550 | } | |
551 | ||
552 | total_attempts += combine_attempts; | |
553 | total_merges += combine_merges; | |
554 | total_extras += combine_extras; | |
555 | total_successes += combine_successes; | |
1a26b032 RK |
556 | |
557 | significant_valid = 0; | |
230d793d RS |
558 | } |
559 | \f | |
560 | /* Called via note_stores. If X is a pseudo that is used in more than | |
5f4f0e22 | 561 | one basic block, is narrower that HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT, and is being |
230d793d RS |
562 | set, record what bits are significant. If we are clobbering X, |
563 | ignore this "set" because the clobbered value won't be used. | |
564 | ||
565 | If we are setting only a portion of X and we can't figure out what | |
566 | portion, assume all bits will be used since we don't know what will | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
567 | be happening. |
568 | ||
569 | Similarly, set how many bits of X are known to be copies of the sign bit | |
570 | at all locations in the function. This is the smallest number implied | |
571 | by any set of X. */ | |
230d793d RS |
572 | |
573 | static void | |
574 | set_significant (x, set) | |
575 | rtx x; | |
576 | rtx set; | |
577 | { | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
578 | int num; |
579 | ||
230d793d RS |
580 | if (GET_CODE (x) == REG |
581 | && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
582 | && reg_n_sets[REGNO (x)] > 1 | |
583 | && reg_basic_block[REGNO (x)] < 0 | |
5f4f0e22 | 584 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x)) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
230d793d RS |
585 | { |
586 | if (GET_CODE (set) == CLOBBER) | |
587 | return; | |
588 | ||
589 | /* If this is a complex assignment, see if we can convert it into a | |
5089e22e | 590 | simple assignment. */ |
230d793d RS |
591 | set = expand_field_assignment (set); |
592 | if (SET_DEST (set) == x) | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
593 | { |
594 | reg_significant[REGNO (x)] | |
595 | |= significant_bits (SET_SRC (set), significant_mode); | |
596 | num = num_sign_bit_copies (SET_SRC (set), GET_MODE (x)); | |
597 | if (reg_sign_bit_copies[REGNO (x)] == 0 | |
598 | || reg_sign_bit_copies[REGNO (x)] > num) | |
599 | reg_sign_bit_copies[REGNO (x)] = num; | |
600 | } | |
230d793d | 601 | else |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
602 | { |
603 | reg_significant[REGNO (x)] = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)); | |
604 | reg_sign_bit_copies[REGNO (x)] = 0; | |
605 | } | |
230d793d RS |
606 | } |
607 | } | |
608 | \f | |
609 | /* See if INSN can be combined into I3. PRED and SUCC are optionally | |
610 | insns that were previously combined into I3 or that will be combined | |
611 | into the merger of INSN and I3. | |
612 | ||
613 | Return 0 if the combination is not allowed for any reason. | |
614 | ||
615 | If the combination is allowed, *PDEST will be set to the single | |
616 | destination of INSN and *PSRC to the single source, and this function | |
617 | will return 1. */ | |
618 | ||
619 | static int | |
620 | can_combine_p (insn, i3, pred, succ, pdest, psrc) | |
621 | rtx insn; | |
622 | rtx i3; | |
623 | rtx pred, succ; | |
624 | rtx *pdest, *psrc; | |
625 | { | |
626 | int i; | |
627 | rtx set = 0, src, dest; | |
628 | rtx p, link; | |
629 | int all_adjacent = (succ ? (next_active_insn (insn) == succ | |
630 | && next_active_insn (succ) == i3) | |
631 | : next_active_insn (insn) == i3); | |
632 | ||
633 | /* Can combine only if previous insn is a SET of a REG, a SUBREG or CC0. | |
634 | or a PARALLEL consisting of such a SET and CLOBBERs. | |
635 | ||
636 | If INSN has CLOBBER parallel parts, ignore them for our processing. | |
637 | By definition, these happen during the execution of the insn. When it | |
638 | is merged with another insn, all bets are off. If they are, in fact, | |
639 | needed and aren't also supplied in I3, they may be added by | |
640 | recog_for_combine. Otherwise, it won't match. | |
641 | ||
642 | We can also ignore a SET whose SET_DEST is mentioned in a REG_UNUSED | |
643 | note. | |
644 | ||
645 | Get the source and destination of INSN. If more than one, can't | |
646 | combine. */ | |
647 | ||
648 | if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET) | |
649 | set = PATTERN (insn); | |
650 | else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL | |
651 | && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, 0)) == SET) | |
652 | { | |
653 | for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0); i++) | |
654 | { | |
655 | rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i); | |
656 | ||
657 | switch (GET_CODE (elt)) | |
658 | { | |
659 | /* We can ignore CLOBBERs. */ | |
660 | case CLOBBER: | |
661 | break; | |
662 | ||
663 | case SET: | |
664 | /* Ignore SETs whose result isn't used but not those that | |
665 | have side-effects. */ | |
666 | if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (elt)) | |
667 | && ! side_effects_p (elt)) | |
668 | break; | |
669 | ||
670 | /* If we have already found a SET, this is a second one and | |
671 | so we cannot combine with this insn. */ | |
672 | if (set) | |
673 | return 0; | |
674 | ||
675 | set = elt; | |
676 | break; | |
677 | ||
678 | default: | |
679 | /* Anything else means we can't combine. */ | |
680 | return 0; | |
681 | } | |
682 | } | |
683 | ||
684 | if (set == 0 | |
685 | /* If SET_SRC is an ASM_OPERANDS we can't throw away these CLOBBERs, | |
686 | so don't do anything with it. */ | |
687 | || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set)) == ASM_OPERANDS) | |
688 | return 0; | |
689 | } | |
690 | else | |
691 | return 0; | |
692 | ||
693 | if (set == 0) | |
694 | return 0; | |
695 | ||
696 | set = expand_field_assignment (set); | |
697 | src = SET_SRC (set), dest = SET_DEST (set); | |
698 | ||
699 | /* Don't eliminate a store in the stack pointer. */ | |
700 | if (dest == stack_pointer_rtx | |
701 | /* Don't install a subreg involving two modes not tieable. | |
702 | It can worsen register allocation, and can even make invalid reload | |
703 | insns, since the reg inside may need to be copied from in the | |
704 | outside mode, and that may be invalid if it is an fp reg copied in | |
5089e22e RS |
705 | integer mode. As a special exception, we can allow this if |
706 | I3 is simply copying DEST, a REG, to CC0. */ | |
230d793d | 707 | || (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG |
5089e22e RS |
708 | && ! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (src), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src))) |
709 | #ifdef HAVE_cc0 | |
710 | && ! (GET_CODE (i3) == INSN && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET | |
711 | && SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)) == cc0_rtx | |
712 | && GET_CODE (dest) == REG && dest == SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) | |
713 | #endif | |
714 | ) | |
230d793d RS |
715 | /* If we couldn't eliminate a field assignment, we can't combine. */ |
716 | || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART | |
717 | /* Don't combine with an insn that sets a register to itself if it has | |
718 | a REG_EQUAL note. This may be part of a REG_NO_CONFLICT sequence. */ | |
5f4f0e22 | 719 | || (rtx_equal_p (src, dest) && find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX)) |
230d793d RS |
720 | /* Can't merge a function call. */ |
721 | || GET_CODE (src) == CALL | |
722 | /* Don't substitute into an incremented register. */ | |
723 | || FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i3, dest) | |
724 | || (succ && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (succ, dest)) | |
725 | /* Don't combine the end of a libcall into anything. */ | |
5f4f0e22 | 726 | || find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, NULL_RTX) |
230d793d RS |
727 | /* Make sure that DEST is not used after SUCC but before I3. */ |
728 | || (succ && ! all_adjacent | |
729 | && reg_used_between_p (dest, succ, i3)) | |
730 | /* Make sure that the value that is to be substituted for the register | |
731 | does not use any registers whose values alter in between. However, | |
732 | If the insns are adjacent, a use can't cross a set even though we | |
733 | think it might (this can happen for a sequence of insns each setting | |
734 | the same destination; reg_last_set of that register might point to | |
735 | a NOTE). Also, don't move a volatile asm across any other insns. */ | |
736 | || (! all_adjacent | |
737 | && (use_crosses_set_p (src, INSN_CUID (insn)) | |
738 | || (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS && MEM_VOLATILE_P (src)))) | |
739 | /* If there is a REG_NO_CONFLICT note for DEST in I3 or SUCC, we get | |
740 | better register allocation by not doing the combine. */ | |
741 | || find_reg_note (i3, REG_NO_CONFLICT, dest) | |
742 | || (succ && find_reg_note (succ, REG_NO_CONFLICT, dest)) | |
743 | /* Don't combine across a CALL_INSN, because that would possibly | |
744 | change whether the life span of some REGs crosses calls or not, | |
745 | and it is a pain to update that information. | |
746 | Exception: if source is a constant, moving it later can't hurt. | |
747 | Accept that special case, because it helps -fforce-addr a lot. */ | |
748 | || (INSN_CUID (insn) < last_call_cuid && ! CONSTANT_P (src))) | |
749 | return 0; | |
750 | ||
751 | /* DEST must either be a REG or CC0. */ | |
752 | if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG) | |
753 | { | |
754 | /* If register alignment is being enforced for multi-word items in all | |
755 | cases except for parameters, it is possible to have a register copy | |
756 | insn referencing a hard register that is not allowed to contain the | |
757 | mode being copied and which would not be valid as an operand of most | |
758 | insns. Eliminate this problem by not combining with such an insn. | |
759 | ||
760 | Also, on some machines we don't want to extend the life of a hard | |
761 | register. */ | |
762 | ||
763 | if (GET_CODE (src) == REG | |
764 | && ((REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
765 | && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (dest), GET_MODE (dest))) | |
766 | #ifdef SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES | |
767 | /* Don't extend the life of a hard register. */ | |
768 | || REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
769 | #else | |
770 | || (REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
771 | && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (src), GET_MODE (src))) | |
772 | #endif | |
773 | )) | |
774 | return 0; | |
775 | } | |
776 | else if (GET_CODE (dest) != CC0) | |
777 | return 0; | |
778 | ||
5f96750d RS |
779 | /* Don't substitute for a register intended as a clobberable operand. |
780 | Similarly, don't substitute an expression containing a register that | |
781 | will be clobbered in I3. */ | |
230d793d RS |
782 | if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == PARALLEL) |
783 | for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (i3), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--) | |
784 | if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i3), 0, i)) == CLOBBER | |
5f96750d RS |
785 | && (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i3), 0, i), 0), |
786 | src) | |
787 | || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i3), 0, i), 0), dest))) | |
230d793d RS |
788 | return 0; |
789 | ||
790 | /* If INSN contains anything volatile, or is an `asm' (whether volatile | |
791 | or not), reject, unless nothing volatile comes between it and I3, | |
792 | with the exception of SUCC. */ | |
793 | ||
794 | if (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS || volatile_refs_p (src)) | |
795 | for (p = NEXT_INSN (insn); p != i3; p = NEXT_INSN (p)) | |
796 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p)) == 'i' | |
797 | && p != succ && volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (p))) | |
798 | return 0; | |
799 | ||
800 | /* If INSN or I2 contains an autoincrement or autodecrement, | |
801 | make sure that register is not used between there and I3, | |
802 | and not already used in I3 either. | |
803 | Also insist that I3 not be a jump; if it were one | |
804 | and the incremented register were spilled, we would lose. */ | |
805 | ||
806 | #ifdef AUTO_INC_DEC | |
807 | for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1)) | |
808 | if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC | |
809 | && (GET_CODE (i3) == JUMP_INSN | |
810 | || reg_used_between_p (XEXP (link, 0), insn, i3) | |
811 | || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (i3)))) | |
812 | return 0; | |
813 | #endif | |
814 | ||
815 | #ifdef HAVE_cc0 | |
816 | /* Don't combine an insn that follows a CC0-setting insn. | |
817 | An insn that uses CC0 must not be separated from the one that sets it. | |
818 | We do, however, allow I2 to follow a CC0-setting insn if that insn | |
819 | is passed as I1; in that case it will be deleted also. | |
820 | We also allow combining in this case if all the insns are adjacent | |
821 | because that would leave the two CC0 insns adjacent as well. | |
822 | It would be more logical to test whether CC0 occurs inside I1 or I2, | |
823 | but that would be much slower, and this ought to be equivalent. */ | |
824 | ||
825 | p = prev_nonnote_insn (insn); | |
826 | if (p && p != pred && GET_CODE (p) == INSN && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (p)) | |
827 | && ! all_adjacent) | |
828 | return 0; | |
829 | #endif | |
830 | ||
831 | /* If we get here, we have passed all the tests and the combination is | |
832 | to be allowed. */ | |
833 | ||
834 | *pdest = dest; | |
835 | *psrc = src; | |
836 | ||
837 | return 1; | |
838 | } | |
839 | \f | |
840 | /* LOC is the location within I3 that contains its pattern or the component | |
841 | of a PARALLEL of the pattern. We validate that it is valid for combining. | |
842 | ||
843 | One problem is if I3 modifies its output, as opposed to replacing it | |
844 | entirely, we can't allow the output to contain I2DEST or I1DEST as doing | |
845 | so would produce an insn that is not equivalent to the original insns. | |
846 | ||
847 | Consider: | |
848 | ||
849 | (set (reg:DI 101) (reg:DI 100)) | |
850 | (set (subreg:SI (reg:DI 101) 0) <foo>) | |
851 | ||
852 | This is NOT equivalent to: | |
853 | ||
854 | (parallel [(set (subreg:SI (reg:DI 100) 0) <foo>) | |
855 | (set (reg:DI 101) (reg:DI 100))]) | |
856 | ||
857 | Not only does this modify 100 (in which case it might still be valid | |
858 | if 100 were dead in I2), it sets 101 to the ORIGINAL value of 100. | |
859 | ||
860 | We can also run into a problem if I2 sets a register that I1 | |
861 | uses and I1 gets directly substituted into I3 (not via I2). In that | |
862 | case, we would be getting the wrong value of I2DEST into I3, so we | |
863 | must reject the combination. This case occurs when I2 and I1 both | |
864 | feed into I3, rather than when I1 feeds into I2, which feeds into I3. | |
865 | If I1_NOT_IN_SRC is non-zero, it means that finding I1 in the source | |
866 | of a SET must prevent combination from occurring. | |
867 | ||
868 | On machines where SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES is defined, we don't combine | |
869 | if the destination of a SET is a hard register. | |
870 | ||
871 | Before doing the above check, we first try to expand a field assignment | |
872 | into a set of logical operations. | |
873 | ||
874 | If PI3_DEST_KILLED is non-zero, it is a pointer to a location in which | |
875 | we place a register that is both set and used within I3. If more than one | |
876 | such register is detected, we fail. | |
877 | ||
878 | Return 1 if the combination is valid, zero otherwise. */ | |
879 | ||
880 | static int | |
881 | combinable_i3pat (i3, loc, i2dest, i1dest, i1_not_in_src, pi3dest_killed) | |
882 | rtx i3; | |
883 | rtx *loc; | |
884 | rtx i2dest; | |
885 | rtx i1dest; | |
886 | int i1_not_in_src; | |
887 | rtx *pi3dest_killed; | |
888 | { | |
889 | rtx x = *loc; | |
890 | ||
891 | if (GET_CODE (x) == SET) | |
892 | { | |
893 | rtx set = expand_field_assignment (x); | |
894 | rtx dest = SET_DEST (set); | |
895 | rtx src = SET_SRC (set); | |
896 | rtx inner_dest = dest, inner_src = src; | |
897 | ||
898 | SUBST (*loc, set); | |
899 | ||
900 | while (GET_CODE (inner_dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART | |
901 | || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == SUBREG | |
902 | || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT) | |
903 | inner_dest = XEXP (inner_dest, 0); | |
904 | ||
905 | /* We probably don't need this any more now that LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS | |
906 | was added. */ | |
907 | #if 0 | |
908 | while (GET_CODE (inner_src) == STRICT_LOW_PART | |
909 | || GET_CODE (inner_src) == SUBREG | |
910 | || GET_CODE (inner_src) == ZERO_EXTRACT) | |
911 | inner_src = XEXP (inner_src, 0); | |
912 | ||
913 | /* If it is better that two different modes keep two different pseudos, | |
914 | avoid combining them. This avoids producing the following pattern | |
915 | on a 386: | |
916 | (set (subreg:SI (reg/v:QI 21) 0) | |
917 | (lshiftrt:SI (reg/v:SI 20) | |
918 | (const_int 24))) | |
919 | If that were made, reload could not handle the pair of | |
920 | reg 20/21, since it would try to get any GENERAL_REGS | |
921 | but some of them don't handle QImode. */ | |
922 | ||
923 | if (rtx_equal_p (inner_src, i2dest) | |
924 | && GET_CODE (inner_dest) == REG | |
925 | && ! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (i2dest), GET_MODE (inner_dest))) | |
926 | return 0; | |
927 | #endif | |
928 | ||
929 | /* Check for the case where I3 modifies its output, as | |
930 | discussed above. */ | |
931 | if ((inner_dest != dest | |
932 | && (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, inner_dest) | |
933 | || (i1dest && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, inner_dest)))) | |
3f508eca RK |
934 | /* This is the same test done in can_combine_p except that we |
935 | allow a hard register with SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES if SRC is a | |
936 | CALL operation. */ | |
230d793d | 937 | || (GET_CODE (inner_dest) == REG |
dfbe1b2f | 938 | && REGNO (inner_dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER |
3f508eca RK |
939 | #ifdef SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES |
940 | && GET_CODE (src) != CALL | |
941 | #else | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
942 | && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (inner_dest), |
943 | GET_MODE (inner_dest)) | |
230d793d | 944 | #endif |
dfbe1b2f RK |
945 | ) |
946 | ||
230d793d RS |
947 | || (i1_not_in_src && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, src))) |
948 | return 0; | |
949 | ||
950 | /* If DEST is used in I3, it is being killed in this insn, | |
951 | so record that for later. */ | |
952 | if (pi3dest_killed && GET_CODE (dest) == REG | |
953 | && reg_referenced_p (dest, PATTERN (i3))) | |
954 | { | |
955 | if (*pi3dest_killed) | |
956 | return 0; | |
957 | ||
958 | *pi3dest_killed = dest; | |
959 | } | |
960 | } | |
961 | ||
962 | else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL) | |
963 | { | |
964 | int i; | |
965 | ||
966 | for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (x, 0); i++) | |
967 | if (! combinable_i3pat (i3, &XVECEXP (x, 0, i), i2dest, i1dest, | |
968 | i1_not_in_src, pi3dest_killed)) | |
969 | return 0; | |
970 | } | |
971 | ||
972 | return 1; | |
973 | } | |
974 | \f | |
975 | /* Try to combine the insns I1 and I2 into I3. | |
976 | Here I1 and I2 appear earlier than I3. | |
977 | I1 can be zero; then we combine just I2 into I3. | |
978 | ||
979 | It we are combining three insns and the resulting insn is not recognized, | |
980 | try splitting it into two insns. If that happens, I2 and I3 are retained | |
981 | and I1 is pseudo-deleted by turning it into a NOTE. Otherwise, I1 and I2 | |
982 | are pseudo-deleted. | |
983 | ||
984 | If we created two insns, return I2; otherwise return I3. | |
985 | Return 0 if the combination does not work. Then nothing is changed. */ | |
986 | ||
987 | static rtx | |
988 | try_combine (i3, i2, i1) | |
989 | register rtx i3, i2, i1; | |
990 | { | |
991 | /* New patterns for I3 and I3, respectively. */ | |
992 | rtx newpat, newi2pat = 0; | |
993 | /* Indicates need to preserve SET in I1 or I2 in I3 if it is not dead. */ | |
994 | int added_sets_1, added_sets_2; | |
995 | /* Total number of SETs to put into I3. */ | |
996 | int total_sets; | |
997 | /* Nonzero is I2's body now appears in I3. */ | |
998 | int i2_is_used; | |
999 | /* INSN_CODEs for new I3, new I2, and user of condition code. */ | |
1000 | int insn_code_number, i2_code_number, other_code_number; | |
1001 | /* Contains I3 if the destination of I3 is used in its source, which means | |
1002 | that the old life of I3 is being killed. If that usage is placed into | |
1003 | I2 and not in I3, a REG_DEAD note must be made. */ | |
1004 | rtx i3dest_killed = 0; | |
1005 | /* SET_DEST and SET_SRC of I2 and I1. */ | |
1006 | rtx i2dest, i2src, i1dest = 0, i1src = 0; | |
1007 | /* PATTERN (I2), or a copy of it in certain cases. */ | |
1008 | rtx i2pat; | |
1009 | /* Indicates if I2DEST or I1DEST is in I2SRC or I1_SRC. */ | |
1010 | int i2dest_in_i2src, i1dest_in_i1src = 0, i2dest_in_i1src = 0; | |
1011 | int i1_feeds_i3 = 0; | |
1012 | /* Notes that must be added to REG_NOTES in I3 and I2. */ | |
1013 | rtx new_i3_notes, new_i2_notes; | |
1014 | ||
1015 | int maxreg; | |
1016 | rtx temp; | |
1017 | register rtx link; | |
1018 | int i; | |
1019 | ||
1020 | /* If any of I1, I2, and I3 isn't really an insn, we can't do anything. | |
1021 | This can occur when flow deletes an insn that it has merged into an | |
1022 | auto-increment address. We also can't do anything if I3 has a | |
1023 | REG_LIBCALL note since we don't want to disrupt the contiguity of a | |
1024 | libcall. */ | |
1025 | ||
1026 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (i3)) != 'i' | |
1027 | || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (i2)) != 'i' | |
1028 | || (i1 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (i1)) != 'i') | |
5f4f0e22 | 1029 | || find_reg_note (i3, REG_LIBCALL, NULL_RTX)) |
230d793d RS |
1030 | return 0; |
1031 | ||
1032 | combine_attempts++; | |
1033 | ||
1034 | undobuf.num_undo = previous_num_undos = 0; | |
1035 | undobuf.other_insn = 0; | |
1036 | ||
1037 | /* Save the current high-water-mark so we can free storage if we didn't | |
1038 | accept this combination. */ | |
1039 | undobuf.storage = (char *) oballoc (0); | |
1040 | ||
1041 | /* If I1 and I2 both feed I3, they can be in any order. To simplify the | |
1042 | code below, set I1 to be the earlier of the two insns. */ | |
1043 | if (i1 && INSN_CUID (i1) > INSN_CUID (i2)) | |
1044 | temp = i1, i1 = i2, i2 = temp; | |
1045 | ||
1046 | /* First check for one important special-case that the code below will | |
1047 | not handle. Namely, the case where I1 is zero, I2 has multiple sets, | |
1048 | and I3 is a SET whose SET_SRC is a SET_DEST in I2. In that case, | |
1049 | we may be able to replace that destination with the destination of I3. | |
1050 | This occurs in the common code where we compute both a quotient and | |
1051 | remainder into a structure, in which case we want to do the computation | |
1052 | directly into the structure to avoid register-register copies. | |
1053 | ||
1054 | We make very conservative checks below and only try to handle the | |
1055 | most common cases of this. For example, we only handle the case | |
1056 | where I2 and I3 are adjacent to avoid making difficult register | |
1057 | usage tests. */ | |
1058 | ||
1059 | if (i1 == 0 && GET_CODE (i3) == INSN && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET | |
1060 | && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) == REG | |
1061 | && REGNO (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
1062 | #ifdef SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES | |
1063 | && (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))) != REG | |
1064 | || REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) | |
1065 | #endif | |
1066 | && find_reg_note (i3, REG_DEAD, SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) | |
1067 | && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2)) == PARALLEL | |
1068 | && ! side_effects_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))) | |
5089e22e RS |
1069 | /* If the dest of I3 is a ZERO_EXTRACT or STRICT_LOW_PART, the code |
1070 | below would need to check what is inside (and reg_overlap_mentioned_p | |
1071 | doesn't support those codes anyway). Don't allow those destinations; | |
1072 | the resulting insn isn't likely to be recognized anyway. */ | |
1073 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))) != ZERO_EXTRACT | |
1074 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))) != STRICT_LOW_PART | |
230d793d RS |
1075 | && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)), |
1076 | SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))) | |
1077 | && next_real_insn (i2) == i3) | |
5089e22e RS |
1078 | { |
1079 | rtx p2 = PATTERN (i2); | |
1080 | ||
1081 | /* Make sure that the destination of I3, | |
1082 | which we are going to substitute into one output of I2, | |
1083 | is not used within another output of I2. We must avoid making this: | |
1084 | (parallel [(set (mem (reg 69)) ...) | |
1085 | (set (reg 69) ...)]) | |
1086 | which is not well-defined as to order of actions. | |
1087 | (Besides, reload can't handle output reloads for this.) | |
1088 | ||
1089 | The problem can also happen if the dest of I3 is a memory ref, | |
1090 | if another dest in I2 is an indirect memory ref. */ | |
1091 | for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (p2, 0); i++) | |
1092 | if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET | |
1093 | && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)), | |
1094 | SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)))) | |
1095 | break; | |
230d793d | 1096 | |
5089e22e RS |
1097 | if (i == XVECLEN (p2, 0)) |
1098 | for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (p2, 0); i++) | |
1099 | if (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) | |
1100 | { | |
1101 | combine_merges++; | |
230d793d | 1102 | |
5089e22e RS |
1103 | subst_insn = i3; |
1104 | subst_low_cuid = INSN_CUID (i2); | |
230d793d | 1105 | |
5089e22e RS |
1106 | added_sets_2 = 0; |
1107 | i2dest = SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)); | |
230d793d | 1108 | |
5089e22e RS |
1109 | /* Replace the dest in I2 with our dest and make the resulting |
1110 | insn the new pattern for I3. Then skip to where we | |
1111 | validate the pattern. Everything was set up above. */ | |
1112 | SUBST (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)), | |
1113 | SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))); | |
1114 | ||
1115 | newpat = p2; | |
1116 | goto validate_replacement; | |
1117 | } | |
1118 | } | |
230d793d RS |
1119 | |
1120 | #ifndef HAVE_cc0 | |
1121 | /* If we have no I1 and I2 looks like: | |
1122 | (parallel [(set (reg:CC X) (compare:CC OP (const_int 0))) | |
1123 | (set Y OP)]) | |
1124 | make up a dummy I1 that is | |
1125 | (set Y OP) | |
1126 | and change I2 to be | |
1127 | (set (reg:CC X) (compare:CC Y (const_int 0))) | |
1128 | ||
1129 | (We can ignore any trailing CLOBBERs.) | |
1130 | ||
1131 | This undoes a previous combination and allows us to match a branch-and- | |
1132 | decrement insn. */ | |
1133 | ||
1134 | if (i1 == 0 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2)) == PARALLEL | |
1135 | && XVECLEN (PATTERN (i2), 0) >= 2 | |
1136 | && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)) == SET | |
1137 | && (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)))) | |
1138 | == MODE_CC) | |
1139 | && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0))) == COMPARE | |
1140 | && XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), 1) == const0_rtx | |
1141 | && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1)) == SET | |
1142 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1))) == REG | |
1143 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), 0), | |
1144 | SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1)))) | |
1145 | { | |
1146 | for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (i2), 0) - 1; i >= 2; i--) | |
1147 | if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)) != CLOBBER) | |
1148 | break; | |
1149 | ||
1150 | if (i == 1) | |
1151 | { | |
1152 | /* We make I1 with the same INSN_UID as I2. This gives it | |
1153 | the same INSN_CUID for value tracking. Our fake I1 will | |
1154 | never appear in the insn stream so giving it the same INSN_UID | |
1155 | as I2 will not cause a problem. */ | |
1156 | ||
1157 | i1 = gen_rtx (INSN, VOIDmode, INSN_UID (i2), 0, i2, | |
1158 | XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1), -1, 0, 0); | |
1159 | ||
1160 | SUBST (PATTERN (i2), XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)); | |
1161 | SUBST (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i2)), 0), | |
1162 | SET_DEST (PATTERN (i1))); | |
1163 | } | |
1164 | } | |
1165 | #endif | |
1166 | ||
1167 | /* Verify that I2 and I1 are valid for combining. */ | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
1168 | if (! can_combine_p (i2, i3, i1, NULL_RTX, &i2dest, &i2src) |
1169 | || (i1 && ! can_combine_p (i1, i3, NULL_RTX, i2, &i1dest, &i1src))) | |
230d793d RS |
1170 | { |
1171 | undo_all (); | |
1172 | return 0; | |
1173 | } | |
1174 | ||
1175 | /* Record whether I2DEST is used in I2SRC and similarly for the other | |
1176 | cases. Knowing this will help in register status updating below. */ | |
1177 | i2dest_in_i2src = reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, i2src); | |
1178 | i1dest_in_i1src = i1 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, i1src); | |
1179 | i2dest_in_i1src = i1 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, i1src); | |
1180 | ||
916f14f1 | 1181 | /* See if I1 directly feeds into I3. It does if I1DEST is not used |
230d793d RS |
1182 | in I2SRC. */ |
1183 | i1_feeds_i3 = i1 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, i2src); | |
1184 | ||
1185 | /* Ensure that I3's pattern can be the destination of combines. */ | |
1186 | if (! combinable_i3pat (i3, &PATTERN (i3), i2dest, i1dest, | |
1187 | i1 && i2dest_in_i1src && i1_feeds_i3, | |
1188 | &i3dest_killed)) | |
1189 | { | |
1190 | undo_all (); | |
1191 | return 0; | |
1192 | } | |
1193 | ||
1194 | /* If I3 has an inc, then give up if I1 or I2 uses the reg that is inc'd. | |
1195 | We used to do this EXCEPT in one case: I3 has a post-inc in an | |
1196 | output operand. However, that exception can give rise to insns like | |
1197 | mov r3,(r3)+ | |
1198 | which is a famous insn on the PDP-11 where the value of r3 used as the | |
5089e22e | 1199 | source was model-dependent. Avoid this sort of thing. */ |
230d793d RS |
1200 | |
1201 | #if 0 | |
1202 | if (!(GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET | |
1203 | && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) == REG | |
1204 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))) == MEM | |
1205 | && (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)), 0)) == POST_INC | |
1206 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)), 0)) == POST_DEC))) | |
1207 | /* It's not the exception. */ | |
1208 | #endif | |
1209 | #ifdef AUTO_INC_DEC | |
1210 | for (link = REG_NOTES (i3); link; link = XEXP (link, 1)) | |
1211 | if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC | |
1212 | && (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (i2)) | |
1213 | || (i1 != 0 | |
1214 | && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (i1))))) | |
1215 | { | |
1216 | undo_all (); | |
1217 | return 0; | |
1218 | } | |
1219 | #endif | |
1220 | ||
1221 | /* See if the SETs in I1 or I2 need to be kept around in the merged | |
1222 | instruction: whenever the value set there is still needed past I3. | |
1223 | For the SETs in I2, this is easy: we see if I2DEST dies or is set in I3. | |
1224 | ||
1225 | For the SET in I1, we have two cases: If I1 and I2 independently | |
1226 | feed into I3, the set in I1 needs to be kept around if I1DEST dies | |
1227 | or is set in I3. Otherwise (if I1 feeds I2 which feeds I3), the set | |
1228 | in I1 needs to be kept around unless I1DEST dies or is set in either | |
1229 | I2 or I3. We can distinguish these cases by seeing if I2SRC mentions | |
1230 | I1DEST. If so, we know I1 feeds into I2. */ | |
1231 | ||
1232 | added_sets_2 = ! dead_or_set_p (i3, i2dest); | |
1233 | ||
1234 | added_sets_1 | |
1235 | = i1 && ! (i1_feeds_i3 ? dead_or_set_p (i3, i1dest) | |
1236 | : (dead_or_set_p (i3, i1dest) || dead_or_set_p (i2, i1dest))); | |
1237 | ||
1238 | /* If the set in I2 needs to be kept around, we must make a copy of | |
1239 | PATTERN (I2), so that when we substitute I1SRC for I1DEST in | |
5089e22e | 1240 | PATTERN (I2), we are only substituting for the original I1DEST, not into |
230d793d RS |
1241 | an already-substituted copy. This also prevents making self-referential |
1242 | rtx. If I2 is a PARALLEL, we just need the piece that assigns I2SRC to | |
1243 | I2DEST. */ | |
1244 | ||
1245 | i2pat = (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2)) == PARALLEL | |
1246 | ? gen_rtx (SET, VOIDmode, i2dest, i2src) | |
1247 | : PATTERN (i2)); | |
1248 | ||
1249 | if (added_sets_2) | |
1250 | i2pat = copy_rtx (i2pat); | |
1251 | ||
1252 | combine_merges++; | |
1253 | ||
1254 | /* Substitute in the latest insn for the regs set by the earlier ones. */ | |
1255 | ||
1256 | maxreg = max_reg_num (); | |
1257 | ||
1258 | subst_insn = i3; | |
230d793d RS |
1259 | |
1260 | /* It is possible that the source of I2 or I1 may be performing an | |
1261 | unneeded operation, such as a ZERO_EXTEND of something that is known | |
1262 | to have the high part zero. Handle that case by letting subst look at | |
1263 | the innermost one of them. | |
1264 | ||
1265 | Another way to do this would be to have a function that tries to | |
1266 | simplify a single insn instead of merging two or more insns. We don't | |
1267 | do this because of the potential of infinite loops and because | |
1268 | of the potential extra memory required. However, doing it the way | |
1269 | we are is a bit of a kludge and doesn't catch all cases. | |
1270 | ||
1271 | But only do this if -fexpensive-optimizations since it slows things down | |
1272 | and doesn't usually win. */ | |
1273 | ||
1274 | if (flag_expensive_optimizations) | |
1275 | { | |
1276 | /* Pass pc_rtx so no substitutions are done, just simplifications. | |
1277 | The cases that we are interested in here do not involve the few | |
1278 | cases were is_replaced is checked. */ | |
1279 | if (i1) | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
1280 | { |
1281 | subst_low_cuid = INSN_CUID (i1); | |
1282 | i1src = subst (i1src, pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0); | |
1283 | } | |
230d793d | 1284 | else |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
1285 | { |
1286 | subst_low_cuid = INSN_CUID (i2); | |
1287 | i2src = subst (i2src, pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0); | |
1288 | } | |
230d793d RS |
1289 | |
1290 | previous_num_undos = undobuf.num_undo; | |
1291 | } | |
1292 | ||
1293 | #ifndef HAVE_cc0 | |
1294 | /* Many machines that don't use CC0 have insns that can both perform an | |
1295 | arithmetic operation and set the condition code. These operations will | |
1296 | be represented as a PARALLEL with the first element of the vector | |
1297 | being a COMPARE of an arithmetic operation with the constant zero. | |
1298 | The second element of the vector will set some pseudo to the result | |
1299 | of the same arithmetic operation. If we simplify the COMPARE, we won't | |
1300 | match such a pattern and so will generate an extra insn. Here we test | |
1301 | for this case, where both the comparison and the operation result are | |
1302 | needed, and make the PARALLEL by just replacing I2DEST in I3SRC with | |
1303 | I2SRC. Later we will make the PARALLEL that contains I2. */ | |
1304 | ||
1305 | if (i1 == 0 && added_sets_2 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET | |
1306 | && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) == COMPARE | |
1307 | && XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)), 1) == const0_rtx | |
1308 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)), 0), i2dest)) | |
1309 | { | |
1310 | rtx *cc_use; | |
1311 | enum machine_mode compare_mode; | |
1312 | ||
1313 | newpat = PATTERN (i3); | |
1314 | SUBST (XEXP (SET_SRC (newpat), 0), i2src); | |
1315 | ||
1316 | i2_is_used = 1; | |
1317 | ||
1318 | #ifdef EXTRA_CC_MODES | |
1319 | /* See if a COMPARE with the operand we substituted in should be done | |
1320 | with the mode that is currently being used. If not, do the same | |
1321 | processing we do in `subst' for a SET; namely, if the destination | |
1322 | is used only once, try to replace it with a register of the proper | |
1323 | mode and also replace the COMPARE. */ | |
1324 | if (undobuf.other_insn == 0 | |
1325 | && (cc_use = find_single_use (SET_DEST (newpat), i3, | |
1326 | &undobuf.other_insn)) | |
77fa0940 RK |
1327 | && ((compare_mode = SELECT_CC_MODE (GET_CODE (*cc_use), |
1328 | i2src, const0_rtx)) | |
230d793d RS |
1329 | != GET_MODE (SET_DEST (newpat)))) |
1330 | { | |
1331 | int regno = REGNO (SET_DEST (newpat)); | |
1332 | rtx new_dest = gen_rtx (REG, compare_mode, regno); | |
1333 | ||
1334 | if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
1335 | || (reg_n_sets[regno] == 1 && ! added_sets_2 | |
1336 | && ! REG_USERVAR_P (SET_DEST (newpat)))) | |
1337 | { | |
1338 | if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) | |
1339 | SUBST (regno_reg_rtx[regno], new_dest); | |
1340 | ||
1341 | SUBST (SET_DEST (newpat), new_dest); | |
1342 | SUBST (XEXP (*cc_use, 0), new_dest); | |
1343 | SUBST (SET_SRC (newpat), | |
1344 | gen_rtx_combine (COMPARE, compare_mode, | |
1345 | i2src, const0_rtx)); | |
1346 | } | |
1347 | else | |
1348 | undobuf.other_insn = 0; | |
1349 | } | |
1350 | #endif | |
1351 | } | |
1352 | else | |
1353 | #endif | |
1354 | { | |
1355 | n_occurrences = 0; /* `subst' counts here */ | |
1356 | ||
1357 | /* If I1 feeds into I2 (not into I3) and I1DEST is in I1SRC, we | |
1358 | need to make a unique copy of I2SRC each time we substitute it | |
1359 | to avoid self-referential rtl. */ | |
1360 | ||
d0ab8cd3 | 1361 | subst_low_cuid = INSN_CUID (i2); |
230d793d RS |
1362 | newpat = subst (PATTERN (i3), i2dest, i2src, 0, |
1363 | ! i1_feeds_i3 && i1dest_in_i1src); | |
1364 | previous_num_undos = undobuf.num_undo; | |
1365 | ||
1366 | /* Record whether i2's body now appears within i3's body. */ | |
1367 | i2_is_used = n_occurrences; | |
1368 | } | |
1369 | ||
1370 | /* If we already got a failure, don't try to do more. Otherwise, | |
1371 | try to substitute in I1 if we have it. */ | |
1372 | ||
1373 | if (i1 && GET_CODE (newpat) != CLOBBER) | |
1374 | { | |
1375 | /* Before we can do this substitution, we must redo the test done | |
1376 | above (see detailed comments there) that ensures that I1DEST | |
1377 | isn't mentioned in any SETs in NEWPAT that are field assignments. */ | |
1378 | ||
5f4f0e22 CH |
1379 | if (! combinable_i3pat (NULL_RTX, &newpat, i1dest, NULL_RTX, |
1380 | 0, NULL_PTR)) | |
230d793d RS |
1381 | { |
1382 | undo_all (); | |
1383 | return 0; | |
1384 | } | |
1385 | ||
1386 | n_occurrences = 0; | |
d0ab8cd3 | 1387 | subst_low_cuid = INSN_CUID (i1); |
230d793d RS |
1388 | newpat = subst (newpat, i1dest, i1src, 0, 0); |
1389 | previous_num_undos = undobuf.num_undo; | |
1390 | } | |
1391 | ||
916f14f1 RK |
1392 | /* Fail if an autoincrement side-effect has been duplicated. Be careful |
1393 | to count all the ways that I2SRC and I1SRC can be used. */ | |
5f4f0e22 | 1394 | if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i2, NULL_RTX) != 0 |
916f14f1 | 1395 | && i2_is_used + added_sets_2 > 1) |
5f4f0e22 | 1396 | || (i1 != 0 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i1, NULL_RTX) != 0 |
916f14f1 RK |
1397 | && (n_occurrences + added_sets_1 + (added_sets_2 && ! i1_feeds_i3) |
1398 | > 1)) | |
230d793d RS |
1399 | /* Fail if we tried to make a new register (we used to abort, but there's |
1400 | really no reason to). */ | |
1401 | || max_reg_num () != maxreg | |
1402 | /* Fail if we couldn't do something and have a CLOBBER. */ | |
1403 | || GET_CODE (newpat) == CLOBBER) | |
1404 | { | |
1405 | undo_all (); | |
1406 | return 0; | |
1407 | } | |
1408 | ||
1409 | /* If the actions of the earlier insns must be kept | |
1410 | in addition to substituting them into the latest one, | |
1411 | we must make a new PARALLEL for the latest insn | |
1412 | to hold additional the SETs. */ | |
1413 | ||
1414 | if (added_sets_1 || added_sets_2) | |
1415 | { | |
1416 | combine_extras++; | |
1417 | ||
1418 | if (GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL) | |
1419 | { | |
1420 | rtvec old = XVEC (newpat, 0); | |
1421 | total_sets = XVECLEN (newpat, 0) + added_sets_1 + added_sets_2; | |
1422 | newpat = gen_rtx (PARALLEL, VOIDmode, rtvec_alloc (total_sets)); | |
1423 | bcopy (&old->elem[0], &XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0), | |
1424 | sizeof (old->elem[0]) * old->num_elem); | |
1425 | } | |
1426 | else | |
1427 | { | |
1428 | rtx old = newpat; | |
1429 | total_sets = 1 + added_sets_1 + added_sets_2; | |
1430 | newpat = gen_rtx (PARALLEL, VOIDmode, rtvec_alloc (total_sets)); | |
1431 | XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0) = old; | |
1432 | } | |
1433 | ||
1434 | if (added_sets_1) | |
1435 | XVECEXP (newpat, 0, --total_sets) | |
1436 | = (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i1)) == PARALLEL | |
1437 | ? gen_rtx (SET, VOIDmode, i1dest, i1src) : PATTERN (i1)); | |
1438 | ||
1439 | if (added_sets_2) | |
1440 | { | |
1441 | /* If there is no I1, use I2's body as is. We used to also not do | |
1442 | the subst call below if I2 was substituted into I3, | |
1443 | but that could lose a simplification. */ | |
1444 | if (i1 == 0) | |
1445 | XVECEXP (newpat, 0, --total_sets) = i2pat; | |
1446 | else | |
1447 | /* See comment where i2pat is assigned. */ | |
1448 | XVECEXP (newpat, 0, --total_sets) | |
1449 | = subst (i2pat, i1dest, i1src, 0, 0); | |
1450 | } | |
1451 | } | |
1452 | ||
1453 | /* We come here when we are replacing a destination in I2 with the | |
1454 | destination of I3. */ | |
1455 | validate_replacement: | |
1456 | ||
1457 | /* Is the result of combination a valid instruction? */ | |
1458 | insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes); | |
1459 | ||
1460 | /* If the result isn't valid, see if it is a PARALLEL of two SETs where | |
1461 | the second SET's destination is a register that is unused. In that case, | |
1462 | we just need the first SET. This can occur when simplifying a divmod | |
1463 | insn. We *must* test for this case here because the code below that | |
1464 | splits two independent SETs doesn't handle this case correctly when it | |
1465 | updates the register status. Also check the case where the first | |
1466 | SET's destination is unused. That would not cause incorrect code, but | |
1467 | does cause an unneeded insn to remain. */ | |
1468 | ||
1469 | if (insn_code_number < 0 && GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL | |
1470 | && XVECLEN (newpat, 0) == 2 | |
1471 | && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)) == SET | |
1472 | && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)) == SET | |
1473 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) == REG | |
1474 | && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) | |
1475 | && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) | |
1476 | && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0) | |
1477 | { | |
1478 | newpat = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0); | |
1479 | insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes); | |
1480 | } | |
1481 | ||
1482 | else if (insn_code_number < 0 && GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL | |
1483 | && XVECLEN (newpat, 0) == 2 | |
1484 | && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)) == SET | |
1485 | && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)) == SET | |
1486 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) == REG | |
1487 | && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) | |
1488 | && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) | |
1489 | && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0) | |
1490 | { | |
1491 | newpat = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1); | |
1492 | insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes); | |
1493 | } | |
1494 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
1495 | /* See if this is an XOR. If so, perhaps the problem is that the |
1496 | constant is out of range. Replace it with a complemented XOR with | |
1497 | a complemented constant; it might be in range. */ | |
1498 | ||
1499 | else if (insn_code_number < 0 && GET_CODE (newpat) == SET | |
1500 | && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (newpat)) == XOR | |
1501 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (newpat), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
1502 | && ((temp = simplify_unary_operation (NOT, | |
1503 | GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat)), | |
1504 | XEXP (SET_SRC (newpat), 1), | |
1505 | GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat)))) | |
1506 | != 0)) | |
1507 | { | |
1508 | enum machine_mode i_mode = GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat)); | |
1509 | rtx pat | |
1510 | = gen_rtx_combine (SET, VOIDmode, SET_DEST (newpat), | |
1511 | gen_unary (NOT, i_mode, | |
1512 | gen_binary (XOR, i_mode, | |
1513 | XEXP (SET_SRC (newpat), 0), | |
1514 | temp))); | |
1515 | ||
1516 | insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&pat, i3, &new_i3_notes); | |
1517 | if (insn_code_number >= 0) | |
1518 | newpat = pat; | |
1519 | } | |
1520 | ||
230d793d RS |
1521 | /* If we were combining three insns and the result is a simple SET |
1522 | with no ASM_OPERANDS that wasn't recognized, try to split it into two | |
916f14f1 RK |
1523 | insns. There are two ways to do this. It can be split using a |
1524 | machine-specific method (like when you have an addition of a large | |
1525 | constant) or by combine in the function find_split_point. */ | |
1526 | ||
230d793d RS |
1527 | if (i1 && insn_code_number < 0 && GET_CODE (newpat) == SET |
1528 | && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0) | |
1529 | { | |
916f14f1 | 1530 | rtx m_split, *split; |
42495ca0 | 1531 | rtx ni2dest = i2dest; |
916f14f1 RK |
1532 | |
1533 | /* See if the MD file can split NEWPAT. If it can't, see if letting it | |
42495ca0 RK |
1534 | use I2DEST as a scratch register will help. In the latter case, |
1535 | convert I2DEST to the mode of the source of NEWPAT if we can. */ | |
916f14f1 RK |
1536 | |
1537 | m_split = split_insns (newpat, i3); | |
1538 | if (m_split == 0) | |
42495ca0 RK |
1539 | { |
1540 | /* If I2DEST is a hard register or the only use of a pseudo, | |
1541 | we can change its mode. */ | |
1542 | if (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (newpat)) != GET_MODE (i2dest) | |
02f4ada4 | 1543 | && GET_MODE (SET_DEST (newpat)) != VOIDmode |
60654f77 | 1544 | && GET_CODE (i2dest) == REG |
42495ca0 RK |
1545 | && (REGNO (i2dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER |
1546 | || (reg_n_sets[REGNO (i2dest)] == 1 && ! added_sets_2 | |
1547 | && ! REG_USERVAR_P (i2dest)))) | |
1548 | ni2dest = gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (SET_DEST (newpat)), | |
1549 | REGNO (i2dest)); | |
1550 | ||
1551 | m_split = split_insns (gen_rtx (PARALLEL, VOIDmode, | |
1552 | gen_rtvec (2, newpat, | |
1553 | gen_rtx (CLOBBER, | |
1554 | VOIDmode, | |
1555 | ni2dest))), | |
1556 | i3); | |
1557 | } | |
916f14f1 RK |
1558 | |
1559 | if (m_split && GET_CODE (m_split) == SEQUENCE | |
3f508eca RK |
1560 | && XVECLEN (m_split, 0) == 2 |
1561 | && (next_real_insn (i2) == i3 | |
1562 | || ! use_crosses_set_p (PATTERN (XVECEXP (m_split, 0, 0)), | |
1563 | INSN_CUID (i2)))) | |
916f14f1 | 1564 | { |
1a26b032 | 1565 | rtx i2set, i3set; |
d0ab8cd3 | 1566 | rtx newi3pat = PATTERN (XVECEXP (m_split, 0, 1)); |
916f14f1 | 1567 | newi2pat = PATTERN (XVECEXP (m_split, 0, 0)); |
916f14f1 | 1568 | |
e4ba89be RK |
1569 | i3set = single_set (XVECEXP (m_split, 0, 1)); |
1570 | i2set = single_set (XVECEXP (m_split, 0, 0)); | |
1a26b032 | 1571 | |
42495ca0 RK |
1572 | /* In case we changed the mode of I2DEST, replace it in the |
1573 | pseudo-register table here. We can't do it above in case this | |
1574 | code doesn't get executed and we do a split the other way. */ | |
1575 | ||
1576 | if (REGNO (i2dest) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) | |
1577 | SUBST (regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)], ni2dest); | |
1578 | ||
916f14f1 | 1579 | i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes); |
1a26b032 RK |
1580 | |
1581 | /* If I2 or I3 has multiple SETs, we won't know how to track | |
1582 | register status, so don't use these insns. */ | |
1583 | ||
1584 | if (i2_code_number >= 0 && i2set && i3set) | |
8888fada RK |
1585 | insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi3pat, i3, |
1586 | &new_i3_notes); | |
c767f54b | 1587 | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
1588 | if (insn_code_number >= 0) |
1589 | newpat = newi3pat; | |
1590 | ||
c767f54b | 1591 | /* It is possible that both insns now set the destination of I3. |
22609cbf | 1592 | If so, we must show an extra use of it. */ |
c767f54b | 1593 | |
1a26b032 RK |
1594 | if (insn_code_number >= 0 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (i3set)) == REG |
1595 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (i2set)) == REG | |
1596 | && REGNO (SET_DEST (i3set)) == REGNO (SET_DEST (i2set))) | |
22609cbf | 1597 | reg_n_sets[REGNO (SET_DEST (i2set))]++; |
916f14f1 | 1598 | } |
230d793d RS |
1599 | |
1600 | /* If we can split it and use I2DEST, go ahead and see if that | |
1601 | helps things be recognized. Verify that none of the registers | |
1602 | are set between I2 and I3. */ | |
d0ab8cd3 | 1603 | if (insn_code_number < 0 && (split = find_split_point (&newpat, i3)) != 0 |
230d793d RS |
1604 | #ifdef HAVE_cc0 |
1605 | && GET_CODE (i2dest) == REG | |
1606 | #endif | |
1607 | /* We need I2DEST in the proper mode. If it is a hard register | |
1608 | or the only use of a pseudo, we can change its mode. */ | |
1609 | && (GET_MODE (*split) == GET_MODE (i2dest) | |
1610 | || GET_MODE (*split) == VOIDmode | |
1611 | || REGNO (i2dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
1612 | || (reg_n_sets[REGNO (i2dest)] == 1 && ! added_sets_2 | |
1613 | && ! REG_USERVAR_P (i2dest))) | |
1614 | && (next_real_insn (i2) == i3 | |
1615 | || ! use_crosses_set_p (*split, INSN_CUID (i2))) | |
1616 | /* We can't overwrite I2DEST if its value is still used by | |
1617 | NEWPAT. */ | |
1618 | && ! reg_referenced_p (i2dest, newpat)) | |
1619 | { | |
1620 | rtx newdest = i2dest; | |
1621 | ||
1622 | /* Get NEWDEST as a register in the proper mode. We have already | |
1623 | validated that we can do this. */ | |
1624 | if (GET_MODE (i2dest) != GET_MODE (*split) | |
1625 | && GET_MODE (*split) != VOIDmode) | |
1626 | { | |
1627 | newdest = gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (*split), REGNO (i2dest)); | |
1628 | ||
1629 | if (REGNO (i2dest) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) | |
1630 | SUBST (regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)], newdest); | |
1631 | } | |
1632 | ||
1633 | /* If *SPLIT is a (mult FOO (const_int pow2)), convert it to | |
1634 | an ASHIFT. This can occur if it was inside a PLUS and hence | |
1635 | appeared to be a memory address. This is a kludge. */ | |
1636 | if (GET_CODE (*split) == MULT | |
1637 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (*split, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
1638 | && (i = exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (*split, 1)))) >= 0) | |
1639 | SUBST (*split, gen_rtx_combine (ASHIFT, GET_MODE (*split), | |
5f4f0e22 | 1640 | XEXP (*split, 0), GEN_INT (i))); |
230d793d RS |
1641 | |
1642 | #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING | |
1643 | /* If *SPLIT is a paradoxical SUBREG, when we split it, it should | |
1644 | be written as a ZERO_EXTEND. */ | |
1645 | if (GET_CODE (*split) == SUBREG | |
1646 | && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (*split)) == MEM) | |
1647 | SUBST (*split, gen_rtx_combine (ZERO_EXTEND, GET_MODE (*split), | |
1648 | XEXP (*split, 0))); | |
1649 | #endif | |
1650 | ||
1651 | newi2pat = gen_rtx_combine (SET, VOIDmode, newdest, *split); | |
1652 | SUBST (*split, newdest); | |
1653 | i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes); | |
1654 | if (i2_code_number >= 0) | |
1655 | insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes); | |
1656 | } | |
1657 | } | |
1658 | ||
1659 | /* Check for a case where we loaded from memory in a narrow mode and | |
1660 | then sign extended it, but we need both registers. In that case, | |
1661 | we have a PARALLEL with both loads from the same memory location. | |
1662 | We can split this into a load from memory followed by a register-register | |
1663 | copy. This saves at least one insn, more if register allocation can | |
1664 | eliminate the copy. */ | |
1665 | ||
1666 | else if (i1 && insn_code_number < 0 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0 | |
1667 | && GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL | |
1668 | && XVECLEN (newpat, 0) == 2 | |
1669 | && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)) == SET | |
1670 | && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) == SIGN_EXTEND | |
1671 | && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)) == SET | |
1672 | && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)), | |
1673 | XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)), 0)) | |
1674 | && ! use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)), | |
1675 | INSN_CUID (i2)) | |
1676 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != ZERO_EXTRACT | |
1677 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != STRICT_LOW_PART | |
1678 | && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)), | |
1679 | SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) | |
1680 | && ! find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, | |
1681 | SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)))) | |
1682 | { | |
472fbdd1 RK |
1683 | rtx ni2dest; |
1684 | ||
230d793d | 1685 | newi2pat = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0); |
472fbdd1 | 1686 | ni2dest = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)); |
230d793d RS |
1687 | newpat = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1); |
1688 | SUBST (SET_SRC (newpat), | |
472fbdd1 | 1689 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat)), ni2dest)); |
230d793d RS |
1690 | i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes); |
1691 | if (i2_code_number >= 0) | |
1692 | insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes); | |
5089e22e RS |
1693 | |
1694 | if (insn_code_number >= 0) | |
1695 | { | |
1696 | rtx insn; | |
1697 | rtx link; | |
1698 | ||
1699 | /* If we will be able to accept this, we have made a change to the | |
1700 | destination of I3. This can invalidate a LOG_LINKS pointing | |
1701 | to I3. No other part of combine.c makes such a transformation. | |
1702 | ||
1703 | The new I3 will have a destination that was previously the | |
1704 | destination of I1 or I2 and which was used in i2 or I3. Call | |
1705 | distribute_links to make a LOG_LINK from the next use of | |
1706 | that destination. */ | |
1707 | ||
1708 | PATTERN (i3) = newpat; | |
5f4f0e22 | 1709 | distribute_links (gen_rtx (INSN_LIST, VOIDmode, i3, NULL_RTX)); |
5089e22e RS |
1710 | |
1711 | /* I3 now uses what used to be its destination and which is | |
1712 | now I2's destination. That means we need a LOG_LINK from | |
1713 | I3 to I2. But we used to have one, so we still will. | |
1714 | ||
1715 | However, some later insn might be using I2's dest and have | |
1716 | a LOG_LINK pointing at I3. We must remove this link. | |
1717 | The simplest way to remove the link is to point it at I1, | |
1718 | which we know will be a NOTE. */ | |
1719 | ||
1720 | for (insn = NEXT_INSN (i3); | |
1721 | insn && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL | |
1722 | && GET_CODE (PREV_INSN (insn)) != JUMP_INSN; | |
1723 | insn = NEXT_INSN (insn)) | |
1724 | { | |
1725 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i' | |
472fbdd1 | 1726 | && reg_referenced_p (ni2dest, PATTERN (insn))) |
5089e22e RS |
1727 | { |
1728 | for (link = LOG_LINKS (insn); link; | |
1729 | link = XEXP (link, 1)) | |
1730 | if (XEXP (link, 0) == i3) | |
1731 | XEXP (link, 0) = i1; | |
1732 | ||
1733 | break; | |
1734 | } | |
1735 | } | |
1736 | } | |
230d793d RS |
1737 | } |
1738 | ||
1739 | /* Similarly, check for a case where we have a PARALLEL of two independent | |
1740 | SETs but we started with three insns. In this case, we can do the sets | |
1741 | as two separate insns. This case occurs when some SET allows two | |
1742 | other insns to combine, but the destination of that SET is still live. */ | |
1743 | ||
1744 | else if (i1 && insn_code_number < 0 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0 | |
1745 | && GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL | |
1746 | && XVECLEN (newpat, 0) == 2 | |
1747 | && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)) == SET | |
1748 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) != ZERO_EXTRACT | |
1749 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) != STRICT_LOW_PART | |
1750 | && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)) == SET | |
1751 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != ZERO_EXTRACT | |
1752 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != STRICT_LOW_PART | |
1753 | && ! use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)), | |
1754 | INSN_CUID (i2)) | |
1755 | /* Don't pass sets with (USE (MEM ...)) dests to the following. */ | |
1756 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != USE | |
1757 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) != USE | |
1758 | && ! reg_referenced_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)), | |
1759 | XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)) | |
1760 | && ! reg_referenced_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)), | |
1761 | XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) | |
1762 | { | |
1763 | newi2pat = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1); | |
1764 | newpat = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0); | |
1765 | ||
1766 | i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes); | |
1767 | if (i2_code_number >= 0) | |
1768 | insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes); | |
1769 | } | |
1770 | ||
1771 | /* If it still isn't recognized, fail and change things back the way they | |
1772 | were. */ | |
1773 | if ((insn_code_number < 0 | |
1774 | /* Is the result a reasonable ASM_OPERANDS? */ | |
1775 | && (! check_asm_operands (newpat) || added_sets_1 || added_sets_2))) | |
1776 | { | |
1777 | undo_all (); | |
1778 | return 0; | |
1779 | } | |
1780 | ||
1781 | /* If we had to change another insn, make sure it is valid also. */ | |
1782 | if (undobuf.other_insn) | |
1783 | { | |
1784 | rtx other_notes = REG_NOTES (undobuf.other_insn); | |
1785 | rtx other_pat = PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn); | |
1786 | rtx new_other_notes; | |
1787 | rtx note, next; | |
1788 | ||
1789 | other_code_number = recog_for_combine (&other_pat, undobuf.other_insn, | |
1790 | &new_other_notes); | |
1791 | ||
1792 | if (other_code_number < 0 && ! check_asm_operands (other_pat)) | |
1793 | { | |
1794 | undo_all (); | |
1795 | return 0; | |
1796 | } | |
1797 | ||
1798 | PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn) = other_pat; | |
1799 | ||
1800 | /* If any of the notes in OTHER_INSN were REG_UNUSED, ensure that they | |
1801 | are still valid. Then add any non-duplicate notes added by | |
1802 | recog_for_combine. */ | |
1803 | for (note = REG_NOTES (undobuf.other_insn); note; note = next) | |
1804 | { | |
1805 | next = XEXP (note, 1); | |
1806 | ||
1807 | if (REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_UNUSED | |
1808 | && ! reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn))) | |
1a26b032 RK |
1809 | { |
1810 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == REG) | |
1811 | reg_n_deaths[REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))]--; | |
1812 | ||
1813 | remove_note (undobuf.other_insn, note); | |
1814 | } | |
230d793d RS |
1815 | } |
1816 | ||
1a26b032 RK |
1817 | for (note = new_other_notes; note; note = XEXP (note, 1)) |
1818 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == REG) | |
1819 | reg_n_deaths[REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))]++; | |
1820 | ||
230d793d | 1821 | distribute_notes (new_other_notes, undobuf.other_insn, |
5f4f0e22 | 1822 | undobuf.other_insn, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX); |
230d793d RS |
1823 | } |
1824 | ||
1825 | /* We now know that we can do this combination. Merge the insns and | |
1826 | update the status of registers and LOG_LINKS. */ | |
1827 | ||
1828 | { | |
1829 | rtx i3notes, i2notes, i1notes = 0; | |
1830 | rtx i3links, i2links, i1links = 0; | |
1831 | rtx midnotes = 0; | |
1832 | int all_adjacent = (next_real_insn (i2) == i3 | |
1833 | && (i1 == 0 || next_real_insn (i1) == i2)); | |
1834 | register int regno; | |
1835 | /* Compute which registers we expect to eliminate. */ | |
1836 | rtx elim_i2 = (newi2pat || i2dest_in_i2src || i2dest_in_i1src | |
1837 | ? 0 : i2dest); | |
1838 | rtx elim_i1 = i1 == 0 || i1dest_in_i1src ? 0 : i1dest; | |
1839 | ||
1840 | /* Get the old REG_NOTES and LOG_LINKS from all our insns and | |
1841 | clear them. */ | |
1842 | i3notes = REG_NOTES (i3), i3links = LOG_LINKS (i3); | |
1843 | i2notes = REG_NOTES (i2), i2links = LOG_LINKS (i2); | |
1844 | if (i1) | |
1845 | i1notes = REG_NOTES (i1), i1links = LOG_LINKS (i1); | |
1846 | ||
1847 | /* Ensure that we do not have something that should not be shared but | |
1848 | occurs multiple times in the new insns. Check this by first | |
5089e22e | 1849 | resetting all the `used' flags and then copying anything is shared. */ |
230d793d RS |
1850 | |
1851 | reset_used_flags (i3notes); | |
1852 | reset_used_flags (i2notes); | |
1853 | reset_used_flags (i1notes); | |
1854 | reset_used_flags (newpat); | |
1855 | reset_used_flags (newi2pat); | |
1856 | if (undobuf.other_insn) | |
1857 | reset_used_flags (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)); | |
1858 | ||
1859 | i3notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i3notes); | |
1860 | i2notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i2notes); | |
1861 | i1notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i1notes); | |
1862 | newpat = copy_rtx_if_shared (newpat); | |
1863 | newi2pat = copy_rtx_if_shared (newi2pat); | |
1864 | if (undobuf.other_insn) | |
1865 | reset_used_flags (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)); | |
1866 | ||
1867 | INSN_CODE (i3) = insn_code_number; | |
1868 | PATTERN (i3) = newpat; | |
1869 | if (undobuf.other_insn) | |
1870 | INSN_CODE (undobuf.other_insn) = other_code_number; | |
1871 | ||
1872 | /* We had one special case above where I2 had more than one set and | |
1873 | we replaced a destination of one of those sets with the destination | |
1874 | of I3. In that case, we have to update LOG_LINKS of insns later | |
1875 | in this basic block. Note that this (expensive) case is rare. */ | |
1876 | ||
1877 | if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2)) == PARALLEL) | |
1878 | for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (PATTERN (i2), 0); i++) | |
1879 | if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i))) == REG | |
1880 | && SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)) != i2dest | |
1881 | && ! find_reg_note (i2, REG_UNUSED, | |
1882 | SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)))) | |
1883 | { | |
1884 | register rtx insn; | |
1885 | ||
1886 | for (insn = NEXT_INSN (i2); insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn)) | |
1887 | { | |
1888 | if (insn != i3 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i') | |
1889 | for (link = LOG_LINKS (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1)) | |
1890 | if (XEXP (link, 0) == i2) | |
1891 | XEXP (link, 0) = i3; | |
1892 | ||
1893 | if (GET_CODE (insn) == CODE_LABEL | |
1894 | || GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN) | |
1895 | break; | |
1896 | } | |
1897 | } | |
1898 | ||
1899 | LOG_LINKS (i3) = 0; | |
1900 | REG_NOTES (i3) = 0; | |
1901 | LOG_LINKS (i2) = 0; | |
1902 | REG_NOTES (i2) = 0; | |
1903 | ||
1904 | if (newi2pat) | |
1905 | { | |
1906 | INSN_CODE (i2) = i2_code_number; | |
1907 | PATTERN (i2) = newi2pat; | |
1908 | } | |
1909 | else | |
1910 | { | |
1911 | PUT_CODE (i2, NOTE); | |
1912 | NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (i2) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED; | |
1913 | NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (i2) = 0; | |
1914 | } | |
1915 | ||
1916 | if (i1) | |
1917 | { | |
1918 | LOG_LINKS (i1) = 0; | |
1919 | REG_NOTES (i1) = 0; | |
1920 | PUT_CODE (i1, NOTE); | |
1921 | NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (i1) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED; | |
1922 | NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (i1) = 0; | |
1923 | } | |
1924 | ||
1925 | /* Get death notes for everything that is now used in either I3 or | |
1926 | I2 and used to die in a previous insn. */ | |
1927 | ||
1928 | move_deaths (newpat, i1 ? INSN_CUID (i1) : INSN_CUID (i2), i3, &midnotes); | |
1929 | if (newi2pat) | |
1930 | move_deaths (newi2pat, INSN_CUID (i1), i2, &midnotes); | |
1931 | ||
1932 | /* Distribute all the LOG_LINKS and REG_NOTES from I1, I2, and I3. */ | |
1933 | if (i3notes) | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
1934 | distribute_notes (i3notes, i3, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL_RTX, |
1935 | elim_i2, elim_i1); | |
230d793d | 1936 | if (i2notes) |
5f4f0e22 CH |
1937 | distribute_notes (i2notes, i2, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL_RTX, |
1938 | elim_i2, elim_i1); | |
230d793d | 1939 | if (i1notes) |
5f4f0e22 CH |
1940 | distribute_notes (i1notes, i1, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL_RTX, |
1941 | elim_i2, elim_i1); | |
230d793d | 1942 | if (midnotes) |
5f4f0e22 CH |
1943 | distribute_notes (midnotes, NULL_RTX, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL_RTX, |
1944 | elim_i2, elim_i1); | |
230d793d RS |
1945 | |
1946 | /* Distribute any notes added to I2 or I3 by recog_for_combine. We | |
1947 | know these are REG_UNUSED and want them to go to the desired insn, | |
1a26b032 RK |
1948 | so we always pass it as i3. We have not counted the notes in |
1949 | reg_n_deaths yet, so we need to do so now. */ | |
1950 | ||
230d793d | 1951 | if (newi2pat && new_i2_notes) |
1a26b032 RK |
1952 | { |
1953 | for (temp = new_i2_notes; temp; temp = XEXP (temp, 1)) | |
1954 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (temp, 0)) == REG) | |
1955 | reg_n_deaths[REGNO (XEXP (temp, 0))]++; | |
1956 | ||
1957 | distribute_notes (new_i2_notes, i2, i2, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX); | |
1958 | } | |
1959 | ||
230d793d | 1960 | if (new_i3_notes) |
1a26b032 RK |
1961 | { |
1962 | for (temp = new_i3_notes; temp; temp = XEXP (temp, 1)) | |
1963 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (temp, 0)) == REG) | |
1964 | reg_n_deaths[REGNO (XEXP (temp, 0))]++; | |
1965 | ||
1966 | distribute_notes (new_i3_notes, i3, i3, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX); | |
1967 | } | |
230d793d RS |
1968 | |
1969 | /* If I3DEST was used in I3SRC, it really died in I3. We may need to | |
1a26b032 RK |
1970 | put a REG_DEAD note for it somewhere. Similarly for I2 and I1. |
1971 | Show an additional death due to the REG_DEAD note we make here. If | |
1972 | we discard it in distribute_notes, we will decrement it again. */ | |
d0ab8cd3 | 1973 | |
230d793d | 1974 | if (i3dest_killed) |
1a26b032 RK |
1975 | { |
1976 | if (GET_CODE (i3dest_killed) == REG) | |
1977 | reg_n_deaths[REGNO (i3dest_killed)]++; | |
1978 | ||
1979 | distribute_notes (gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_DEAD, i3dest_killed, | |
1980 | NULL_RTX), | |
1981 | NULL_RTX, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL_RTX, | |
1982 | NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX); | |
1983 | } | |
58c8c593 RK |
1984 | |
1985 | /* For I2 and I1, we have to be careful. If NEWI2PAT exists and sets | |
1986 | I2DEST or I1DEST, the death must be somewhere before I2, not I3. If | |
1987 | we passed I3 in that case, it might delete I2. */ | |
1988 | ||
230d793d | 1989 | if (i2dest_in_i2src) |
58c8c593 | 1990 | { |
1a26b032 RK |
1991 | if (GET_CODE (i2dest) == REG) |
1992 | reg_n_deaths[REGNO (i2dest)]++; | |
1993 | ||
58c8c593 RK |
1994 | if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i2dest, newi2pat)) |
1995 | distribute_notes (gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_DEAD, i2dest, NULL_RTX), | |
1996 | NULL_RTX, i2, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX); | |
1997 | else | |
1998 | distribute_notes (gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_DEAD, i2dest, NULL_RTX), | |
1999 | NULL_RTX, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL_RTX, | |
2000 | NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX); | |
2001 | } | |
2002 | ||
230d793d | 2003 | if (i1dest_in_i1src) |
58c8c593 | 2004 | { |
1a26b032 RK |
2005 | if (GET_CODE (i1dest) == REG) |
2006 | reg_n_deaths[REGNO (i1dest)]++; | |
2007 | ||
58c8c593 RK |
2008 | if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i1dest, newi2pat)) |
2009 | distribute_notes (gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_DEAD, i1dest, NULL_RTX), | |
2010 | NULL_RTX, i2, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX); | |
2011 | else | |
2012 | distribute_notes (gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_DEAD, i1dest, NULL_RTX), | |
2013 | NULL_RTX, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL_RTX, | |
2014 | NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX); | |
2015 | } | |
230d793d RS |
2016 | |
2017 | distribute_links (i3links); | |
2018 | distribute_links (i2links); | |
2019 | distribute_links (i1links); | |
2020 | ||
2021 | if (GET_CODE (i2dest) == REG) | |
2022 | { | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2023 | rtx link; |
2024 | rtx i2_insn = 0, i2_val = 0, set; | |
2025 | ||
2026 | /* The insn that used to set this register doesn't exist, and | |
2027 | this life of the register may not exist either. See if one of | |
2028 | I3's links points to an insn that sets I2DEST. If it does, | |
2029 | that is now the last known value for I2DEST. If we don't update | |
2030 | this and I2 set the register to a value that depended on its old | |
230d793d RS |
2031 | contents, we will get confused. If this insn is used, thing |
2032 | will be set correctly in combine_instructions. */ | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2033 | |
2034 | for (link = LOG_LINKS (i3); link; link = XEXP (link, 1)) | |
2035 | if ((set = single_set (XEXP (link, 0))) != 0 | |
2036 | && rtx_equal_p (i2dest, SET_DEST (set))) | |
2037 | i2_insn = XEXP (link, 0), i2_val = SET_SRC (set); | |
2038 | ||
2039 | record_value_for_reg (i2dest, i2_insn, i2_val); | |
230d793d RS |
2040 | |
2041 | /* If the reg formerly set in I2 died only once and that was in I3, | |
2042 | zero its use count so it won't make `reload' do any work. */ | |
2043 | if (! added_sets_2 && newi2pat == 0) | |
2044 | { | |
2045 | regno = REGNO (i2dest); | |
2046 | reg_n_sets[regno]--; | |
2047 | if (reg_n_sets[regno] == 0 | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
2048 | && ! (basic_block_live_at_start[0][regno / REGSET_ELT_BITS] |
2049 | & ((REGSET_ELT_TYPE) 1 << (regno % REGSET_ELT_BITS)))) | |
230d793d RS |
2050 | reg_n_refs[regno] = 0; |
2051 | } | |
2052 | } | |
2053 | ||
2054 | if (i1 && GET_CODE (i1dest) == REG) | |
2055 | { | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2056 | rtx link; |
2057 | rtx i1_insn = 0, i1_val = 0, set; | |
2058 | ||
2059 | for (link = LOG_LINKS (i3); link; link = XEXP (link, 1)) | |
2060 | if ((set = single_set (XEXP (link, 0))) != 0 | |
2061 | && rtx_equal_p (i1dest, SET_DEST (set))) | |
2062 | i1_insn = XEXP (link, 0), i1_val = SET_SRC (set); | |
2063 | ||
2064 | record_value_for_reg (i1dest, i1_insn, i1_val); | |
2065 | ||
230d793d RS |
2066 | regno = REGNO (i1dest); |
2067 | if (! added_sets_1) | |
2068 | { | |
2069 | reg_n_sets[regno]--; | |
2070 | if (reg_n_sets[regno] == 0 | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
2071 | && ! (basic_block_live_at_start[0][regno / REGSET_ELT_BITS] |
2072 | & ((REGSET_ELT_TYPE) 1 << (regno % REGSET_ELT_BITS)))) | |
230d793d RS |
2073 | reg_n_refs[regno] = 0; |
2074 | } | |
2075 | } | |
2076 | ||
22609cbf RK |
2077 | /* Update reg_significant et al for any changes that may have been made |
2078 | to this insn. */ | |
2079 | ||
2080 | note_stores (newpat, set_significant); | |
2081 | if (newi2pat) | |
2082 | note_stores (newi2pat, set_significant); | |
2083 | ||
230d793d RS |
2084 | /* If I3 is now an unconditional jump, ensure that it has a |
2085 | BARRIER following it since it may have initially been a | |
2086 | conditional jump. */ | |
2087 | ||
2088 | if ((GET_CODE (newpat) == RETURN || simplejump_p (i3)) | |
2089 | && GET_CODE (next_nonnote_insn (i3)) != BARRIER) | |
2090 | emit_barrier_after (i3); | |
2091 | } | |
2092 | ||
2093 | combine_successes++; | |
2094 | ||
2095 | return newi2pat ? i2 : i3; | |
2096 | } | |
2097 | \f | |
2098 | /* Undo all the modifications recorded in undobuf. */ | |
2099 | ||
2100 | static void | |
2101 | undo_all () | |
2102 | { | |
2103 | register int i; | |
2104 | if (undobuf.num_undo > MAX_UNDO) | |
2105 | undobuf.num_undo = MAX_UNDO; | |
2106 | for (i = undobuf.num_undo - 1; i >= 0; i--) | |
7c046e4e RK |
2107 | { |
2108 | if (undobuf.undo[i].is_int) | |
2109 | *undobuf.undo[i].where.i = undobuf.undo[i].old_contents.i; | |
2110 | else | |
2111 | *undobuf.undo[i].where.rtx = undobuf.undo[i].old_contents.rtx; | |
2112 | ||
2113 | } | |
230d793d RS |
2114 | |
2115 | obfree (undobuf.storage); | |
2116 | undobuf.num_undo = 0; | |
2117 | } | |
2118 | \f | |
2119 | /* Find the innermost point within the rtx at LOC, possibly LOC itself, | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2120 | where we have an arithmetic expression and return that point. LOC will |
2121 | be inside INSN. | |
230d793d RS |
2122 | |
2123 | try_combine will call this function to see if an insn can be split into | |
2124 | two insns. */ | |
2125 | ||
2126 | static rtx * | |
d0ab8cd3 | 2127 | find_split_point (loc, insn) |
230d793d | 2128 | rtx *loc; |
d0ab8cd3 | 2129 | rtx insn; |
230d793d RS |
2130 | { |
2131 | rtx x = *loc; | |
2132 | enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x); | |
2133 | rtx *split; | |
2134 | int len = 0, pos, unsignedp; | |
2135 | rtx inner; | |
2136 | ||
2137 | /* First special-case some codes. */ | |
2138 | switch (code) | |
2139 | { | |
2140 | case SUBREG: | |
2141 | #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING | |
2142 | /* If we are making a paradoxical SUBREG invalid, it becomes a split | |
2143 | point. */ | |
2144 | if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == MEM) | |
2145 | return loc; | |
2146 | #endif | |
d0ab8cd3 | 2147 | return find_split_point (&SUBREG_REG (x), insn); |
230d793d | 2148 | |
230d793d | 2149 | case MEM: |
916f14f1 | 2150 | #ifdef HAVE_lo_sum |
230d793d RS |
2151 | /* If we have (mem (const ..)) or (mem (symbol_ref ...)), split it |
2152 | using LO_SUM and HIGH. */ | |
2153 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CONST | |
2154 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF) | |
2155 | { | |
2156 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), | |
2157 | gen_rtx_combine (LO_SUM, Pmode, | |
2158 | gen_rtx_combine (HIGH, Pmode, XEXP (x, 0)), | |
2159 | XEXP (x, 0))); | |
2160 | return &XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0); | |
2161 | } | |
230d793d RS |
2162 | #endif |
2163 | ||
916f14f1 RK |
2164 | /* If we have a PLUS whose second operand is a constant and the |
2165 | address is not valid, perhaps will can split it up using | |
2166 | the machine-specific way to split large constants. We use | |
d0ab8cd3 | 2167 | the first psuedo-reg (one of the virtual regs) as a placeholder; |
916f14f1 RK |
2168 | it will not remain in the result. */ |
2169 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS | |
2170 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
2171 | && ! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0))) | |
2172 | { | |
2173 | rtx reg = regno_reg_rtx[FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER]; | |
2174 | rtx seq = split_insns (gen_rtx (SET, VOIDmode, reg, XEXP (x, 0)), | |
2175 | subst_insn); | |
2176 | ||
2177 | /* This should have produced two insns, each of which sets our | |
2178 | placeholder. If the source of the second is a valid address, | |
2179 | we can make put both sources together and make a split point | |
2180 | in the middle. */ | |
2181 | ||
2182 | if (seq && XVECLEN (seq, 0) == 2 | |
2183 | && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (seq, 0, 0)) == INSN | |
2184 | && GET_CODE (PATTERN (XVECEXP (seq, 0, 0))) == SET | |
2185 | && SET_DEST (PATTERN (XVECEXP (seq, 0, 0))) == reg | |
2186 | && ! reg_mentioned_p (reg, | |
2187 | SET_SRC (PATTERN (XVECEXP (seq, 0, 0)))) | |
2188 | && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (seq, 0, 1)) == INSN | |
2189 | && GET_CODE (PATTERN (XVECEXP (seq, 0, 1))) == SET | |
2190 | && SET_DEST (PATTERN (XVECEXP (seq, 0, 1))) == reg | |
2191 | && memory_address_p (GET_MODE (x), | |
2192 | SET_SRC (PATTERN (XVECEXP (seq, 0, 1))))) | |
2193 | { | |
2194 | rtx src1 = SET_SRC (PATTERN (XVECEXP (seq, 0, 0))); | |
2195 | rtx src2 = SET_SRC (PATTERN (XVECEXP (seq, 0, 1))); | |
2196 | ||
2197 | /* Replace the placeholder in SRC2 with SRC1. If we can | |
2198 | find where in SRC2 it was placed, that can become our | |
2199 | split point and we can replace this address with SRC2. | |
2200 | Just try two obvious places. */ | |
2201 | ||
2202 | src2 = replace_rtx (src2, reg, src1); | |
2203 | split = 0; | |
2204 | if (XEXP (src2, 0) == src1) | |
2205 | split = &XEXP (src2, 0); | |
2206 | else if (GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (XEXP (src2, 0)))[0] == 'e' | |
2207 | && XEXP (XEXP (src2, 0), 0) == src1) | |
2208 | split = &XEXP (XEXP (src2, 0), 0); | |
2209 | ||
2210 | if (split) | |
2211 | { | |
2212 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), src2); | |
2213 | return split; | |
2214 | } | |
2215 | } | |
1a26b032 RK |
2216 | |
2217 | /* If that didn't work, perhaps the first operand is complex and | |
2218 | needs to be computed separately, so make a split point there. | |
2219 | This will occur on machines that just support REG + CONST | |
2220 | and have a constant moved through some previous computation. */ | |
2221 | ||
2222 | else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))) != 'o' | |
2223 | && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == SUBREG | |
2224 | && (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))) | |
2225 | == 'o'))) | |
2226 | return &XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0); | |
916f14f1 RK |
2227 | } |
2228 | break; | |
2229 | ||
230d793d RS |
2230 | case SET: |
2231 | #ifdef HAVE_cc0 | |
2232 | /* If SET_DEST is CC0 and SET_SRC is not an operand, a COMPARE, or a | |
2233 | ZERO_EXTRACT, the most likely reason why this doesn't match is that | |
2234 | we need to put the operand into a register. So split at that | |
2235 | point. */ | |
2236 | ||
2237 | if (SET_DEST (x) == cc0_rtx | |
2238 | && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != COMPARE | |
2239 | && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != ZERO_EXTRACT | |
2240 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x))) != 'o' | |
2241 | && ! (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == SUBREG | |
2242 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_SRC (x)))) == 'o')) | |
2243 | return &SET_SRC (x); | |
2244 | #endif | |
2245 | ||
2246 | /* See if we can split SET_SRC as it stands. */ | |
d0ab8cd3 | 2247 | split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn); |
230d793d RS |
2248 | if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x)) |
2249 | return split; | |
2250 | ||
2251 | /* See if this is a bitfield assignment with everything constant. If | |
2252 | so, this is an IOR of an AND, so split it into that. */ | |
2253 | if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == ZERO_EXTRACT | |
2254 | && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0))) | |
5f4f0e22 | 2255 | <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
230d793d RS |
2256 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1)) == CONST_INT |
2257 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2)) == CONST_INT | |
2258 | && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CONST_INT | |
2259 | && ((INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1)) | |
2260 | + INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2))) | |
2261 | <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)))) | |
2262 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0))) | |
2263 | { | |
2264 | int pos = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2)); | |
2265 | int len = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1)); | |
2266 | int src = INTVAL (SET_SRC (x)); | |
2267 | rtx dest = XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0); | |
2268 | enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (dest); | |
5f4f0e22 | 2269 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1; |
230d793d RS |
2270 | |
2271 | #if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN | |
2272 | pos = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - len - pos; | |
2273 | #endif | |
2274 | ||
2275 | if (src == mask) | |
2276 | SUBST (SET_SRC (x), | |
5f4f0e22 | 2277 | gen_binary (IOR, mode, dest, GEN_INT (src << pos))); |
230d793d RS |
2278 | else |
2279 | SUBST (SET_SRC (x), | |
2280 | gen_binary (IOR, mode, | |
2281 | gen_binary (AND, mode, dest, | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
2282 | GEN_INT (~ (mask << pos) |
2283 | & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))), | |
2284 | GEN_INT (src << pos))); | |
230d793d RS |
2285 | |
2286 | SUBST (SET_DEST (x), dest); | |
2287 | ||
d0ab8cd3 | 2288 | split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn); |
230d793d RS |
2289 | if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x)) |
2290 | return split; | |
2291 | } | |
2292 | ||
2293 | /* Otherwise, see if this is an operation that we can split into two. | |
2294 | If so, try to split that. */ | |
2295 | code = GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)); | |
2296 | ||
2297 | switch (code) | |
2298 | { | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2299 | case AND: |
2300 | /* If we are AND'ing with a large constant that is only a single | |
2301 | bit and the result is only being used in a context where we | |
2302 | need to know if it is zero or non-zero, replace it with a bit | |
2303 | extraction. This will avoid the large constant, which might | |
2304 | have taken more than one insn to make. If the constant were | |
2305 | not a valid argument to the AND but took only one insn to make, | |
2306 | this is no worse, but if it took more than one insn, it will | |
2307 | be better. */ | |
2308 | ||
2309 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
2310 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0)) == REG | |
2311 | && (pos = exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1)))) >= 7 | |
2312 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == REG | |
2313 | && (split = find_single_use (SET_DEST (x), insn, NULL_PTR)) != 0 | |
2314 | && (GET_CODE (*split) == EQ || GET_CODE (*split) == NE) | |
2315 | && XEXP (*split, 0) == SET_DEST (x) | |
2316 | && XEXP (*split, 1) == const0_rtx) | |
2317 | { | |
2318 | SUBST (SET_SRC (x), | |
2319 | make_extraction (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)), | |
2320 | XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0), | |
2321 | pos, NULL_RTX, 1, 1, 0, 0)); | |
2322 | return find_split_point (loc, insn); | |
2323 | } | |
2324 | break; | |
2325 | ||
230d793d RS |
2326 | case SIGN_EXTEND: |
2327 | inner = XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0); | |
2328 | pos = 0; | |
2329 | len = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (inner)); | |
2330 | unsignedp = 0; | |
2331 | break; | |
2332 | ||
2333 | case SIGN_EXTRACT: | |
2334 | case ZERO_EXTRACT: | |
2335 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
2336 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 2)) == CONST_INT) | |
2337 | { | |
2338 | inner = XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0); | |
2339 | len = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1)); | |
2340 | pos = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 2)); | |
2341 | ||
2342 | #if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN | |
2343 | pos = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (inner)) - len - pos; | |
2344 | #endif | |
2345 | unsignedp = (code == ZERO_EXTRACT); | |
2346 | } | |
2347 | break; | |
2348 | } | |
2349 | ||
2350 | if (len && pos >= 0 && pos + len <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (inner))) | |
2351 | { | |
2352 | enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x)); | |
2353 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2354 | /* For unsigned, we have a choice of a shift followed by an |
2355 | AND or two shifts. Use two shifts for field sizes where the | |
2356 | constant might be too large. We assume here that we can | |
2357 | always at least get 8-bit constants in an AND insn, which is | |
2358 | true for every current RISC. */ | |
2359 | ||
2360 | if (unsignedp && len <= 8) | |
230d793d RS |
2361 | { |
2362 | SUBST (SET_SRC (x), | |
2363 | gen_rtx_combine | |
2364 | (AND, mode, | |
2365 | gen_rtx_combine (LSHIFTRT, mode, | |
2366 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (mode, inner), | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
2367 | GEN_INT (pos)), |
2368 | GEN_INT (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1))); | |
230d793d | 2369 | |
d0ab8cd3 | 2370 | split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn); |
230d793d RS |
2371 | if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x)) |
2372 | return split; | |
2373 | } | |
2374 | else | |
2375 | { | |
2376 | SUBST (SET_SRC (x), | |
2377 | gen_rtx_combine | |
d0ab8cd3 | 2378 | (unsignedp ? LSHIFTRT : ASHIFTRT, mode, |
230d793d RS |
2379 | gen_rtx_combine (ASHIFT, mode, |
2380 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (mode, inner), | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
2381 | GEN_INT (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) |
2382 | - len - pos)), | |
2383 | GEN_INT (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - len))); | |
230d793d | 2384 | |
d0ab8cd3 | 2385 | split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn); |
230d793d RS |
2386 | if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x)) |
2387 | return split; | |
2388 | } | |
2389 | } | |
2390 | ||
2391 | /* See if this is a simple operation with a constant as the second | |
2392 | operand. It might be that this constant is out of range and hence | |
2393 | could be used as a split point. */ | |
2394 | if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x))) == '2' | |
2395 | || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x))) == 'c' | |
2396 | || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x))) == '<') | |
2397 | && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1)) | |
2398 | && (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))) == 'o' | |
2399 | || (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0)) == SUBREG | |
2400 | && (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0)))) | |
2401 | == 'o')))) | |
2402 | return &XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1); | |
2403 | ||
2404 | /* Finally, see if this is a simple operation with its first operand | |
2405 | not in a register. The operation might require this operand in a | |
2406 | register, so return it as a split point. We can always do this | |
2407 | because if the first operand were another operation, we would have | |
2408 | already found it as a split point. */ | |
2409 | if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x))) == '2' | |
2410 | || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x))) == 'c' | |
2411 | || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x))) == '<' | |
2412 | || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x))) == '1') | |
2413 | && ! register_operand (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0), VOIDmode)) | |
2414 | return &XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0); | |
2415 | ||
2416 | return 0; | |
2417 | ||
2418 | case AND: | |
2419 | case IOR: | |
2420 | /* We write NOR as (and (not A) (not B)), but if we don't have a NOR, | |
2421 | it is better to write this as (not (ior A B)) so we can split it. | |
2422 | Similarly for IOR. */ | |
2423 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NOT && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == NOT) | |
2424 | { | |
2425 | SUBST (*loc, | |
2426 | gen_rtx_combine (NOT, GET_MODE (x), | |
2427 | gen_rtx_combine (code == IOR ? AND : IOR, | |
2428 | GET_MODE (x), | |
2429 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), | |
2430 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0)))); | |
d0ab8cd3 | 2431 | return find_split_point (loc, insn); |
230d793d RS |
2432 | } |
2433 | ||
2434 | /* Many RISC machines have a large set of logical insns. If the | |
2435 | second operand is a NOT, put it first so we will try to split the | |
2436 | other operand first. */ | |
2437 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == NOT) | |
2438 | { | |
2439 | rtx tem = XEXP (x, 0); | |
2440 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1)); | |
2441 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), tem); | |
2442 | } | |
2443 | break; | |
2444 | } | |
2445 | ||
2446 | /* Otherwise, select our actions depending on our rtx class. */ | |
2447 | switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code)) | |
2448 | { | |
2449 | case 'b': /* This is ZERO_EXTRACT and SIGN_EXTRACT. */ | |
2450 | case '3': | |
d0ab8cd3 | 2451 | split = find_split_point (&XEXP (x, 2), insn); |
230d793d RS |
2452 | if (split) |
2453 | return split; | |
2454 | /* ... fall through ... */ | |
2455 | case '2': | |
2456 | case 'c': | |
2457 | case '<': | |
d0ab8cd3 | 2458 | split = find_split_point (&XEXP (x, 1), insn); |
230d793d RS |
2459 | if (split) |
2460 | return split; | |
2461 | /* ... fall through ... */ | |
2462 | case '1': | |
2463 | /* Some machines have (and (shift ...) ...) insns. If X is not | |
2464 | an AND, but XEXP (X, 0) is, use it as our split point. */ | |
2465 | if (GET_CODE (x) != AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == AND) | |
2466 | return &XEXP (x, 0); | |
2467 | ||
d0ab8cd3 | 2468 | split = find_split_point (&XEXP (x, 0), insn); |
230d793d RS |
2469 | if (split) |
2470 | return split; | |
2471 | return loc; | |
2472 | } | |
2473 | ||
2474 | /* Otherwise, we don't have a split point. */ | |
2475 | return 0; | |
2476 | } | |
2477 | \f | |
2478 | /* Throughout X, replace FROM with TO, and return the result. | |
2479 | The result is TO if X is FROM; | |
2480 | otherwise the result is X, but its contents may have been modified. | |
2481 | If they were modified, a record was made in undobuf so that | |
2482 | undo_all will (among other things) return X to its original state. | |
2483 | ||
2484 | If the number of changes necessary is too much to record to undo, | |
2485 | the excess changes are not made, so the result is invalid. | |
2486 | The changes already made can still be undone. | |
2487 | undobuf.num_undo is incremented for such changes, so by testing that | |
2488 | the caller can tell whether the result is valid. | |
2489 | ||
2490 | `n_occurrences' is incremented each time FROM is replaced. | |
2491 | ||
2492 | IN_DEST is non-zero if we are processing the SET_DEST of a SET. | |
2493 | ||
5089e22e | 2494 | UNIQUE_COPY is non-zero if each substitution must be unique. We do this |
230d793d RS |
2495 | by copying if `n_occurrences' is non-zero. */ |
2496 | ||
2497 | static rtx | |
2498 | subst (x, from, to, in_dest, unique_copy) | |
2499 | register rtx x, from, to; | |
2500 | int in_dest; | |
2501 | int unique_copy; | |
2502 | { | |
2503 | register char *fmt; | |
2504 | register int len, i; | |
2505 | register enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x), orig_code = code; | |
2506 | rtx temp; | |
2507 | enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x); | |
2508 | enum machine_mode op0_mode = VOIDmode; | |
2509 | rtx other_insn; | |
2510 | rtx *cc_use; | |
2511 | int n_restarts = 0; | |
2512 | ||
2513 | /* FAKE_EXTEND_SAFE_P (MODE, FROM) is 1 if (subreg:MODE FROM 0) is a safe | |
2514 | replacement for (zero_extend:MODE FROM) or (sign_extend:MODE FROM). | |
2515 | If it is 0, that cannot be done. We can now do this for any MEM | |
2516 | because (SUBREG (MEM...)) is guaranteed to cause the MEM to be reloaded. | |
2517 | If not for that, MEM's would very rarely be safe. */ | |
2518 | ||
2519 | /* Reject MODEs bigger than a word, because we might not be able | |
2520 | to reference a two-register group starting with an arbitrary register | |
2521 | (and currently gen_lowpart might crash for a SUBREG). */ | |
2522 | ||
2523 | #define FAKE_EXTEND_SAFE_P(MODE, FROM) \ | |
2524 | (GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) <= UNITS_PER_WORD) | |
2525 | ||
2526 | /* Two expressions are equal if they are identical copies of a shared | |
2527 | RTX or if they are both registers with the same register number | |
2528 | and mode. */ | |
2529 | ||
2530 | #define COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P(X,Y) \ | |
2531 | ((X) == (Y) \ | |
2532 | || (GET_CODE (X) == REG && GET_CODE (Y) == REG \ | |
2533 | && REGNO (X) == REGNO (Y) && GET_MODE (X) == GET_MODE (Y))) | |
2534 | ||
2535 | if (! in_dest && COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (x, from)) | |
2536 | { | |
2537 | n_occurrences++; | |
2538 | return (unique_copy && n_occurrences > 1 ? copy_rtx (to) : to); | |
2539 | } | |
2540 | ||
2541 | /* If X and FROM are the same register but different modes, they will | |
2542 | not have been seen as equal above. However, flow.c will make a | |
2543 | LOG_LINKS entry for that case. If we do nothing, we will try to | |
2544 | rerecognize our original insn and, when it succeeds, we will | |
2545 | delete the feeding insn, which is incorrect. | |
2546 | ||
2547 | So force this insn not to match in this (rare) case. */ | |
2548 | if (! in_dest && code == REG && GET_CODE (from) == REG | |
2549 | && REGNO (x) == REGNO (from)) | |
2550 | return gen_rtx (CLOBBER, GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx); | |
2551 | ||
2552 | /* If this is an object, we are done unless it is a MEM or LO_SUM, both | |
2553 | of which may contain things that can be combined. */ | |
2554 | if (code != MEM && code != LO_SUM && GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'o') | |
2555 | return x; | |
2556 | ||
2557 | /* It is possible to have a subexpression appear twice in the insn. | |
2558 | Suppose that FROM is a register that appears within TO. | |
2559 | Then, after that subexpression has been scanned once by `subst', | |
2560 | the second time it is scanned, TO may be found. If we were | |
2561 | to scan TO here, we would find FROM within it and create a | |
2562 | self-referent rtl structure which is completely wrong. */ | |
2563 | if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (x, to)) | |
2564 | return to; | |
2565 | ||
2566 | len = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); | |
2567 | fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code); | |
2568 | ||
2569 | /* We don't need to process a SET_DEST that is a register, CC0, or PC, so | |
2570 | set up to skip this common case. All other cases where we want to | |
2571 | suppress replacing something inside a SET_SRC are handled via the | |
2572 | IN_DEST operand. */ | |
2573 | if (code == SET | |
2574 | && (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == REG | |
2575 | || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == CC0 | |
2576 | || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == PC)) | |
2577 | fmt = "ie"; | |
2578 | ||
2579 | /* Get the mode of operand 0 in case X is now a SIGN_EXTEND of a constant. */ | |
2580 | if (fmt[0] == 'e') | |
2581 | op0_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)); | |
2582 | ||
2583 | for (i = 0; i < len; i++) | |
2584 | { | |
2585 | if (fmt[i] == 'E') | |
2586 | { | |
2587 | register int j; | |
2588 | for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--) | |
2589 | { | |
2590 | register rtx new; | |
2591 | if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from)) | |
2592 | { | |
2593 | new = (unique_copy && n_occurrences ? copy_rtx (to) : to); | |
2594 | n_occurrences++; | |
2595 | } | |
2596 | else | |
2597 | { | |
2598 | new = subst (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from, to, 0, unique_copy); | |
2599 | ||
2600 | /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing fails. */ | |
2601 | if (GET_CODE (new) == CLOBBER && XEXP (new, 0) == const0_rtx) | |
2602 | return new; | |
2603 | } | |
2604 | ||
2605 | SUBST (XVECEXP (x, i, j), new); | |
2606 | } | |
2607 | } | |
2608 | else if (fmt[i] == 'e') | |
2609 | { | |
2610 | register rtx new; | |
2611 | ||
2612 | if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (XEXP (x, i), from)) | |
2613 | { | |
2614 | new = (unique_copy && n_occurrences ? copy_rtx (to) : to); | |
2615 | n_occurrences++; | |
2616 | } | |
2617 | else | |
2618 | /* If we are in a SET_DEST, suppress most cases unless we | |
2619 | have gone inside a MEM, in which case we want to | |
2620 | simplify the address. We assume here that things that | |
2621 | are actually part of the destination have their inner | |
2622 | parts in the first expression. This is true for SUBREG, | |
2623 | STRICT_LOW_PART, and ZERO_EXTRACT, which are the only | |
2624 | things aside from REG and MEM that should appear in a | |
2625 | SET_DEST. */ | |
2626 | new = subst (XEXP (x, i), from, to, | |
2627 | (((in_dest | |
2628 | && (code == SUBREG || code == STRICT_LOW_PART | |
2629 | || code == ZERO_EXTRACT)) | |
2630 | || code == SET) | |
2631 | && i == 0), unique_copy); | |
2632 | ||
2633 | /* If we found that we will have to reject this combination, | |
2634 | indicate that by returning the CLOBBER ourselves, rather than | |
2635 | an expression containing it. This will speed things up as | |
2636 | well as prevent accidents where two CLOBBERs are considered | |
2637 | to be equal, thus producing an incorrect simplification. */ | |
2638 | ||
2639 | if (GET_CODE (new) == CLOBBER && XEXP (new, 0) == const0_rtx) | |
2640 | return new; | |
2641 | ||
2642 | SUBST (XEXP (x, i), new); | |
2643 | } | |
2644 | } | |
2645 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2646 | /* We come back to here if we have replaced the expression with one of |
2647 | a different code and it is likely that further simplification will be | |
2648 | possible. */ | |
2649 | ||
2650 | restart: | |
2651 | ||
eeb43d32 RK |
2652 | /* If we have restarted more than 4 times, we are probably looping, so |
2653 | give up. */ | |
2654 | if (++n_restarts > 4) | |
2655 | return x; | |
2656 | ||
2657 | /* If we are restarting at all, it means that we no longer know the | |
2658 | original mode of operand 0 (since we have probably changed the | |
2659 | form of X). */ | |
2660 | ||
2661 | if (n_restarts > 1) | |
2662 | op0_mode = VOIDmode; | |
2663 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2664 | code = GET_CODE (x); |
2665 | ||
230d793d RS |
2666 | /* If this is a commutative operation, put a constant last and a complex |
2667 | expression first. We don't need to do this for comparisons here. */ | |
2668 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c' | |
2669 | && ((CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 0)) && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) != CONST_INT) | |
2670 | || (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))) == 'o' | |
2671 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1))) != 'o') | |
2672 | || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG | |
2673 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 'o' | |
2674 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1))) != 'o'))) | |
2675 | { | |
2676 | temp = XEXP (x, 0); | |
2677 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1)); | |
2678 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), temp); | |
2679 | } | |
2680 | ||
22609cbf RK |
2681 | /* If this is a PLUS, MINUS, or MULT, and the first operand is the |
2682 | sign extension of a PLUS with a constant, reverse the order of the sign | |
2683 | extension and the addition. Note that this not the same as the original | |
2684 | code, but overflow is undefined for signed values. Also note that the | |
2685 | PLUS will have been partially moved "inside" the sign-extension, so that | |
2686 | the first operand of X will really look like: | |
2687 | (ashiftrt (plus (ashift A C4) C5) C4). | |
2688 | We convert this to | |
2689 | (plus (ashiftrt (ashift A C4) C2) C4) | |
2690 | and replace the first operand of X with that expression. Later parts | |
2691 | of this function may simplify the expression further. | |
2692 | ||
2693 | For example, if we start with (mult (sign_extend (plus A C1)) C2), | |
2694 | we swap the SIGN_EXTEND and PLUS. Later code will apply the | |
2695 | distributive law to produce (plus (mult (sign_extend X) C1) C3). | |
2696 | ||
2697 | We do this to simplify address expressions. */ | |
2698 | ||
2699 | if ((code == PLUS || code == MINUS || code == MULT) | |
2700 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFTRT | |
2701 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == PLUS | |
2702 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0)) == ASHIFT | |
2703 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
2704 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
2705 | && XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0), 1) == XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1) | |
2706 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
2707 | && (temp = simplify_binary_operation (ASHIFTRT, mode, | |
2708 | XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1), | |
2709 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))) != 0) | |
2710 | { | |
2711 | rtx new | |
2712 | = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, | |
2713 | XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0), 0), | |
2714 | INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))); | |
2715 | ||
2716 | new = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFTRT, mode, new, | |
2717 | INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))); | |
2718 | ||
2719 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), gen_binary (PLUS, mode, new, temp)); | |
2720 | } | |
2721 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2722 | /* If this is a simple operation applied to an IF_THEN_ELSE, try |
2723 | applying it to the arms of the IF_THEN_ELSE. This often simplifies | |
2724 | things. Don't deal with operations that change modes here. */ | |
2725 | ||
2726 | if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '2' || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c') | |
2727 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == IF_THEN_ELSE) | |
2728 | { | |
58744483 RK |
2729 | /* Don't do this by using SUBST inside X since we might be messing |
2730 | up a shared expression. */ | |
2731 | rtx cond = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0); | |
2732 | rtx t_arm = subst (gen_binary (code, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), | |
2733 | XEXP (x, 1)), | |
1a26b032 | 2734 | pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0); |
58744483 RK |
2735 | rtx f_arm = subst (gen_binary (code, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 2), |
2736 | XEXP (x, 1)), | |
1a26b032 | 2737 | pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0); |
58744483 RK |
2738 | |
2739 | ||
2740 | x = gen_rtx (IF_THEN_ELSE, mode, cond, t_arm, f_arm); | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2741 | goto restart; |
2742 | } | |
2743 | ||
2744 | else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '1' | |
2745 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == IF_THEN_ELSE | |
2746 | && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == mode) | |
2747 | { | |
58744483 RK |
2748 | rtx cond = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0); |
2749 | rtx t_arm = subst (gen_unary (code, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)), | |
1a26b032 | 2750 | pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0); |
58744483 | 2751 | rtx f_arm = subst (gen_unary (code, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 2)), |
1a26b032 | 2752 | pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0); |
58744483 RK |
2753 | |
2754 | x = gen_rtx_combine (IF_THEN_ELSE, mode, cond, t_arm, f_arm); | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2755 | goto restart; |
2756 | } | |
2757 | ||
230d793d RS |
2758 | /* Try to fold this expression in case we have constants that weren't |
2759 | present before. */ | |
2760 | temp = 0; | |
2761 | switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code)) | |
2762 | { | |
2763 | case '1': | |
2764 | temp = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, XEXP (x, 0), op0_mode); | |
2765 | break; | |
2766 | case '<': | |
2767 | temp = simplify_relational_operation (code, op0_mode, | |
2768 | XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1)); | |
77fa0940 RK |
2769 | #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE |
2770 | if (temp != 0 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT) | |
2771 | temp = ((temp == const0_rtx) ? CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (x)) | |
2772 | : immed_real_const_1 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, GET_MODE (x))); | |
2773 | #endif | |
230d793d RS |
2774 | break; |
2775 | case 'c': | |
2776 | case '2': | |
2777 | temp = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1)); | |
2778 | break; | |
2779 | case 'b': | |
2780 | case '3': | |
2781 | temp = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, op0_mode, XEXP (x, 0), | |
2782 | XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (x, 2)); | |
2783 | break; | |
2784 | } | |
2785 | ||
2786 | if (temp) | |
d0ab8cd3 | 2787 | x = temp, code = GET_CODE (temp); |
230d793d | 2788 | |
230d793d RS |
2789 | /* First see if we can apply the inverse distributive law. */ |
2790 | if (code == PLUS || code == MINUS || code == IOR || code == XOR) | |
2791 | { | |
2792 | x = apply_distributive_law (x); | |
2793 | code = GET_CODE (x); | |
2794 | } | |
2795 | ||
2796 | /* If CODE is an associative operation not otherwise handled, see if we | |
2797 | can associate some operands. This can win if they are constants or | |
2798 | if they are logically related (i.e. (a & b) & a. */ | |
2799 | if ((code == PLUS || code == MINUS | |
2800 | || code == MULT || code == AND || code == IOR || code == XOR | |
2801 | || code == DIV || code == UDIV | |
2802 | || code == SMAX || code == SMIN || code == UMAX || code == UMIN) | |
2803 | && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT) | |
2804 | { | |
2805 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == code) | |
2806 | { | |
2807 | rtx other = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0); | |
2808 | rtx inner_op0 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1); | |
2809 | rtx inner_op1 = XEXP (x, 1); | |
2810 | rtx inner; | |
2811 | ||
2812 | /* Make sure we pass the constant operand if any as the second | |
2813 | one if this is a commutative operation. */ | |
2814 | if (CONSTANT_P (inner_op0) && GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c') | |
2815 | { | |
2816 | rtx tem = inner_op0; | |
2817 | inner_op0 = inner_op1; | |
2818 | inner_op1 = tem; | |
2819 | } | |
2820 | inner = simplify_binary_operation (code == MINUS ? PLUS | |
2821 | : code == DIV ? MULT | |
2822 | : code == UDIV ? MULT | |
2823 | : code, | |
2824 | mode, inner_op0, inner_op1); | |
2825 | ||
2826 | /* For commutative operations, try the other pair if that one | |
2827 | didn't simplify. */ | |
2828 | if (inner == 0 && GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c') | |
2829 | { | |
2830 | other = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1); | |
2831 | inner = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, | |
2832 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), | |
2833 | XEXP (x, 1)); | |
2834 | } | |
2835 | ||
2836 | if (inner) | |
2837 | { | |
2838 | x = gen_binary (code, mode, other, inner); | |
2839 | goto restart; | |
2840 | ||
2841 | } | |
2842 | } | |
2843 | } | |
2844 | ||
2845 | /* A little bit of algebraic simplification here. */ | |
2846 | switch (code) | |
2847 | { | |
2848 | case MEM: | |
2849 | /* Ensure that our address has any ASHIFTs converted to MULT in case | |
2850 | address-recognizing predicates are called later. */ | |
2851 | temp = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0), MEM); | |
2852 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), temp); | |
2853 | break; | |
2854 | ||
2855 | case SUBREG: | |
2856 | /* (subreg:A (mem:B X) N) becomes a modified MEM unless the SUBREG | |
2857 | is paradoxical. If we can't do that safely, then it becomes | |
2858 | something nonsensical so that this combination won't take place. */ | |
2859 | ||
2860 | if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == MEM | |
2861 | && (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) | |
2862 | <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))) | |
2863 | { | |
2864 | rtx inner = SUBREG_REG (x); | |
2865 | int endian_offset = 0; | |
2866 | /* Don't change the mode of the MEM | |
2867 | if that would change the meaning of the address. */ | |
2868 | if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (SUBREG_REG (x)) | |
2869 | || mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner, 0))) | |
2870 | return gen_rtx (CLOBBER, mode, const0_rtx); | |
2871 | ||
2872 | #if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN | |
2873 | if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD) | |
2874 | endian_offset += UNITS_PER_WORD - GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); | |
2875 | if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner)) < UNITS_PER_WORD) | |
2876 | endian_offset -= UNITS_PER_WORD - GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner)); | |
2877 | #endif | |
2878 | /* Note if the plus_constant doesn't make a valid address | |
2879 | then this combination won't be accepted. */ | |
2880 | x = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, | |
2881 | plus_constant (XEXP (inner, 0), | |
2882 | (SUBREG_WORD (x) * UNITS_PER_WORD | |
2883 | + endian_offset))); | |
2884 | MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner); | |
2885 | RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (inner); | |
2886 | MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (inner); | |
2887 | return x; | |
2888 | } | |
2889 | ||
2890 | /* If we are in a SET_DEST, these other cases can't apply. */ | |
2891 | if (in_dest) | |
2892 | return x; | |
2893 | ||
2894 | /* Changing mode twice with SUBREG => just change it once, | |
2895 | or not at all if changing back to starting mode. */ | |
2896 | if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == SUBREG) | |
2897 | { | |
2898 | if (mode == GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SUBREG_REG (x))) | |
2899 | && SUBREG_WORD (x) == 0 && SUBREG_WORD (SUBREG_REG (x)) == 0) | |
2900 | return SUBREG_REG (SUBREG_REG (x)); | |
2901 | ||
2902 | SUBST_INT (SUBREG_WORD (x), | |
2903 | SUBREG_WORD (x) + SUBREG_WORD (SUBREG_REG (x))); | |
2904 | SUBST (SUBREG_REG (x), SUBREG_REG (SUBREG_REG (x))); | |
2905 | } | |
2906 | ||
2907 | /* SUBREG of a hard register => just change the register number | |
2908 | and/or mode. If the hard register is not valid in that mode, | |
26ecfc76 RK |
2909 | suppress this combination. If the hard register is the stack, |
2910 | frame, or argument pointer, leave this as a SUBREG. */ | |
230d793d RS |
2911 | |
2912 | if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG | |
26ecfc76 RK |
2913 | && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER |
2914 | && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM | |
2915 | #if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM | |
2916 | && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM | |
2917 | #endif | |
2918 | && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM) | |
230d793d RS |
2919 | { |
2920 | if (HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) + SUBREG_WORD (x), | |
2921 | mode)) | |
2922 | return gen_rtx (REG, mode, | |
2923 | REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) + SUBREG_WORD (x)); | |
2924 | else | |
2925 | return gen_rtx (CLOBBER, mode, const0_rtx); | |
2926 | } | |
2927 | ||
2928 | /* For a constant, try to pick up the part we want. Handle a full | |
a4bde0b1 RK |
2929 | word and low-order part. Only do this if we are narrowing |
2930 | the constant; if it is being widened, we have no idea what | |
2931 | the extra bits will have been set to. */ | |
230d793d RS |
2932 | |
2933 | if (CONSTANT_P (SUBREG_REG (x)) && op0_mode != VOIDmode | |
2934 | && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD | |
a4bde0b1 | 2935 | && GET_MODE_SIZE (op0_mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD |
230d793d RS |
2936 | && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT) |
2937 | { | |
2938 | temp = operand_subword (SUBREG_REG (x), SUBREG_WORD (x), | |
5f4f0e22 | 2939 | 0, op0_mode); |
230d793d RS |
2940 | if (temp) |
2941 | return temp; | |
2942 | } | |
2943 | ||
a4bde0b1 RK |
2944 | if (CONSTANT_P (SUBREG_REG (x)) && subreg_lowpart_p (x) |
2945 | && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (op0_mode)) | |
230d793d RS |
2946 | return gen_lowpart_for_combine (mode, SUBREG_REG (x)); |
2947 | ||
2948 | /* If we are narrowing the object, we need to see if we can simplify | |
2949 | the expression for the object knowing that we only need the | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2950 | low-order bits. */ |
2951 | ||
230d793d | 2952 | if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2953 | && subreg_lowpart_p (x)) |
2954 | return force_to_mode (SUBREG_REG (x), mode, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), | |
2955 | NULL_RTX); | |
230d793d RS |
2956 | break; |
2957 | ||
2958 | case NOT: | |
2959 | /* (not (plus X -1)) can become (neg X). */ | |
2960 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS | |
2961 | && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1) == constm1_rtx) | |
2962 | { | |
2963 | x = gen_rtx_combine (NEG, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)); | |
2964 | goto restart; | |
2965 | } | |
2966 | ||
2967 | /* Similarly, (not (neg X)) is (plus X -1). */ | |
2968 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NEG) | |
2969 | { | |
2970 | x = gen_rtx_combine (PLUS, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), constm1_rtx); | |
2971 | goto restart; | |
2972 | } | |
2973 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
2974 | /* (not (xor X C)) for C constant is (xor X D) with D = ~ C. */ |
2975 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR | |
2976 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
2977 | && (temp = simplify_unary_operation (NOT, mode, | |
2978 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), | |
2979 | mode)) != 0) | |
2980 | { | |
2981 | SUBST (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), temp); | |
2982 | return XEXP (x, 0); | |
2983 | } | |
2984 | ||
230d793d RS |
2985 | /* (not (ashift 1 X)) is (rotate ~1 X). We used to do this for operands |
2986 | other than 1, but that is not valid. We could do a similar | |
2987 | simplification for (not (lshiftrt C X)) where C is just the sign bit, | |
2988 | but this doesn't seem common enough to bother with. */ | |
2989 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT | |
2990 | && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0) == const1_rtx) | |
2991 | { | |
2992 | x = gen_rtx (ROTATE, mode, gen_unary (NOT, mode, const1_rtx), | |
2993 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)); | |
2994 | goto restart; | |
2995 | } | |
2996 | ||
2997 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG | |
2998 | && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x, 0)) | |
2999 | && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) | |
3000 | < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))))) | |
3001 | && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))) == ASHIFT | |
3002 | && XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)), 0) == const1_rtx) | |
3003 | { | |
3004 | enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))); | |
3005 | ||
3006 | x = gen_rtx (ROTATE, inner_mode, | |
3007 | gen_unary (NOT, inner_mode, const1_rtx), | |
3008 | XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)), 1)); | |
3009 | x = gen_lowpart_for_combine (mode, x); | |
3010 | goto restart; | |
3011 | } | |
3012 | ||
3013 | #if STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1 | |
3014 | /* (not (comparison foo bar)) can be done by reversing the comparison | |
3015 | code if valid. */ | |
3016 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))) == '<' | |
3017 | && reversible_comparison_p (XEXP (x, 0))) | |
3018 | return gen_rtx_combine (reverse_condition (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))), | |
3019 | mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), | |
3020 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)); | |
3021 | #endif | |
3022 | ||
3023 | /* Apply De Morgan's laws to reduce number of patterns for machines | |
3024 | with negating logical insns (and-not, nand, etc.). If result has | |
3025 | only one NOT, put it first, since that is how the patterns are | |
3026 | coded. */ | |
3027 | ||
3028 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == IOR || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == AND) | |
3029 | { | |
3030 | rtx in1 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), in2 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1); | |
3031 | ||
3032 | if (GET_CODE (in1) == NOT) | |
3033 | in1 = XEXP (in1, 0); | |
3034 | else | |
3035 | in1 = gen_rtx_combine (NOT, GET_MODE (in1), in1); | |
3036 | ||
3037 | if (GET_CODE (in2) == NOT) | |
3038 | in2 = XEXP (in2, 0); | |
3039 | else if (GET_CODE (in2) == CONST_INT | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
3040 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
3041 | in2 = GEN_INT (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) & ~ INTVAL (in2)); | |
230d793d RS |
3042 | else |
3043 | in2 = gen_rtx_combine (NOT, GET_MODE (in2), in2); | |
3044 | ||
3045 | if (GET_CODE (in2) == NOT) | |
3046 | { | |
3047 | rtx tem = in2; | |
3048 | in2 = in1; in1 = tem; | |
3049 | } | |
3050 | ||
3051 | x = gen_rtx_combine (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == IOR ? AND : IOR, | |
3052 | mode, in1, in2); | |
3053 | goto restart; | |
3054 | } | |
3055 | break; | |
3056 | ||
3057 | case NEG: | |
3058 | /* (neg (plus X 1)) can become (not X). */ | |
3059 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS | |
3060 | && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1) == const1_rtx) | |
3061 | { | |
3062 | x = gen_rtx_combine (NOT, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)); | |
3063 | goto restart; | |
3064 | } | |
3065 | ||
3066 | /* Similarly, (neg (not X)) is (plus X 1). */ | |
3067 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NOT) | |
3068 | { | |
3069 | x = gen_rtx_combine (PLUS, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), const1_rtx); | |
3070 | goto restart; | |
3071 | } | |
3072 | ||
230d793d RS |
3073 | /* (neg (minus X Y)) can become (minus Y X). */ |
3074 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MINUS | |
3075 | && (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_FLOAT | |
3076 | /* x-y != -(y-x) with IEEE floating point. */ | |
3077 | || TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT)) | |
3078 | { | |
3079 | x = gen_binary (MINUS, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), | |
3080 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)); | |
3081 | goto restart; | |
3082 | } | |
3083 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
3084 | /* (neg (xor A 1)) is (plus A -1) if A is known to be either 0 or 1. */ |
3085 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1) == const1_rtx | |
3086 | && significant_bits (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), mode) == 1) | |
3087 | { | |
3088 | x = gen_binary (PLUS, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), constm1_rtx); | |
3089 | goto restart; | |
3090 | } | |
3091 | ||
230d793d RS |
3092 | /* NEG commutes with ASHIFT since it is multiplication. Only do this |
3093 | if we can then eliminate the NEG (e.g., | |
3094 | if the operand is a constant). */ | |
3095 | ||
3096 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT) | |
3097 | { | |
3098 | temp = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, | |
3099 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), mode); | |
3100 | if (temp) | |
3101 | { | |
3102 | SUBST (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), temp); | |
3103 | return XEXP (x, 0); | |
3104 | } | |
3105 | } | |
3106 | ||
3107 | temp = expand_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0)); | |
3108 | ||
3109 | /* For C equal to the width of MODE minus 1, (neg (ashiftrt X C)) can be | |
3110 | replaced by (lshiftrt X C). This will convert | |
3111 | (neg (sign_extract X 1 Y)) to (zero_extract X 1 Y). */ | |
3112 | ||
3113 | if (GET_CODE (temp) == ASHIFTRT | |
3114 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (temp, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
3115 | && INTVAL (XEXP (temp, 1)) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1) | |
3116 | { | |
3117 | x = simplify_shift_const (temp, LSHIFTRT, mode, XEXP (temp, 0), | |
3118 | INTVAL (XEXP (temp, 1))); | |
3119 | goto restart; | |
3120 | } | |
3121 | ||
3122 | /* If X has only a single bit significant, say, bit I, convert | |
3123 | (neg X) to (ashiftrt (ashift X C-I) C-I) where C is the bitsize of | |
3124 | MODE minus 1. This will convert (neg (zero_extract X 1 Y)) to | |
3125 | (sign_extract X 1 Y). But only do this if TEMP isn't a register | |
3126 | or a SUBREG of one since we'd be making the expression more | |
3127 | complex if it was just a register. */ | |
3128 | ||
3129 | if (GET_CODE (temp) != REG | |
3130 | && ! (GET_CODE (temp) == SUBREG | |
3131 | && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (temp)) == REG) | |
3132 | && (i = exact_log2 (significant_bits (temp, mode))) >= 0) | |
3133 | { | |
3134 | rtx temp1 = simplify_shift_const | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
3135 | (NULL_RTX, ASHIFTRT, mode, |
3136 | simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, temp, | |
230d793d RS |
3137 | GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1 - i), |
3138 | GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1 - i); | |
3139 | ||
3140 | /* If all we did was surround TEMP with the two shifts, we | |
3141 | haven't improved anything, so don't use it. Otherwise, | |
3142 | we are better off with TEMP1. */ | |
3143 | if (GET_CODE (temp1) != ASHIFTRT | |
3144 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (temp1, 0)) != ASHIFT | |
3145 | || XEXP (XEXP (temp1, 0), 0) != temp) | |
3146 | { | |
3147 | x = temp1; | |
3148 | goto restart; | |
3149 | } | |
3150 | } | |
3151 | break; | |
3152 | ||
3153 | case FLOAT_TRUNCATE: | |
3154 | /* (float_truncate:SF (float_extend:DF foo:SF)) = foo:SF. */ | |
3155 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == FLOAT_EXTEND | |
3156 | && GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == mode) | |
3157 | return XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0); | |
3158 | break; | |
3159 | ||
3160 | #ifdef HAVE_cc0 | |
3161 | case COMPARE: | |
3162 | /* Convert (compare FOO (const_int 0)) to FOO unless we aren't | |
3163 | using cc0, in which case we want to leave it as a COMPARE | |
3164 | so we can distinguish it from a register-register-copy. */ | |
3165 | if (XEXP (x, 1) == const0_rtx) | |
3166 | return XEXP (x, 0); | |
3167 | ||
3168 | /* In IEEE floating point, x-0 is not the same as x. */ | |
3169 | if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT | |
3170 | || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) == MODE_INT) | |
3171 | && XEXP (x, 1) == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) | |
3172 | return XEXP (x, 0); | |
3173 | break; | |
3174 | #endif | |
3175 | ||
3176 | case CONST: | |
3177 | /* (const (const X)) can become (const X). Do it this way rather than | |
3178 | returning the inner CONST since CONST can be shared with a | |
3179 | REG_EQUAL note. */ | |
3180 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CONST) | |
3181 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)); | |
3182 | break; | |
3183 | ||
3184 | #ifdef HAVE_lo_sum | |
3185 | case LO_SUM: | |
3186 | /* Convert (lo_sum (high FOO) FOO) to FOO. This is necessary so we | |
3187 | can add in an offset. find_split_point will split this address up | |
3188 | again if it doesn't match. */ | |
3189 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == HIGH | |
3190 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (x, 1))) | |
3191 | return XEXP (x, 1); | |
3192 | break; | |
3193 | #endif | |
3194 | ||
3195 | case PLUS: | |
3196 | /* If we have (plus (plus (A const) B)), associate it so that CONST is | |
3197 | outermost. That's because that's the way indexed addresses are | |
3198 | supposed to appear. This code used to check many more cases, but | |
3199 | they are now checked elsewhere. */ | |
3200 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS | |
3201 | && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))) | |
3202 | return gen_binary (PLUS, mode, | |
3203 | gen_binary (PLUS, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), | |
3204 | XEXP (x, 1)), | |
3205 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)); | |
3206 | ||
3207 | /* (plus (xor (and <foo> (const_int pow2 - 1)) <c>) <-c>) | |
3208 | when c is (const_int (pow2 + 1) / 2) is a sign extension of a | |
3209 | bit-field and can be replaced by either a sign_extend or a | |
3210 | sign_extract. The `and' may be a zero_extend. */ | |
3211 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR | |
3212 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
3213 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
3214 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) == - INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) | |
3215 | && (i = exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)))) >= 0 | |
5f4f0e22 | 3216 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d RS |
3217 | && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == AND |
3218 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
3219 | && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1)) | |
5f4f0e22 | 3220 | == ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (i + 1)) - 1)) |
230d793d RS |
3221 | || (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND |
3222 | && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0))) | |
3223 | == i + 1)))) | |
3224 | { | |
3225 | x = simplify_shift_const | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
3226 | (NULL_RTX, ASHIFTRT, mode, |
3227 | simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, | |
230d793d RS |
3228 | XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0), |
3229 | GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - (i + 1)), | |
3230 | GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - (i + 1)); | |
3231 | goto restart; | |
3232 | } | |
3233 | ||
3234 | /* If only the low-order bit of X is significant, (plus x -1) | |
3235 | can become (ashiftrt (ashift (xor x 1) C) C) where C is | |
3236 | the bitsize of the mode - 1. This allows simplification of | |
3237 | "a = (b & 8) == 0;" */ | |
3238 | if (XEXP (x, 1) == constm1_rtx | |
3239 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) != REG | |
3240 | && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x,0)) == SUBREG | |
3241 | && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))) == REG) | |
3242 | && significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) == 1) | |
3243 | { | |
3244 | x = simplify_shift_const | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
3245 | (NULL_RTX, ASHIFTRT, mode, |
3246 | simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, | |
230d793d RS |
3247 | gen_rtx_combine (XOR, mode, |
3248 | XEXP (x, 0), const1_rtx), | |
3249 | GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1), | |
3250 | GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1); | |
3251 | goto restart; | |
3252 | } | |
02f4ada4 RK |
3253 | |
3254 | /* If we are adding two things that have no bits in common, convert | |
3255 | the addition into an IOR. This will often be further simplified, | |
3256 | for example in cases like ((a & 1) + (a & 2)), which can | |
3257 | become a & 3. */ | |
3258 | ||
ac49a949 RS |
3259 | if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
3260 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) | |
3261 | & significant_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode)) == 0) | |
02f4ada4 RK |
3262 | { |
3263 | x = gen_binary (IOR, mode, XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1)); | |
3264 | goto restart; | |
3265 | } | |
230d793d RS |
3266 | break; |
3267 | ||
3268 | case MINUS: | |
3269 | /* (minus <foo> (and <foo> (const_int -pow2))) becomes | |
3270 | (and <foo> (const_int pow2-1)) */ | |
3271 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == AND | |
3272 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
3273 | && exact_log2 (- INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1))) >= 0 | |
3274 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0), XEXP (x, 0))) | |
3275 | { | |
5f4f0e22 | 3276 | x = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (x, 0), |
230d793d RS |
3277 | - INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1)) - 1); |
3278 | goto restart; | |
3279 | } | |
3280 | break; | |
3281 | ||
3282 | case MULT: | |
3283 | /* If we have (mult (plus A B) C), apply the distributive law and then | |
3284 | the inverse distributive law to see if things simplify. This | |
3285 | occurs mostly in addresses, often when unrolling loops. */ | |
3286 | ||
3287 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS) | |
3288 | { | |
3289 | x = apply_distributive_law | |
3290 | (gen_binary (PLUS, mode, | |
3291 | gen_binary (MULT, mode, | |
3292 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (x, 1)), | |
3293 | gen_binary (MULT, mode, | |
3294 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), XEXP (x, 1)))); | |
3295 | ||
3296 | if (GET_CODE (x) != MULT) | |
3297 | goto restart; | |
3298 | } | |
3299 | ||
3300 | /* If this is multiplication by a power of two and its first operand is | |
3301 | a shift, treat the multiply as a shift to allow the shifts to | |
3302 | possibly combine. */ | |
3303 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
3304 | && (i = exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))) >= 0 | |
3305 | && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT | |
3306 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT | |
3307 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFTRT | |
3308 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATE | |
3309 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATERT)) | |
3310 | { | |
5f4f0e22 | 3311 | x = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, XEXP (x, 0), i); |
230d793d RS |
3312 | goto restart; |
3313 | } | |
3314 | ||
3315 | /* Convert (mult (ashift (const_int 1) A) B) to (ashift B A). */ | |
3316 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT | |
3317 | && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0) == const1_rtx) | |
3318 | return gen_rtx_combine (ASHIFT, mode, XEXP (x, 1), | |
3319 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)); | |
3320 | break; | |
3321 | ||
3322 | case UDIV: | |
3323 | /* If this is a divide by a power of two, treat it as a shift if | |
3324 | its first operand is a shift. */ | |
3325 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
3326 | && (i = exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))) >= 0 | |
3327 | && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT | |
3328 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT | |
3329 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFTRT | |
3330 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATE | |
3331 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATERT)) | |
3332 | { | |
5f4f0e22 | 3333 | x = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, mode, XEXP (x, 0), i); |
230d793d RS |
3334 | goto restart; |
3335 | } | |
3336 | break; | |
3337 | ||
3338 | case EQ: case NE: | |
3339 | case GT: case GTU: case GE: case GEU: | |
3340 | case LT: case LTU: case LE: case LEU: | |
3341 | /* If the first operand is a condition code, we can't do anything | |
3342 | with it. */ | |
3343 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == COMPARE | |
3344 | || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) != MODE_CC | |
3345 | #ifdef HAVE_cc0 | |
3346 | && XEXP (x, 0) != cc0_rtx | |
3347 | #endif | |
3348 | )) | |
3349 | { | |
3350 | rtx op0 = XEXP (x, 0); | |
3351 | rtx op1 = XEXP (x, 1); | |
3352 | enum rtx_code new_code; | |
3353 | ||
3354 | if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE) | |
3355 | op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
3356 | ||
3357 | /* Simplify our comparison, if possible. */ | |
3358 | new_code = simplify_comparison (code, &op0, &op1); | |
3359 | ||
3360 | #if STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 | |
3361 | /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1, we can convert (ne x 0) to simply X | |
3362 | if only the low-order bit is significant in X (such as when | |
3363 | X is a ZERO_EXTRACT of one bit. Similarly, we can convert | |
3364 | EQ to (xor X 1). */ | |
3f508eca | 3365 | if (new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT |
230d793d RS |
3366 | && op1 == const0_rtx |
3367 | && significant_bits (op0, GET_MODE (op0)) == 1) | |
3368 | return gen_lowpart_for_combine (mode, op0); | |
3f508eca | 3369 | else if (new_code == EQ && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT |
230d793d RS |
3370 | && op1 == const0_rtx |
3371 | && significant_bits (op0, GET_MODE (op0)) == 1) | |
3372 | return gen_rtx_combine (XOR, mode, | |
3373 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (mode, op0), | |
3374 | const1_rtx); | |
3375 | #endif | |
3376 | ||
3377 | #if STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1 | |
3378 | /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1, we can convert (ne x 0) | |
3379 | to (neg x) if only the low-order bit of X is significant. | |
3380 | This converts (ne (zero_extract X 1 Y) 0) to | |
3381 | (sign_extract X 1 Y). */ | |
3f508eca | 3382 | if (new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT |
230d793d RS |
3383 | && op1 == const0_rtx |
3384 | && significant_bits (op0, GET_MODE (op0)) == 1) | |
3385 | { | |
3386 | x = gen_rtx_combine (NEG, mode, | |
3387 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (mode, op0)); | |
3388 | goto restart; | |
3389 | } | |
3390 | #endif | |
3391 | ||
3392 | /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE says to just test the sign bit and X has just | |
3393 | one significant bit, we can convert (ne x 0) to (ashift x c) | |
3394 | where C puts the bit in the sign bit. Remove any AND with | |
3395 | STORE_FLAG_VALUE when we are done, since we are only going to | |
3396 | test the sign bit. */ | |
3f508eca | 3397 | if (new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT |
5f4f0e22 CH |
3398 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
3399 | && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE | |
3400 | == (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1)) | |
230d793d RS |
3401 | && op1 == const0_rtx |
3402 | && mode == GET_MODE (op0) | |
3403 | && (i = exact_log2 (significant_bits (op0, GET_MODE (op0)))) >= 0) | |
3404 | { | |
5f4f0e22 | 3405 | x = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, op0, |
230d793d RS |
3406 | GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1 - i); |
3407 | if (GET_CODE (x) == AND && XEXP (x, 1) == const_true_rtx) | |
3408 | return XEXP (x, 0); | |
3409 | else | |
3410 | return x; | |
3411 | } | |
3412 | ||
3413 | /* If the code changed, return a whole new comparison. */ | |
3414 | if (new_code != code) | |
3415 | return gen_rtx_combine (new_code, mode, op0, op1); | |
3416 | ||
3417 | /* Otherwise, keep this operation, but maybe change its operands. | |
3418 | This also converts (ne (compare FOO BAR) 0) to (ne FOO BAR). */ | |
3419 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), op0); | |
3420 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), op1); | |
3421 | } | |
3422 | break; | |
3423 | ||
3424 | case IF_THEN_ELSE: | |
1a26b032 RK |
3425 | /* Sometimes we can simplify the arm of an IF_THEN_ELSE if a register |
3426 | used in it is being compared against certain values. Get the | |
3427 | true and false comparisons and see if that says anything about the | |
3428 | value of each arm. */ | |
d0ab8cd3 | 3429 | |
1a26b032 RK |
3430 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))) == '<' |
3431 | && reversible_comparison_p (XEXP (x, 0)) | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
3432 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == REG) |
3433 | { | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
3434 | HOST_WIDE_INT sig; |
3435 | rtx from = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0); | |
1a26b032 RK |
3436 | enum rtx_code true_code = GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)); |
3437 | enum rtx_code false_code = reverse_condition (true_code); | |
3438 | rtx true_val = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1); | |
3439 | rtx false_val = true_val; | |
3440 | rtx true_arm = XEXP (x, 1); | |
3441 | rtx false_arm = XEXP (x, 2); | |
3442 | int swapped = 0; | |
3443 | ||
3444 | /* If FALSE_CODE is EQ, swap the codes and arms. */ | |
3445 | ||
3446 | if (false_code == EQ) | |
3447 | { | |
3448 | swapped = 1, true_code = EQ, false_code = NE; | |
3449 | true_arm = XEXP (x, 2), false_arm = XEXP (x, 1); | |
3450 | } | |
d0ab8cd3 | 3451 | |
1a26b032 RK |
3452 | /* If we are comparing against zero and the expression being tested |
3453 | has only a single significant bit, that is its value when it is | |
3454 | not equal to zero. Similarly if it is known to be -1 or 0. */ | |
d0ab8cd3 | 3455 | |
1a26b032 | 3456 | if (true_code == EQ && true_val == const0_rtx |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
3457 | && exact_log2 (sig = significant_bits (from, |
3458 | GET_MODE (from))) >= 0) | |
1a26b032 RK |
3459 | false_code = EQ, false_val = GEN_INT (sig); |
3460 | else if (true_code == EQ && true_val == const0_rtx | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
3461 | && (num_sign_bit_copies (from, GET_MODE (from)) |
3462 | == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (from)))) | |
1a26b032 | 3463 | false_code = EQ, false_val = constm1_rtx; |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
3464 | |
3465 | /* Now simplify an arm if we know the value of the register | |
3466 | in the branch and it is used in the arm. Be carefull due to | |
3467 | the potential of locally-shared RTL. */ | |
3468 | ||
1a26b032 RK |
3469 | if (reg_mentioned_p (from, true_arm)) |
3470 | true_arm = subst (known_cond (copy_rtx (true_arm), true_code, | |
3471 | from, true_val), | |
3472 | pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0); | |
3473 | if (reg_mentioned_p (from, false_arm)) | |
3474 | false_arm = subst (known_cond (copy_rtx (false_arm), false_code, | |
3475 | from, false_val), | |
3476 | pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0); | |
3477 | ||
3478 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), swapped ? false_arm : true_arm); | |
3479 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 2), swapped ? true_arm : false_arm); | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
3480 | } |
3481 | ||
230d793d RS |
3482 | /* If we have (if_then_else FOO (pc) (label_ref BAR)) and FOO can be |
3483 | reversed, do so to avoid needing two sets of patterns for | |
d0ab8cd3 | 3484 | subtract-and-branch insns. Similarly if we have a constant in that |
1a26b032 RK |
3485 | position or if the third operand is the same as the first operand |
3486 | of the comparison. */ | |
3487 | ||
3488 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))) == '<' | |
3489 | && reversible_comparison_p (XEXP (x, 0)) | |
3490 | && (XEXP (x, 1) == pc_rtx || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
3491 | || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 2), XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))) | |
230d793d RS |
3492 | { |
3493 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
3494 | gen_binary (reverse_condition (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))), |
3495 | GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)), | |
3496 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))); | |
3497 | ||
3498 | temp = XEXP (x, 1); | |
230d793d | 3499 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (x, 2)); |
d0ab8cd3 | 3500 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 2), temp); |
230d793d | 3501 | } |
1a26b032 RK |
3502 | |
3503 | /* If the two arms are identical, we don't need the comparison. */ | |
3504 | ||
3505 | if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (x, 2)) | |
3506 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (x, 0))) | |
3507 | return XEXP (x, 1); | |
3508 | ||
3509 | /* Look for cases where we have (abs x) or (neg (abs X)). */ | |
3510 | ||
3511 | if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT | |
3512 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 2)) == NEG | |
3513 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (XEXP (x, 2), 0)) | |
3514 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))) == '<' | |
3515 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) | |
3516 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (x, 1))) | |
3517 | switch (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))) | |
3518 | { | |
3519 | case GT: | |
3520 | case GE: | |
3521 | x = gen_unary (ABS, mode, XEXP (x, 1)); | |
3522 | goto restart; | |
3523 | case LT: | |
3524 | case LE: | |
3525 | x = gen_unary (NEG, mode, gen_unary (ABS, mode, XEXP (x, 1))); | |
3526 | goto restart; | |
3527 | } | |
3528 | ||
3529 | /* Look for MIN or MAX. */ | |
3530 | ||
3531 | if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT | |
3532 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))) == '<' | |
3533 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (x, 1)) | |
3534 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), XEXP (x, 2)) | |
3535 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (x, 0))) | |
3536 | switch (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))) | |
3537 | { | |
3538 | case GE: | |
3539 | case GT: | |
3540 | x = gen_binary (SMAX, mode, XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (x, 2)); | |
3541 | goto restart; | |
3542 | case LE: | |
3543 | case LT: | |
3544 | x = gen_binary (SMIN, mode, XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (x, 2)); | |
3545 | goto restart; | |
3546 | case GEU: | |
3547 | case GTU: | |
3548 | x = gen_binary (UMAX, mode, XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (x, 2)); | |
3549 | goto restart; | |
3550 | case LEU: | |
3551 | case LTU: | |
3552 | x = gen_binary (UMIN, mode, XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (x, 2)); | |
3553 | goto restart; | |
3554 | } | |
3555 | ||
3556 | /* If we have something like (if_then_else (ne A 0) (OP X C) X), | |
3557 | A is known to be either 0 or 1, and OP is an identity when its | |
3558 | second operand is zero, this can be done as (OP X (mult A C)). | |
3559 | Similarly if A is known to be 0 or -1 and also similarly if we have | |
3560 | a ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND as long as X is already extended (so | |
3561 | we don't destroy it). */ | |
3562 | ||
3563 | if (mode != VOIDmode | |
3564 | && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == EQ || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NE) | |
3565 | && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1) == const0_rtx | |
3566 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), mode) == 1 | |
3567 | || (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), mode) | |
3568 | == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)))) | |
3569 | { | |
3570 | rtx nz = make_compound_operation (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NE | |
3571 | ? XEXP (x, 1) : XEXP (x, 2)); | |
3572 | rtx z = GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NE ? XEXP (x, 2) : XEXP (x, 1); | |
3573 | rtx dir = (significant_bits (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), mode) == 1 | |
3574 | ? const1_rtx : constm1_rtx); | |
3575 | rtx c = 0; | |
3576 | enum machine_mode m = mode; | |
e64ff103 | 3577 | enum rtx_code op, extend_op = 0; |
1a26b032 RK |
3578 | |
3579 | if ((GET_CODE (nz) == PLUS || GET_CODE (nz) == MINUS | |
3580 | || GET_CODE (nz) == IOR || GET_CODE (nz) == XOR | |
3581 | || GET_CODE (nz) == ASHIFT | |
3582 | || GET_CODE (nz) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (nz) == ASHIFTRT) | |
3583 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (nz, 0), z)) | |
3584 | c = XEXP (nz, 1), op = GET_CODE (nz); | |
3585 | else if (GET_CODE (nz) == SIGN_EXTEND | |
3586 | && (GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == PLUS | |
3587 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == MINUS | |
3588 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == IOR | |
3589 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == XOR | |
3590 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == ASHIFT | |
3591 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == LSHIFTRT | |
3592 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == ASHIFTRT) | |
3593 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (nz, 0), 0)) == SUBREG | |
3594 | && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (nz, 0), 0)) | |
3595 | && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (nz, 0), 0)), z) | |
3596 | && (num_sign_bit_copies (z, GET_MODE (z)) | |
3597 | >= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) | |
3598 | - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (nz, 0), 0)))))) | |
3599 | { | |
3600 | c = XEXP (XEXP (nz, 0), 1); | |
3601 | op = GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)); | |
3602 | extend_op = SIGN_EXTEND; | |
3603 | m = GET_MODE (XEXP (nz, 0)); | |
3604 | } | |
3605 | else if (GET_CODE (nz) == ZERO_EXTEND | |
3606 | && (GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == PLUS | |
3607 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == MINUS | |
3608 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == IOR | |
3609 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == XOR | |
3610 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == ASHIFT | |
3611 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == LSHIFTRT | |
3612 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)) == ASHIFTRT) | |
3613 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (nz, 0), 0)) == SUBREG | |
3614 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT | |
3615 | && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (nz, 0), 0)) | |
3616 | && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (nz, 0), 0)), z) | |
3617 | && ((significant_bits (z, GET_MODE (z)) | |
3618 | & ~ GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (nz, 0), 0)))) | |
3619 | == 0)) | |
3620 | { | |
3621 | c = XEXP (XEXP (nz, 0), 1); | |
3622 | op = GET_CODE (XEXP (nz, 0)); | |
3623 | extend_op = ZERO_EXTEND; | |
3624 | m = GET_MODE (XEXP (nz, 0)); | |
3625 | } | |
3626 | ||
3627 | if (c && ! side_effects_p (c) && ! side_effects_p (z)) | |
3628 | { | |
3629 | temp | |
3630 | = gen_binary (MULT, m, | |
3631 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (m, | |
3632 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)), | |
3633 | gen_binary (MULT, m, c, dir)); | |
3634 | ||
3635 | temp = gen_binary (op, m, gen_lowpart_for_combine (m, z), temp); | |
3636 | ||
e64ff103 | 3637 | if (extend_op != 0) |
1a26b032 RK |
3638 | temp = gen_unary (extend_op, mode, temp); |
3639 | ||
3640 | return temp; | |
3641 | } | |
3642 | } | |
230d793d RS |
3643 | break; |
3644 | ||
3645 | case ZERO_EXTRACT: | |
3646 | case SIGN_EXTRACT: | |
3647 | case ZERO_EXTEND: | |
3648 | case SIGN_EXTEND: | |
3649 | /* If we are processing SET_DEST, we are done. */ | |
3650 | if (in_dest) | |
3651 | return x; | |
3652 | ||
3653 | x = expand_compound_operation (x); | |
3654 | if (GET_CODE (x) != code) | |
3655 | goto restart; | |
3656 | break; | |
3657 | ||
3658 | case SET: | |
3659 | /* (set (pc) (return)) gets written as (return). */ | |
3660 | if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == PC && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == RETURN) | |
3661 | return SET_SRC (x); | |
3662 | ||
3663 | /* Convert this into a field assignment operation, if possible. */ | |
3664 | x = make_field_assignment (x); | |
3665 | ||
230d793d RS |
3666 | /* If we are setting CC0 or if the source is a COMPARE, look for the |
3667 | use of the comparison result and try to simplify it unless we already | |
3668 | have used undobuf.other_insn. */ | |
3669 | if ((GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == COMPARE | |
3670 | #ifdef HAVE_cc0 | |
3671 | || SET_DEST (x) == cc0_rtx | |
3672 | #endif | |
3673 | ) | |
3674 | && (cc_use = find_single_use (SET_DEST (x), subst_insn, | |
3675 | &other_insn)) != 0 | |
3676 | && (undobuf.other_insn == 0 || other_insn == undobuf.other_insn) | |
3677 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (*cc_use)) == '<' | |
3678 | && XEXP (*cc_use, 0) == SET_DEST (x)) | |
3679 | { | |
3680 | enum rtx_code old_code = GET_CODE (*cc_use); | |
3681 | enum rtx_code new_code; | |
3682 | rtx op0, op1; | |
3683 | int other_changed = 0; | |
3684 | enum machine_mode compare_mode = GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)); | |
3685 | ||
3686 | if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == COMPARE) | |
3687 | op0 = XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0), op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1); | |
3688 | else | |
3689 | op0 = SET_SRC (x), op1 = const0_rtx; | |
3690 | ||
3691 | /* Simplify our comparison, if possible. */ | |
3692 | new_code = simplify_comparison (old_code, &op0, &op1); | |
3693 | ||
3694 | #if !defined (HAVE_cc0) && defined (EXTRA_CC_MODES) | |
3695 | /* If this machine has CC modes other than CCmode, check to see | |
3696 | if we need to use a different CC mode here. */ | |
77fa0940 | 3697 | compare_mode = SELECT_CC_MODE (new_code, op0, op1); |
230d793d RS |
3698 | |
3699 | /* If the mode changed, we have to change SET_DEST, the mode | |
3700 | in the compare, and the mode in the place SET_DEST is used. | |
3701 | If SET_DEST is a hard register, just build new versions with | |
3702 | the proper mode. If it is a pseudo, we lose unless it is only | |
3703 | time we set the pseudo, in which case we can safely change | |
3704 | its mode. */ | |
3705 | if (compare_mode != GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x))) | |
3706 | { | |
3707 | int regno = REGNO (SET_DEST (x)); | |
3708 | rtx new_dest = gen_rtx (REG, compare_mode, regno); | |
3709 | ||
3710 | if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
3711 | || (reg_n_sets[regno] == 1 | |
3712 | && ! REG_USERVAR_P (SET_DEST (x)))) | |
3713 | { | |
3714 | if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) | |
3715 | SUBST (regno_reg_rtx[regno], new_dest); | |
3716 | ||
3717 | SUBST (SET_DEST (x), new_dest); | |
3718 | SUBST (XEXP (*cc_use, 0), new_dest); | |
3719 | other_changed = 1; | |
3720 | } | |
3721 | } | |
3722 | #endif | |
3723 | ||
3724 | /* If the code changed, we have to build a new comparison | |
3725 | in undobuf.other_insn. */ | |
3726 | if (new_code != old_code) | |
3727 | { | |
3728 | unsigned mask; | |
3729 | ||
3730 | SUBST (*cc_use, gen_rtx_combine (new_code, GET_MODE (*cc_use), | |
3731 | SET_DEST (x), const0_rtx)); | |
3732 | ||
3733 | /* If the only change we made was to change an EQ into an | |
3734 | NE or vice versa, OP0 has only one significant bit, | |
3735 | and OP1 is zero, check if changing the user of the condition | |
3736 | code will produce a valid insn. If it won't, we can keep | |
3737 | the original code in that insn by surrounding our operation | |
3738 | with an XOR. */ | |
3739 | ||
3740 | if (((old_code == NE && new_code == EQ) | |
3741 | || (old_code == EQ && new_code == NE)) | |
3742 | && ! other_changed && op1 == const0_rtx | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
3743 | && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)) |
3744 | <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) | |
230d793d RS |
3745 | && (exact_log2 (mask = significant_bits (op0, |
3746 | GET_MODE (op0))) | |
3747 | >= 0)) | |
3748 | { | |
3749 | rtx pat = PATTERN (other_insn), note = 0; | |
3750 | ||
3751 | if ((recog_for_combine (&pat, undobuf.other_insn, ¬e) < 0 | |
3752 | && ! check_asm_operands (pat))) | |
3753 | { | |
3754 | PUT_CODE (*cc_use, old_code); | |
3755 | other_insn = 0; | |
3756 | ||
3757 | op0 = gen_binary (XOR, GET_MODE (op0), op0, | |
5f4f0e22 | 3758 | GEN_INT (mask)); |
230d793d RS |
3759 | } |
3760 | } | |
3761 | ||
3762 | other_changed = 1; | |
3763 | } | |
3764 | ||
3765 | if (other_changed) | |
3766 | undobuf.other_insn = other_insn; | |
3767 | ||
3768 | #ifdef HAVE_cc0 | |
3769 | /* If we are now comparing against zero, change our source if | |
3770 | needed. If we do not use cc0, we always have a COMPARE. */ | |
3771 | if (op1 == const0_rtx && SET_DEST (x) == cc0_rtx) | |
3772 | SUBST (SET_SRC (x), op0); | |
3773 | else | |
3774 | #endif | |
3775 | ||
3776 | /* Otherwise, if we didn't previously have a COMPARE in the | |
3777 | correct mode, we need one. */ | |
3778 | if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != COMPARE | |
3779 | || GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x)) != compare_mode) | |
3780 | SUBST (SET_SRC (x), gen_rtx_combine (COMPARE, compare_mode, | |
3781 | op0, op1)); | |
3782 | else | |
3783 | { | |
3784 | /* Otherwise, update the COMPARE if needed. */ | |
3785 | SUBST (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0), op0); | |
3786 | SUBST (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1), op1); | |
3787 | } | |
3788 | } | |
3789 | else | |
3790 | { | |
3791 | /* Get SET_SRC in a form where we have placed back any | |
3792 | compound expressions. Then do the checks below. */ | |
3793 | temp = make_compound_operation (SET_SRC (x), SET); | |
3794 | SUBST (SET_SRC (x), temp); | |
3795 | } | |
3796 | ||
df62f951 RK |
3797 | /* If we have (set x (subreg:m1 (op:m2 ...) 0)) with OP being some |
3798 | operation, and X being a REG or (subreg (reg)), we may be able to | |
3799 | convert this to (set (subreg:m2 x) (op)). | |
3800 | ||
3801 | We can always do this if M1 is narrower than M2 because that | |
3802 | means that we only care about the low bits of the result. | |
3803 | ||
3804 | However, on most machines (those with BYTE_LOADS_ZERO_EXTEND | |
457816e2 RK |
3805 | and BYTES_LOADS_SIGN_EXTEND not defined), we cannot perform a |
3806 | narrower operation that requested since the high-order bits will | |
3807 | be undefined. On machine where BYTE_LOADS_*_EXTEND is defined, | |
3808 | however, this transformation is safe as long as M1 and M2 have | |
3809 | the same number of words. */ | |
df62f951 RK |
3810 | |
3811 | if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == SUBREG | |
3812 | && subreg_lowpart_p (SET_SRC (x)) | |
3813 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_SRC (x)))) != 'o' | |
3814 | && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x))) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) | |
3815 | / UNITS_PER_WORD) | |
3816 | == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_SRC (x)))) | |
3817 | + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)) | |
457816e2 | 3818 | #if ! defined(BYTE_LOADS_ZERO_EXTEND) && ! defined (BYTE_LOADS_SIGN_EXTEND) |
df62f951 RK |
3819 | && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x))) |
3820 | < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_SRC (x))))) | |
3821 | #endif | |
3822 | && (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == REG | |
3823 | || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG | |
3824 | && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))) == REG))) | |
3825 | { | |
df62f951 | 3826 | SUBST (SET_DEST (x), |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
3827 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_SRC (x))), |
3828 | SET_DEST (x))); | |
df62f951 RK |
3829 | SUBST (SET_SRC (x), SUBREG_REG (SET_SRC (x))); |
3830 | } | |
3831 | ||
230d793d RS |
3832 | #ifdef BYTE_LOADS_ZERO_EXTEND |
3833 | /* If we have (set FOO (subreg:M (mem:N BAR) 0)) with | |
3834 | M wider than N, this would require a paradoxical subreg. | |
3835 | Replace the subreg with a zero_extend to avoid the reload that | |
3836 | would otherwise be required. */ | |
3837 | if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == SUBREG | |
3838 | && subreg_lowpart_p (SET_SRC (x)) | |
3839 | && SUBREG_WORD (SET_SRC (x)) == 0 | |
3840 | && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x))) | |
3841 | > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_SRC (x))))) | |
3842 | && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_SRC (x))) == MEM) | |
3843 | SUBST (SET_SRC (x), gen_rtx_combine (ZERO_EXTEND, | |
3844 | GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x)), | |
3845 | XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))); | |
3846 | #endif | |
3847 | ||
1a26b032 RK |
3848 | #ifndef HAVE_conditional_move |
3849 | ||
3850 | /* If we don't have a conditional move, SET_SRC is an IF_THEN_ELSE, | |
3851 | and we are comparing an item known to be 0 or -1 against 0, use a | |
3852 | logical operation instead. Check for one of the arms being an IOR | |
3853 | of the other arm with some value. We compute three terms to be | |
3854 | IOR'ed together. In practice, at most two will be nonzero. Then | |
3855 | we do the IOR's. */ | |
3856 | ||
696223d7 TW |
3857 | if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != PC |
3858 | && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == IF_THEN_ELSE | |
1a26b032 RK |
3859 | && (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0)) == EQ |
3860 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0)) == NE) | |
3861 | && XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0), 1) == const0_rtx | |
3862 | && (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0), 0), | |
3863 | GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0), 0))) | |
3864 | == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0), 0)))) | |
3865 | && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (x))) | |
3866 | { | |
3867 | rtx true = (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0)) == NE | |
3868 | ? XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1) : XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 2)); | |
3869 | rtx false = (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0)) == NE | |
3870 | ? XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 2) : XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1)); | |
3871 | rtx term1 = const0_rtx, term2, term3; | |
3872 | ||
3873 | if (GET_CODE (true) == IOR && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (true, 0), false)) | |
3874 | term1 = false, true = XEXP (true, 1), false = const0_rtx; | |
3875 | else if (GET_CODE (true) == IOR | |
3876 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (true, 1), false)) | |
3877 | term1 = false, true = XEXP (true, 0), false = const0_rtx; | |
3878 | else if (GET_CODE (false) == IOR | |
3879 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (false, 0), true)) | |
3880 | term1 = true, false = XEXP (false, 1), true = const0_rtx; | |
3881 | else if (GET_CODE (false) == IOR | |
3882 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (false, 1), true)) | |
3883 | term1 = true, false = XEXP (false, 0), true = const0_rtx; | |
3884 | ||
3885 | term2 = gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x)), | |
3886 | XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0), 0), true); | |
3887 | term3 = gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x)), | |
3888 | gen_unary (NOT, GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x)), | |
3889 | XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0), 0)), | |
3890 | false); | |
3891 | ||
3892 | SUBST (SET_SRC (x), | |
3893 | gen_binary (IOR, GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x)), | |
3894 | gen_binary (IOR, GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x)), | |
3895 | term1, term2), | |
3896 | term3)); | |
3897 | } | |
3898 | #endif | |
230d793d RS |
3899 | break; |
3900 | ||
3901 | case AND: | |
3902 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT) | |
3903 | { | |
3904 | x = simplify_and_const_int (x, mode, XEXP (x, 0), | |
3905 | INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))); | |
3906 | ||
3907 | /* If we have (ior (and (X C1) C2)) and the next restart would be | |
3908 | the last, simplify this by making C1 as small as possible | |
3909 | and then exit. */ | |
3910 | if (n_restarts >= 3 && GET_CODE (x) == IOR | |
3911 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == AND | |
3912 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
3913 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT) | |
3914 | { | |
3915 | temp = gen_binary (AND, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
3916 | GEN_INT (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) |
3917 | & ~ INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))); | |
230d793d RS |
3918 | return gen_binary (IOR, mode, temp, XEXP (x, 1)); |
3919 | } | |
3920 | ||
3921 | if (GET_CODE (x) != AND) | |
3922 | goto restart; | |
3923 | } | |
3924 | ||
3925 | /* Convert (A | B) & A to A. */ | |
3926 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == IOR | |
3927 | && (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (x, 1)) | |
3928 | || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), XEXP (x, 1))) | |
3929 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) | |
3930 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))) | |
3931 | return XEXP (x, 1); | |
3932 | ||
3933 | /* Convert (A ^ B) & A to A & (~ B) since the latter is often a single | |
3934 | insn (and may simplify more). */ | |
3935 | else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR | |
3936 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (x, 1)) | |
3937 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (x, 1))) | |
3938 | { | |
3939 | x = gen_binary (AND, mode, | |
3940 | gen_unary (NOT, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)), | |
3941 | XEXP (x, 1)); | |
3942 | goto restart; | |
3943 | } | |
3944 | else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR | |
3945 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), XEXP (x, 1)) | |
3946 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (x, 1))) | |
3947 | { | |
3948 | x = gen_binary (AND, mode, | |
3949 | gen_unary (NOT, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)), | |
3950 | XEXP (x, 1)); | |
3951 | goto restart; | |
3952 | } | |
3953 | ||
3954 | /* Similarly for (~ (A ^ B)) & A. */ | |
3955 | else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NOT | |
3956 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == XOR | |
3957 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0), XEXP (x, 1)) | |
3958 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (x, 1))) | |
3959 | { | |
3960 | x = gen_binary (AND, mode, XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1), | |
3961 | XEXP (x, 1)); | |
3962 | goto restart; | |
3963 | } | |
3964 | else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NOT | |
3965 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == XOR | |
3966 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1), XEXP (x, 1)) | |
3967 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (x, 1))) | |
3968 | { | |
3969 | x = gen_binary (AND, mode, XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0), | |
3970 | XEXP (x, 1)); | |
3971 | goto restart; | |
3972 | } | |
3973 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
3974 | /* If we have (and A B) with A not an object but that is known to |
3975 | be -1 or 0, this is equivalent to the expression | |
3976 | (if_then_else (ne A (const_int 0)) B (const_int 0)) | |
3977 | We make this conversion because it may allow further | |
1a26b032 RK |
3978 | simplifications and then allow use of conditional move insns. |
3979 | If the machine doesn't have condition moves, code in case SET | |
3980 | will convert the IF_THEN_ELSE back to the logical operation. | |
3981 | We build the IF_THEN_ELSE here in case further simplification | |
3982 | is possible (e.g., we can convert it to ABS). */ | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
3983 | |
3984 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))) != 'o' | |
3985 | && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG | |
3986 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 'o') | |
3987 | && (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) | |
3988 | == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))) | |
3989 | { | |
3990 | rtx op0 = XEXP (x, 0); | |
3991 | rtx op1 = const0_rtx; | |
3992 | enum rtx_code comp_code | |
3993 | = simplify_comparison (NE, &op0, &op1); | |
3994 | ||
3995 | x = gen_rtx_combine (IF_THEN_ELSE, mode, | |
3996 | gen_binary (comp_code, VOIDmode, op0, op1), | |
3997 | XEXP (x, 1), const0_rtx); | |
3998 | goto restart; | |
3999 | } | |
4000 | ||
4001 | /* In the following group of tests (and those in case IOR below), | |
230d793d RS |
4002 | we start with some combination of logical operations and apply |
4003 | the distributive law followed by the inverse distributive law. | |
4004 | Most of the time, this results in no change. However, if some of | |
4005 | the operands are the same or inverses of each other, simplifications | |
4006 | will result. | |
4007 | ||
4008 | For example, (and (ior A B) (not B)) can occur as the result of | |
4009 | expanding a bit field assignment. When we apply the distributive | |
4010 | law to this, we get (ior (and (A (not B))) (and (B (not B)))), | |
4011 | which then simplifies to (and (A (not B))). */ | |
4012 | ||
4013 | /* If we have (and (ior A B) C), apply the distributive law and then | |
4014 | the inverse distributive law to see if things simplify. */ | |
4015 | ||
4016 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == IOR || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR) | |
4017 | { | |
4018 | x = apply_distributive_law | |
4019 | (gen_binary (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)), mode, | |
4020 | gen_binary (AND, mode, | |
4021 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (x, 1)), | |
4022 | gen_binary (AND, mode, | |
4023 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), XEXP (x, 1)))); | |
4024 | if (GET_CODE (x) != AND) | |
4025 | goto restart; | |
4026 | } | |
4027 | ||
4028 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == IOR || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == XOR) | |
4029 | { | |
4030 | x = apply_distributive_law | |
4031 | (gen_binary (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)), mode, | |
4032 | gen_binary (AND, mode, | |
4033 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0), XEXP (x, 0)), | |
4034 | gen_binary (AND, mode, | |
4035 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1), XEXP (x, 0)))); | |
4036 | if (GET_CODE (x) != AND) | |
4037 | goto restart; | |
4038 | } | |
4039 | ||
4040 | /* Similarly, taking advantage of the fact that | |
4041 | (and (not A) (xor B C)) == (xor (ior A B) (ior A C)) */ | |
4042 | ||
4043 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NOT && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == XOR) | |
4044 | { | |
4045 | x = apply_distributive_law | |
4046 | (gen_binary (XOR, mode, | |
4047 | gen_binary (IOR, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), | |
4048 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0)), | |
4049 | gen_binary (IOR, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), | |
4050 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1)))); | |
4051 | if (GET_CODE (x) != AND) | |
4052 | goto restart; | |
4053 | } | |
4054 | ||
4055 | else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == NOT && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR) | |
4056 | { | |
4057 | x = apply_distributive_law | |
4058 | (gen_binary (XOR, mode, | |
4059 | gen_binary (IOR, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0), | |
4060 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)), | |
4061 | gen_binary (IOR, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0), | |
4062 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)))); | |
4063 | if (GET_CODE (x) != AND) | |
4064 | goto restart; | |
4065 | } | |
4066 | break; | |
4067 | ||
4068 | case IOR: | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
4069 | /* (ior A C) is C if all significant bits of A are on in C. */ |
4070 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
ac49a949 | 4071 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
4072 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) |
4073 | & ~ INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) == 0) | |
4074 | return XEXP (x, 1); | |
4075 | ||
230d793d RS |
4076 | /* Convert (A & B) | A to A. */ |
4077 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == AND | |
4078 | && (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (x, 1)) | |
4079 | || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), XEXP (x, 1))) | |
4080 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) | |
4081 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))) | |
4082 | return XEXP (x, 1); | |
4083 | ||
4084 | /* If we have (ior (and A B) C), apply the distributive law and then | |
4085 | the inverse distributive law to see if things simplify. */ | |
4086 | ||
4087 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == AND) | |
4088 | { | |
4089 | x = apply_distributive_law | |
4090 | (gen_binary (AND, mode, | |
4091 | gen_binary (IOR, mode, | |
4092 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (x, 1)), | |
4093 | gen_binary (IOR, mode, | |
4094 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), XEXP (x, 1)))); | |
4095 | ||
4096 | if (GET_CODE (x) != IOR) | |
4097 | goto restart; | |
4098 | } | |
4099 | ||
4100 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == AND) | |
4101 | { | |
4102 | x = apply_distributive_law | |
4103 | (gen_binary (AND, mode, | |
4104 | gen_binary (IOR, mode, | |
4105 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0), XEXP (x, 0)), | |
4106 | gen_binary (IOR, mode, | |
4107 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1), XEXP (x, 0)))); | |
4108 | ||
4109 | if (GET_CODE (x) != IOR) | |
4110 | goto restart; | |
4111 | } | |
4112 | ||
4113 | /* Convert (ior (ashift A CX) (lshiftrt A CY)) where CX+CY equals the | |
4114 | mode size to (rotate A CX). */ | |
4115 | ||
4116 | if (((GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT | |
4117 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == LSHIFTRT) | |
4118 | || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == ASHIFT | |
4119 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT)) | |
4120 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0)) | |
4121 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
4122 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
4123 | && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) + INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1)) | |
4124 | == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))) | |
4125 | { | |
4126 | rtx shift_count; | |
4127 | ||
4128 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT) | |
4129 | shift_count = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1); | |
4130 | else | |
4131 | shift_count = XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1); | |
4132 | x = gen_rtx (ROTATE, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), shift_count); | |
4133 | goto restart; | |
4134 | } | |
4135 | break; | |
4136 | ||
4137 | case XOR: | |
4138 | /* Convert (XOR (NOT x) (NOT y)) to (XOR x y). | |
4139 | Also convert (XOR (NOT x) y) to (NOT (XOR x y)), similarly for | |
4140 | (NOT y). */ | |
4141 | { | |
4142 | int num_negated = 0; | |
4143 | rtx in1 = XEXP (x, 0), in2 = XEXP (x, 1); | |
4144 | ||
4145 | if (GET_CODE (in1) == NOT) | |
4146 | num_negated++, in1 = XEXP (in1, 0); | |
4147 | if (GET_CODE (in2) == NOT) | |
4148 | num_negated++, in2 = XEXP (in2, 0); | |
4149 | ||
4150 | if (num_negated == 2) | |
4151 | { | |
4152 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)); | |
4153 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0)); | |
4154 | } | |
4155 | else if (num_negated == 1) | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
4156 | { |
4157 | x = gen_unary (NOT, mode, | |
4158 | gen_binary (XOR, mode, in1, in2)); | |
4159 | goto restart; | |
4160 | } | |
230d793d RS |
4161 | } |
4162 | ||
4163 | /* Convert (xor (and A B) B) to (and (not A) B). The latter may | |
4164 | correspond to a machine insn or result in further simplifications | |
4165 | if B is a constant. */ | |
4166 | ||
4167 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == AND | |
4168 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), XEXP (x, 1)) | |
4169 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (x, 1))) | |
4170 | { | |
4171 | x = gen_binary (AND, mode, | |
4172 | gen_unary (NOT, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)), | |
4173 | XEXP (x, 1)); | |
4174 | goto restart; | |
4175 | } | |
4176 | else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == AND | |
4177 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (x, 1)) | |
4178 | && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (x, 1))) | |
4179 | { | |
4180 | x = gen_binary (AND, mode, | |
4181 | gen_unary (NOT, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)), | |
4182 | XEXP (x, 1)); | |
4183 | goto restart; | |
4184 | } | |
4185 | ||
4186 | ||
4187 | #if STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 | |
4188 | /* (xor (comparison foo bar) (const_int 1)) can become the reversed | |
4189 | comparison. */ | |
4190 | if (XEXP (x, 1) == const1_rtx | |
4191 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))) == '<' | |
4192 | && reversible_comparison_p (XEXP (x, 0))) | |
4193 | return gen_rtx_combine (reverse_condition (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))), | |
4194 | mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), | |
4195 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)); | |
4196 | #endif | |
4197 | ||
4198 | /* (xor (comparison foo bar) (const_int sign-bit)) | |
4199 | when STORE_FLAG_VALUE is the sign bit. */ | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
4200 | if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
4201 | && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE | |
4202 | == (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1)) | |
230d793d RS |
4203 | && XEXP (x, 1) == const_true_rtx |
4204 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))) == '<' | |
4205 | && reversible_comparison_p (XEXP (x, 0))) | |
4206 | return gen_rtx_combine (reverse_condition (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))), | |
4207 | mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), | |
4208 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)); | |
4209 | break; | |
4210 | ||
4211 | case ABS: | |
4212 | /* (abs (neg <foo>)) -> (abs <foo>) */ | |
4213 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NEG) | |
4214 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)); | |
4215 | ||
4216 | /* If operand is something known to be positive, ignore the ABS. */ | |
4217 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == FFS || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ABS | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
4218 | || ((GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) |
4219 | <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) | |
230d793d | 4220 | && ((significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) |
5f4f0e22 CH |
4221 | & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 |
4222 | << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) - 1))) | |
230d793d RS |
4223 | == 0))) |
4224 | return XEXP (x, 0); | |
4225 | ||
4226 | ||
4227 | /* If operand is known to be only -1 or 0, convert ABS to NEG. */ | |
d0ab8cd3 | 4228 | if (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)) |
230d793d RS |
4229 | { |
4230 | x = gen_rtx_combine (NEG, mode, XEXP (x, 0)); | |
4231 | goto restart; | |
4232 | } | |
4233 | break; | |
4234 | ||
a7c99304 RK |
4235 | case FFS: |
4236 | /* (ffs (*_extend <X>)) = (ffs <X>) */ | |
4237 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SIGN_EXTEND | |
4238 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND) | |
4239 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)); | |
4240 | break; | |
4241 | ||
230d793d RS |
4242 | case FLOAT: |
4243 | /* (float (sign_extend <X>)) = (float <X>). */ | |
4244 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SIGN_EXTEND) | |
4245 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)); | |
4246 | break; | |
4247 | ||
4248 | case LSHIFT: | |
4249 | case ASHIFT: | |
4250 | case LSHIFTRT: | |
4251 | case ASHIFTRT: | |
4252 | case ROTATE: | |
4253 | case ROTATERT: | |
230d793d RS |
4254 | /* If this is a shift by a constant amount, simplify it. */ |
4255 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT) | |
4256 | { | |
4257 | x = simplify_shift_const (x, code, mode, XEXP (x, 0), | |
4258 | INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))); | |
4259 | if (GET_CODE (x) != code) | |
4260 | goto restart; | |
4261 | } | |
77fa0940 RK |
4262 | |
4263 | #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED | |
4264 | else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) != REG) | |
4265 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), | |
4266 | force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 1), GET_MODE (x), | |
4267 | exact_log2 (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x))), | |
5f4f0e22 | 4268 | NULL_RTX)); |
77fa0940 RK |
4269 | #endif |
4270 | ||
230d793d RS |
4271 | break; |
4272 | } | |
4273 | ||
4274 | return x; | |
4275 | } | |
4276 | \f | |
4277 | /* We consider ZERO_EXTRACT, SIGN_EXTRACT, and SIGN_EXTEND as "compound | |
4278 | operations" because they can be replaced with two more basic operations. | |
4279 | ZERO_EXTEND is also considered "compound" because it can be replaced with | |
4280 | an AND operation, which is simpler, though only one operation. | |
4281 | ||
4282 | The function expand_compound_operation is called with an rtx expression | |
4283 | and will convert it to the appropriate shifts and AND operations, | |
4284 | simplifying at each stage. | |
4285 | ||
4286 | The function make_compound_operation is called to convert an expression | |
4287 | consisting of shifts and ANDs into the equivalent compound expression. | |
4288 | It is the inverse of this function, loosely speaking. */ | |
4289 | ||
4290 | static rtx | |
4291 | expand_compound_operation (x) | |
4292 | rtx x; | |
4293 | { | |
4294 | int pos = 0, len; | |
4295 | int unsignedp = 0; | |
4296 | int modewidth; | |
4297 | rtx tem; | |
4298 | ||
4299 | switch (GET_CODE (x)) | |
4300 | { | |
4301 | case ZERO_EXTEND: | |
4302 | unsignedp = 1; | |
4303 | case SIGN_EXTEND: | |
75473182 RS |
4304 | /* We can't necessarily use a const_int for a multiword mode; |
4305 | it depends on implicitly extending the value. | |
4306 | Since we don't know the right way to extend it, | |
4307 | we can't tell whether the implicit way is right. | |
4308 | ||
4309 | Even for a mode that is no wider than a const_int, | |
4310 | we can't win, because we need to sign extend one of its bits through | |
4311 | the rest of it, and we don't know which bit. */ | |
230d793d | 4312 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CONST_INT) |
75473182 | 4313 | return x; |
230d793d RS |
4314 | |
4315 | if (! FAKE_EXTEND_SAFE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)), XEXP (x, 0))) | |
4316 | return x; | |
4317 | ||
4318 | len = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))); | |
4319 | /* If the inner object has VOIDmode (the only way this can happen | |
4320 | is if it is a ASM_OPERANDS), we can't do anything since we don't | |
4321 | know how much masking to do. */ | |
4322 | if (len == 0) | |
4323 | return x; | |
4324 | ||
4325 | break; | |
4326 | ||
4327 | case ZERO_EXTRACT: | |
4328 | unsignedp = 1; | |
4329 | case SIGN_EXTRACT: | |
4330 | /* If the operand is a CLOBBER, just return it. */ | |
4331 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CLOBBER) | |
4332 | return XEXP (x, 0); | |
4333 | ||
4334 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) != CONST_INT | |
4335 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 2)) != CONST_INT | |
4336 | || GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == VOIDmode) | |
4337 | return x; | |
4338 | ||
4339 | len = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)); | |
4340 | pos = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 2)); | |
4341 | ||
4342 | /* If this goes outside the object being extracted, replace the object | |
4343 | with a (use (mem ...)) construct that only combine understands | |
4344 | and is used only for this purpose. */ | |
4345 | if (len + pos > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) | |
4346 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), gen_rtx (USE, GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0))); | |
4347 | ||
4348 | #if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN | |
4349 | pos = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) - len - pos; | |
4350 | #endif | |
4351 | break; | |
4352 | ||
4353 | default: | |
4354 | return x; | |
4355 | } | |
4356 | ||
4357 | /* If we reach here, we want to return a pair of shifts. The inner | |
4358 | shift is a left shift of BITSIZE - POS - LEN bits. The outer | |
4359 | shift is a right shift of BITSIZE - LEN bits. It is arithmetic or | |
4360 | logical depending on the value of UNSIGNEDP. | |
4361 | ||
4362 | If this was a ZERO_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTRACT, this pair of shifts will be | |
4363 | converted into an AND of a shift. | |
4364 | ||
4365 | We must check for the case where the left shift would have a negative | |
4366 | count. This can happen in a case like (x >> 31) & 255 on machines | |
4367 | that can't shift by a constant. On those machines, we would first | |
4368 | combine the shift with the AND to produce a variable-position | |
4369 | extraction. Then the constant of 31 would be substituted in to produce | |
4370 | a such a position. */ | |
4371 | ||
4372 | modewidth = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x)); | |
4373 | if (modewidth >= pos - len) | |
5f4f0e22 | 4374 | tem = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, unsignedp ? LSHIFTRT : ASHIFTRT, |
230d793d | 4375 | GET_MODE (x), |
5f4f0e22 CH |
4376 | simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, |
4377 | GET_MODE (x), | |
230d793d RS |
4378 | XEXP (x, 0), |
4379 | modewidth - pos - len), | |
4380 | modewidth - len); | |
4381 | ||
5f4f0e22 CH |
4382 | else if (unsignedp && len < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
4383 | tem = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, GET_MODE (x), | |
4384 | simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, | |
230d793d RS |
4385 | GET_MODE (x), |
4386 | XEXP (x, 0), pos), | |
5f4f0e22 | 4387 | ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1); |
230d793d RS |
4388 | else |
4389 | /* Any other cases we can't handle. */ | |
4390 | return x; | |
4391 | ||
4392 | ||
4393 | /* If we couldn't do this for some reason, return the original | |
4394 | expression. */ | |
4395 | if (GET_CODE (tem) == CLOBBER) | |
4396 | return x; | |
4397 | ||
4398 | return tem; | |
4399 | } | |
4400 | \f | |
4401 | /* X is a SET which contains an assignment of one object into | |
4402 | a part of another (such as a bit-field assignment, STRICT_LOW_PART, | |
4403 | or certain SUBREGS). If possible, convert it into a series of | |
4404 | logical operations. | |
4405 | ||
4406 | We half-heartedly support variable positions, but do not at all | |
4407 | support variable lengths. */ | |
4408 | ||
4409 | static rtx | |
4410 | expand_field_assignment (x) | |
4411 | rtx x; | |
4412 | { | |
4413 | rtx inner; | |
4414 | rtx pos; /* Always counts from low bit. */ | |
4415 | int len; | |
4416 | rtx mask; | |
4417 | enum machine_mode compute_mode; | |
4418 | ||
4419 | /* Loop until we find something we can't simplify. */ | |
4420 | while (1) | |
4421 | { | |
4422 | if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == STRICT_LOW_PART | |
4423 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)) == SUBREG) | |
4424 | { | |
4425 | inner = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)); | |
4426 | len = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0))); | |
4427 | pos = const0_rtx; | |
4428 | } | |
4429 | else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == ZERO_EXTRACT | |
4430 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1)) == CONST_INT) | |
4431 | { | |
4432 | inner = XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0); | |
4433 | len = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1)); | |
4434 | pos = XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2); | |
4435 | ||
4436 | /* If the position is constant and spans the width of INNER, | |
4437 | surround INNER with a USE to indicate this. */ | |
4438 | if (GET_CODE (pos) == CONST_INT | |
4439 | && INTVAL (pos) + len > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (inner))) | |
4440 | inner = gen_rtx (USE, GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)), inner); | |
4441 | ||
4442 | #if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN | |
4443 | if (GET_CODE (pos) == CONST_INT) | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
4444 | pos = GEN_INT (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (inner)) - len |
4445 | - INTVAL (pos)); | |
230d793d RS |
4446 | else if (GET_CODE (pos) == MINUS |
4447 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (pos, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
4448 | && (INTVAL (XEXP (pos, 1)) | |
4449 | == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (inner)) - len)) | |
4450 | /* If position is ADJUST - X, new position is X. */ | |
4451 | pos = XEXP (pos, 0); | |
4452 | else | |
4453 | pos = gen_binary (MINUS, GET_MODE (pos), | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
4454 | GEN_INT (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (inner)) |
4455 | - len), | |
4456 | pos); | |
230d793d RS |
4457 | #endif |
4458 | } | |
4459 | ||
4460 | /* A SUBREG between two modes that occupy the same numbers of words | |
4461 | can be done by moving the SUBREG to the source. */ | |
4462 | else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG | |
4463 | && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x))) | |
4464 | + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD) | |
4465 | == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x)))) | |
4466 | + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD))) | |
4467 | { | |
4468 | x = gen_rtx (SET, VOIDmode, SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x)), | |
4469 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))), | |
4470 | SET_SRC (x))); | |
4471 | continue; | |
4472 | } | |
4473 | else | |
4474 | break; | |
4475 | ||
4476 | while (GET_CODE (inner) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (inner)) | |
4477 | inner = SUBREG_REG (inner); | |
4478 | ||
4479 | compute_mode = GET_MODE (inner); | |
4480 | ||
4481 | /* Compute a mask of LEN bits, if we can do this on the host machine. */ | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
4482 | if (len < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
4483 | mask = GEN_INT (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1); | |
230d793d RS |
4484 | else |
4485 | break; | |
4486 | ||
4487 | /* Now compute the equivalent expression. Make a copy of INNER | |
4488 | for the SET_DEST in case it is a MEM into which we will substitute; | |
4489 | we don't want shared RTL in that case. */ | |
4490 | x = gen_rtx (SET, VOIDmode, copy_rtx (inner), | |
4491 | gen_binary (IOR, compute_mode, | |
4492 | gen_binary (AND, compute_mode, | |
4493 | gen_unary (NOT, compute_mode, | |
4494 | gen_binary (ASHIFT, | |
4495 | compute_mode, | |
4496 | mask, pos)), | |
4497 | inner), | |
4498 | gen_binary (ASHIFT, compute_mode, | |
4499 | gen_binary (AND, compute_mode, | |
4500 | gen_lowpart_for_combine | |
4501 | (compute_mode, | |
4502 | SET_SRC (x)), | |
4503 | mask), | |
4504 | pos))); | |
4505 | } | |
4506 | ||
4507 | return x; | |
4508 | } | |
4509 | \f | |
4510 | /* Return an RTX for a reference to LEN bits of INNER. POS is the starting | |
4511 | bit position (counted from the LSB) if >= 0; otherwise POS_RTX represents | |
4512 | the starting bit position. | |
4513 | ||
4514 | INNER may be a USE. This will occur when we started with a bitfield | |
4515 | that went outside the boundary of the object in memory, which is | |
4516 | allowed on most machines. To isolate this case, we produce a USE | |
4517 | whose mode is wide enough and surround the MEM with it. The only | |
4518 | code that understands the USE is this routine. If it is not removed, | |
4519 | it will cause the resulting insn not to match. | |
4520 | ||
4521 | UNSIGNEDP is non-zero for an unsigned reference and zero for a | |
4522 | signed reference. | |
4523 | ||
4524 | IN_DEST is non-zero if this is a reference in the destination of a | |
4525 | SET. This is used when a ZERO_ or SIGN_EXTRACT isn't needed. If non-zero, | |
4526 | a STRICT_LOW_PART will be used, if zero, ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND will | |
4527 | be used. | |
4528 | ||
4529 | IN_COMPARE is non-zero if we are in a COMPARE. This means that a | |
4530 | ZERO_EXTRACT should be built even for bits starting at bit 0. | |
4531 | ||
4532 | MODE is the desired mode of the result (if IN_DEST == 0). */ | |
4533 | ||
4534 | static rtx | |
4535 | make_extraction (mode, inner, pos, pos_rtx, len, | |
4536 | unsignedp, in_dest, in_compare) | |
4537 | enum machine_mode mode; | |
4538 | rtx inner; | |
4539 | int pos; | |
4540 | rtx pos_rtx; | |
4541 | int len; | |
4542 | int unsignedp; | |
4543 | int in_dest, in_compare; | |
4544 | { | |
94b4b17a RS |
4545 | /* This mode describes the size of the storage area |
4546 | to fetch the overall value from. Within that, we | |
4547 | ignore the POS lowest bits, etc. */ | |
230d793d RS |
4548 | enum machine_mode is_mode = GET_MODE (inner); |
4549 | enum machine_mode inner_mode; | |
4550 | enum machine_mode wanted_mem_mode = byte_mode; | |
4551 | enum machine_mode pos_mode = word_mode; | |
4552 | enum machine_mode extraction_mode = word_mode; | |
4553 | enum machine_mode tmode = mode_for_size (len, MODE_INT, 1); | |
4554 | int spans_byte = 0; | |
4555 | rtx new = 0; | |
4556 | ||
4557 | /* Get some information about INNER and get the innermost object. */ | |
4558 | if (GET_CODE (inner) == USE) | |
94b4b17a | 4559 | /* (use:SI (mem:QI foo)) stands for (mem:SI foo). */ |
230d793d RS |
4560 | /* We don't need to adjust the position because we set up the USE |
4561 | to pretend that it was a full-word object. */ | |
4562 | spans_byte = 1, inner = XEXP (inner, 0); | |
4563 | else if (GET_CODE (inner) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (inner)) | |
94b4b17a RS |
4564 | { |
4565 | /* If going from (subreg:SI (mem:QI ...)) to (mem:QI ...), | |
4566 | consider just the QI as the memory to extract from. | |
4567 | The subreg adds or removes high bits; its mode is | |
4568 | irrelevant to the meaning of this extraction, | |
4569 | since POS and LEN count from the lsb. */ | |
4570 | if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (inner)) == MEM) | |
4571 | is_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner)); | |
4572 | inner = SUBREG_REG (inner); | |
4573 | } | |
230d793d RS |
4574 | |
4575 | inner_mode = GET_MODE (inner); | |
4576 | ||
4577 | if (pos_rtx && GET_CODE (pos_rtx) == CONST_INT) | |
4578 | pos = INTVAL (pos_rtx); | |
4579 | ||
4580 | /* See if this can be done without an extraction. We never can if the | |
4581 | width of the field is not the same as that of some integer mode. For | |
4582 | registers, we can only avoid the extraction if the position is at the | |
4583 | low-order bit and this is either not in the destination or we have the | |
4584 | appropriate STRICT_LOW_PART operation available. | |
4585 | ||
4586 | For MEM, we can avoid an extract if the field starts on an appropriate | |
4587 | boundary and we can change the mode of the memory reference. However, | |
4588 | we cannot directly access the MEM if we have a USE and the underlying | |
4589 | MEM is not TMODE. This combination means that MEM was being used in a | |
4590 | context where bits outside its mode were being referenced; that is only | |
4591 | valid in bit-field insns. */ | |
4592 | ||
4593 | if (tmode != BLKmode | |
4594 | && ! (spans_byte && inner_mode != tmode) | |
df62f951 | 4595 | && ((pos == 0 && GET_CODE (inner) != MEM |
230d793d | 4596 | && (! in_dest |
df62f951 RK |
4597 | || (GET_CODE (inner) == REG |
4598 | && (movstrict_optab->handlers[(int) tmode].insn_code | |
4599 | != CODE_FOR_nothing)))) | |
230d793d | 4600 | || (GET_CODE (inner) == MEM && pos >= 0 |
dfbe1b2f RK |
4601 | && (pos |
4602 | % (STRICT_ALIGNMENT ? GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode) | |
4603 | : BITS_PER_UNIT)) == 0 | |
230d793d RS |
4604 | /* We can't do this if we are widening INNER_MODE (it |
4605 | may not be aligned, for one thing). */ | |
4606 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (tmode) | |
4607 | && (inner_mode == tmode | |
4608 | || (! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner, 0)) | |
4609 | && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner)))))) | |
4610 | { | |
230d793d RS |
4611 | /* If INNER is a MEM, make a new MEM that encompasses just the desired |
4612 | field. If the original and current mode are the same, we need not | |
4613 | adjust the offset. Otherwise, we do if bytes big endian. | |
4614 | ||
4615 | If INNER is not a MEM, get a piece consisting of the just the field | |
df62f951 | 4616 | of interest (in this case POS must be 0). */ |
230d793d RS |
4617 | |
4618 | if (GET_CODE (inner) == MEM) | |
4619 | { | |
94b4b17a RS |
4620 | int offset; |
4621 | /* POS counts from lsb, but make OFFSET count in memory order. */ | |
4622 | if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN) | |
4623 | offset = (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (is_mode) - len - pos) / BITS_PER_UNIT; | |
4624 | else | |
4625 | offset = pos / BITS_PER_UNIT; | |
230d793d RS |
4626 | |
4627 | new = gen_rtx (MEM, tmode, plus_constant (XEXP (inner, 0), offset)); | |
4628 | RTX_UNCHANGING_P (new) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (inner); | |
4629 | MEM_VOLATILE_P (new) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner); | |
4630 | MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (new) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (inner); | |
4631 | } | |
df62f951 | 4632 | else if (GET_CODE (inner) == REG) |
77fa0940 RK |
4633 | /* We can't call gen_lowpart_for_combine here since we always want |
4634 | a SUBREG and it would sometimes return a new hard register. */ | |
4635 | new = gen_rtx (SUBREG, tmode, inner, | |
4636 | (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN | |
3e3ea975 RS |
4637 | && GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode) > UNITS_PER_WORD |
4638 | ? ((GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode) - GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode)) | |
6ba17bb0 RS |
4639 | / UNITS_PER_WORD) |
4640 | : 0)); | |
230d793d | 4641 | else |
d0ab8cd3 | 4642 | new = force_to_mode (inner, tmode, len, NULL_RTX); |
230d793d RS |
4643 | |
4644 | /* If this extraction is going into the destination of a SET, | |
4645 | make a STRICT_LOW_PART unless we made a MEM. */ | |
4646 | ||
4647 | if (in_dest) | |
4648 | return (GET_CODE (new) == MEM ? new | |
77fa0940 RK |
4649 | : (GET_CODE (new) != SUBREG |
4650 | ? gen_rtx (CLOBBER, tmode, const0_rtx) | |
4651 | : gen_rtx_combine (STRICT_LOW_PART, VOIDmode, new))); | |
230d793d RS |
4652 | |
4653 | /* Otherwise, sign- or zero-extend unless we already are in the | |
4654 | proper mode. */ | |
4655 | ||
4656 | return (mode == tmode ? new | |
4657 | : gen_rtx_combine (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND, | |
4658 | mode, new)); | |
4659 | } | |
4660 | ||
cc471082 RS |
4661 | /* Unless this is a COMPARE or we have a funny memory reference, |
4662 | don't do anything with zero-extending field extracts starting at | |
4663 | the low-order bit since they are simple AND operations. */ | |
4664 | if (pos == 0 && ! in_dest && ! in_compare && ! spans_byte && unsignedp) | |
230d793d RS |
4665 | return 0; |
4666 | ||
4667 | /* Get the mode to use should INNER be a MEM, the mode for the position, | |
4668 | and the mode for the result. */ | |
4669 | #ifdef HAVE_insv | |
4670 | if (in_dest) | |
4671 | { | |
4672 | wanted_mem_mode = insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_insv][0]; | |
4673 | pos_mode = insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_insv][2]; | |
4674 | extraction_mode = insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_insv][3]; | |
4675 | } | |
4676 | #endif | |
4677 | ||
4678 | #ifdef HAVE_extzv | |
4679 | if (! in_dest && unsignedp) | |
4680 | { | |
4681 | wanted_mem_mode = insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_extzv][1]; | |
4682 | pos_mode = insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_extzv][3]; | |
4683 | extraction_mode = insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_extzv][0]; | |
4684 | } | |
4685 | #endif | |
4686 | ||
4687 | #ifdef HAVE_extv | |
4688 | if (! in_dest && ! unsignedp) | |
4689 | { | |
4690 | wanted_mem_mode = insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_extv][1]; | |
4691 | pos_mode = insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_extv][3]; | |
4692 | extraction_mode = insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_extv][0]; | |
4693 | } | |
4694 | #endif | |
4695 | ||
4696 | /* Never narrow an object, since that might not be safe. */ | |
4697 | ||
4698 | if (mode != VOIDmode | |
4699 | && GET_MODE_SIZE (extraction_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)) | |
4700 | extraction_mode = mode; | |
4701 | ||
4702 | if (pos_rtx && GET_MODE (pos_rtx) != VOIDmode | |
4703 | && GET_MODE_SIZE (pos_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (pos_rtx))) | |
4704 | pos_mode = GET_MODE (pos_rtx); | |
4705 | ||
4706 | /* If this is not from memory or we have to change the mode of memory and | |
4707 | cannot, the desired mode is EXTRACTION_MODE. */ | |
4708 | if (GET_CODE (inner) != MEM | |
4709 | || (inner_mode != wanted_mem_mode | |
4710 | && (mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner, 0)) | |
4711 | || MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner)))) | |
4712 | wanted_mem_mode = extraction_mode; | |
4713 | ||
4714 | #if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN | |
4715 | /* If position is constant, compute new position. Otherwise, build | |
4716 | subtraction. */ | |
4717 | if (pos >= 0) | |
4718 | pos = (MAX (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (is_mode), GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_mem_mode)) | |
4719 | - len - pos); | |
4720 | else | |
4721 | pos_rtx | |
4722 | = gen_rtx_combine (MINUS, GET_MODE (pos_rtx), | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
4723 | GEN_INT (MAX (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (is_mode), |
4724 | GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_mem_mode)) | |
4725 | - len), | |
4726 | pos_rtx); | |
230d793d RS |
4727 | #endif |
4728 | ||
4729 | /* If INNER has a wider mode, make it smaller. If this is a constant | |
4730 | extract, try to adjust the byte to point to the byte containing | |
4731 | the value. */ | |
4732 | if (wanted_mem_mode != VOIDmode | |
4733 | && GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_mem_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode) | |
4734 | && ((GET_CODE (inner) == MEM | |
4735 | && (inner_mode == wanted_mem_mode | |
4736 | || (! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner, 0)) | |
4737 | && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner)))))) | |
4738 | { | |
4739 | int offset = 0; | |
4740 | ||
4741 | /* The computations below will be correct if the machine is big | |
4742 | endian in both bits and bytes or little endian in bits and bytes. | |
4743 | If it is mixed, we must adjust. */ | |
4744 | ||
4745 | #if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN != BITS_BIG_ENDIAN | |
4746 | if (! spans_byte && is_mode != wanted_mem_mode) | |
4747 | offset = (GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode) | |
4748 | - GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_mem_mode) - offset); | |
4749 | #endif | |
4750 | ||
4751 | /* If bytes are big endian and we had a paradoxical SUBREG, we must | |
4752 | adjust OFFSET to compensate. */ | |
4753 | #if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN | |
4754 | if (! spans_byte | |
4755 | && GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode)) | |
4756 | offset -= GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode) - GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode); | |
4757 | #endif | |
4758 | ||
4759 | /* If this is a constant position, we can move to the desired byte. */ | |
4760 | if (pos >= 0) | |
4761 | { | |
4762 | offset += pos / BITS_PER_UNIT; | |
4763 | pos %= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_mem_mode); | |
4764 | } | |
4765 | ||
4766 | if (offset != 0 || inner_mode != wanted_mem_mode) | |
4767 | { | |
4768 | rtx newmem = gen_rtx (MEM, wanted_mem_mode, | |
4769 | plus_constant (XEXP (inner, 0), offset)); | |
4770 | RTX_UNCHANGING_P (newmem) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (inner); | |
4771 | MEM_VOLATILE_P (newmem) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner); | |
4772 | MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (newmem) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (inner); | |
4773 | inner = newmem; | |
4774 | } | |
4775 | } | |
4776 | ||
4777 | /* If INNER is not memory, we can always get it into the proper mode. */ | |
4778 | else if (GET_CODE (inner) != MEM) | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
4779 | inner = force_to_mode (inner, extraction_mode, |
4780 | (pos < 0 ? GET_MODE_BITSIZE (extraction_mode) | |
4781 | : len + pos), | |
4782 | NULL_RTX); | |
230d793d RS |
4783 | |
4784 | /* Adjust mode of POS_RTX, if needed. If we want a wider mode, we | |
4785 | have to zero extend. Otherwise, we can just use a SUBREG. */ | |
4786 | if (pos < 0 | |
4787 | && GET_MODE_SIZE (pos_mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (pos_rtx))) | |
4788 | pos_rtx = gen_rtx_combine (ZERO_EXTEND, pos_mode, pos_rtx); | |
4789 | else if (pos < 0 | |
4790 | && GET_MODE_SIZE (pos_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (pos_rtx))) | |
4791 | pos_rtx = gen_lowpart_for_combine (pos_mode, pos_rtx); | |
4792 | ||
4793 | /* Make POS_RTX unless we already have it and it is correct. */ | |
4794 | if (pos_rtx == 0 || (pos >= 0 && INTVAL (pos_rtx) != pos)) | |
5f4f0e22 | 4795 | pos_rtx = GEN_INT (pos); |
230d793d RS |
4796 | |
4797 | /* Make the required operation. See if we can use existing rtx. */ | |
4798 | new = gen_rtx_combine (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTRACT : SIGN_EXTRACT, | |
5f4f0e22 | 4799 | extraction_mode, inner, GEN_INT (len), pos_rtx); |
230d793d RS |
4800 | if (! in_dest) |
4801 | new = gen_lowpart_for_combine (mode, new); | |
4802 | ||
4803 | return new; | |
4804 | } | |
4805 | \f | |
4806 | /* Look at the expression rooted at X. Look for expressions | |
4807 | equivalent to ZERO_EXTRACT, SIGN_EXTRACT, ZERO_EXTEND, SIGN_EXTEND. | |
4808 | Form these expressions. | |
4809 | ||
4810 | Return the new rtx, usually just X. | |
4811 | ||
4812 | Also, for machines like the Vax that don't have logical shift insns, | |
4813 | try to convert logical to arithmetic shift operations in cases where | |
4814 | they are equivalent. This undoes the canonicalizations to logical | |
4815 | shifts done elsewhere. | |
4816 | ||
4817 | We try, as much as possible, to re-use rtl expressions to save memory. | |
4818 | ||
4819 | IN_CODE says what kind of expression we are processing. Normally, it is | |
42495ca0 RK |
4820 | SET. In a memory address (inside a MEM, PLUS or minus, the latter two |
4821 | being kludges), it is MEM. When processing the arguments of a comparison | |
230d793d RS |
4822 | or a COMPARE against zero, it is COMPARE. */ |
4823 | ||
4824 | static rtx | |
4825 | make_compound_operation (x, in_code) | |
4826 | rtx x; | |
4827 | enum rtx_code in_code; | |
4828 | { | |
4829 | enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x); | |
4830 | enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x); | |
4831 | int mode_width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode); | |
4832 | enum rtx_code next_code; | |
d0ab8cd3 | 4833 | int i, count; |
230d793d RS |
4834 | rtx new = 0; |
4835 | char *fmt; | |
4836 | ||
4837 | /* Select the code to be used in recursive calls. Once we are inside an | |
4838 | address, we stay there. If we have a comparison, set to COMPARE, | |
4839 | but once inside, go back to our default of SET. */ | |
4840 | ||
42495ca0 | 4841 | next_code = (code == MEM || code == PLUS || code == MINUS ? MEM |
230d793d RS |
4842 | : ((code == COMPARE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<') |
4843 | && XEXP (x, 1) == const0_rtx) ? COMPARE | |
4844 | : in_code == COMPARE ? SET : in_code); | |
4845 | ||
4846 | /* Process depending on the code of this operation. If NEW is set | |
4847 | non-zero, it will be returned. */ | |
4848 | ||
4849 | switch (code) | |
4850 | { | |
4851 | case ASHIFT: | |
4852 | case LSHIFT: | |
4853 | /* Convert shifts by constants into multiplications if inside | |
4854 | an address. */ | |
4855 | if (in_code == MEM && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5f4f0e22 | 4856 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d RS |
4857 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0) |
4858 | new = gen_rtx_combine (MULT, mode, XEXP (x, 0), | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
4859 | GEN_INT ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 |
4860 | << INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))); | |
230d793d RS |
4861 | break; |
4862 | ||
4863 | case AND: | |
4864 | /* If the second operand is not a constant, we can't do anything | |
4865 | with it. */ | |
4866 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) != CONST_INT) | |
4867 | break; | |
4868 | ||
4869 | /* If the constant is a power of two minus one and the first operand | |
4870 | is a logical right shift, make an extraction. */ | |
4871 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT | |
4872 | && (i = exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0) | |
4873 | new = make_extraction (mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), -1, | |
4874 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), i, 1, | |
4875 | 0, in_code == COMPARE); | |
dfbe1b2f | 4876 | |
230d793d RS |
4877 | /* Same as previous, but for (subreg (lshiftrt ...)) in first op. */ |
4878 | else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG | |
4879 | && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x, 0)) | |
4880 | && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))) == LSHIFTRT | |
4881 | && (i = exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0) | |
4882 | new = make_extraction (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))), | |
4883 | XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)), 0), -1, | |
4884 | XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)), 1), i, 1, | |
4885 | 0, in_code == COMPARE); | |
230d793d | 4886 | |
a7c99304 RK |
4887 | |
4888 | /* If we are have (and (rotate X C) M) and C is larger than the number | |
4889 | of bits in M, this is an extraction. */ | |
4890 | ||
4891 | else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATE | |
4892 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
4893 | && (i = exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0 | |
4894 | && i <= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))) | |
4895 | new = make_extraction (mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), | |
4896 | (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) | |
4897 | - INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))), | |
5f4f0e22 | 4898 | NULL_RTX, i, 1, 0, in_code == COMPARE); |
a7c99304 RK |
4899 | |
4900 | /* On machines without logical shifts, if the operand of the AND is | |
230d793d RS |
4901 | a logical shift and our mask turns off all the propagated sign |
4902 | bits, we can replace the logical shift with an arithmetic shift. */ | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
4903 | else if (ashr_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing |
4904 | && (lshr_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code | |
4905 | == CODE_FOR_nothing) | |
230d793d RS |
4906 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT |
4907 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
4908 | && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) >= 0 | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
4909 | && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
4910 | && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) | |
230d793d | 4911 | { |
5f4f0e22 | 4912 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode); |
230d793d RS |
4913 | |
4914 | mask >>= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)); | |
4915 | if ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & ~mask) == 0) | |
4916 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), | |
4917 | gen_rtx_combine (ASHIFTRT, mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), | |
4918 | XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))); | |
4919 | } | |
4920 | ||
4921 | /* If the constant is one less than a power of two, this might be | |
4922 | representable by an extraction even if no shift is present. | |
4923 | If it doesn't end up being a ZERO_EXTEND, we will ignore it unless | |
4924 | we are in a COMPARE. */ | |
4925 | else if ((i = exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0) | |
5f4f0e22 | 4926 | new = make_extraction (mode, XEXP (x, 0), 0, NULL_RTX, i, 1, |
230d793d RS |
4927 | 0, in_code == COMPARE); |
4928 | ||
4929 | /* If we are in a comparison and this is an AND with a power of two, | |
4930 | convert this into the appropriate bit extract. */ | |
4931 | else if (in_code == COMPARE | |
4932 | && (i = exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))) >= 0) | |
5f4f0e22 | 4933 | new = make_extraction (mode, XEXP (x, 0), i, NULL_RTX, 1, 1, 0, 1); |
230d793d RS |
4934 | |
4935 | break; | |
4936 | ||
4937 | case LSHIFTRT: | |
4938 | /* If the sign bit is known to be zero, replace this with an | |
4939 | arithmetic shift. */ | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
4940 | if (ashr_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code == CODE_FOR_nothing |
4941 | && lshr_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing | |
5f4f0e22 | 4942 | && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d RS |
4943 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) |
4944 | & (1 << (mode_width - 1))) == 0) | |
4945 | { | |
4946 | new = gen_rtx_combine (ASHIFTRT, mode, XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1)); | |
4947 | break; | |
4948 | } | |
4949 | ||
4950 | /* ... fall through ... */ | |
4951 | ||
4952 | case ASHIFTRT: | |
4953 | /* If we have (ashiftrt (ashift foo C1) C2) with C2 >= C1, | |
4954 | this is a SIGN_EXTRACT. */ | |
4955 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
4956 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT | |
4957 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
4958 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))) | |
4959 | new = make_extraction (mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), | |
4960 | (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) | |
4961 | - INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))), | |
5f4f0e22 | 4962 | NULL_RTX, mode_width - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)), |
230d793d | 4963 | code == LSHIFTRT, 0, in_code == COMPARE); |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
4964 | |
4965 | /* Similarly if we have (ashifrt (OP (ashift foo C1) C3) C2). In these | |
4966 | cases, we are better off returning a SIGN_EXTEND of the operation. */ | |
4967 | ||
4968 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
4969 | && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == IOR || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == AND | |
4970 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR | |
4971 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS) | |
4972 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == ASHIFT | |
4973 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
4974 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1)) | |
4975 | && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT | |
4976 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
4977 | && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) | |
4978 | & (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 | |
4979 | << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1))) - 1)) == 0) | |
4980 | { | |
4981 | HOST_WIDE_INT newop1 | |
4982 | = (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) | |
4983 | >> INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1))); | |
4984 | ||
4985 | new = make_extraction (mode, | |
4986 | gen_binary (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)), mode, | |
4987 | XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0), | |
4988 | GEN_INT (newop1)), | |
4989 | (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) | |
4990 | - INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1))), | |
4991 | NULL_RTX, mode_width - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)), | |
4992 | code == LSHIFTRT, 0, in_code == COMPARE); | |
4993 | } | |
4994 | ||
d0dcc580 RK |
4995 | /* Similarly for (ashiftrt (neg (ashift FOO C1)) C2). */ |
4996 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
4997 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NEG | |
4998 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == ASHIFT | |
4999 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5000 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1))) | |
5001 | new = make_extraction (mode, | |
5002 | gen_unary (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)), mode, | |
5003 | XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0)), | |
5004 | (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) | |
5005 | - INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1))), | |
5006 | NULL_RTX, mode_width - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)), | |
5007 | code == LSHIFTRT, 0, in_code == COMPARE); | |
230d793d RS |
5008 | break; |
5009 | } | |
5010 | ||
5011 | if (new) | |
5012 | { | |
df62f951 | 5013 | x = gen_lowpart_for_combine (mode, new); |
230d793d RS |
5014 | code = GET_CODE (x); |
5015 | } | |
5016 | ||
5017 | /* Now recursively process each operand of this operation. */ | |
5018 | fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code); | |
5019 | for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++) | |
5020 | if (fmt[i] == 'e') | |
5021 | { | |
5022 | new = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, i), next_code); | |
5023 | SUBST (XEXP (x, i), new); | |
5024 | } | |
5025 | ||
5026 | return x; | |
5027 | } | |
5028 | \f | |
5029 | /* Given M see if it is a value that would select a field of bits | |
5030 | within an item, but not the entire word. Return -1 if not. | |
5031 | Otherwise, return the starting position of the field, where 0 is the | |
5032 | low-order bit. | |
5033 | ||
5034 | *PLEN is set to the length of the field. */ | |
5035 | ||
5036 | static int | |
5037 | get_pos_from_mask (m, plen) | |
5f4f0e22 | 5038 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT m; |
230d793d RS |
5039 | int *plen; |
5040 | { | |
5041 | /* Get the bit number of the first 1 bit from the right, -1 if none. */ | |
5042 | int pos = exact_log2 (m & - m); | |
5043 | ||
5044 | if (pos < 0) | |
5045 | return -1; | |
5046 | ||
5047 | /* Now shift off the low-order zero bits and see if we have a power of | |
5048 | two minus 1. */ | |
5049 | *plen = exact_log2 ((m >> pos) + 1); | |
5050 | ||
5051 | if (*plen <= 0) | |
5052 | return -1; | |
5053 | ||
5054 | return pos; | |
5055 | } | |
5056 | \f | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5057 | /* Rewrite X so that it is an expression in MODE. We only care about the |
5058 | low-order BITS bits so we can ignore AND operations that just clear | |
5059 | higher-order bits. | |
5060 | ||
5061 | Also, if REG is non-zero and X is a register equal in value to REG, | |
5062 | replace X with REG. */ | |
5063 | ||
5064 | static rtx | |
5065 | force_to_mode (x, mode, bits, reg) | |
5066 | rtx x; | |
5067 | enum machine_mode mode; | |
5068 | int bits; | |
5069 | rtx reg; | |
5070 | { | |
5071 | enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x); | |
d0ab8cd3 | 5072 | enum machine_mode op_mode = mode; |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5073 | |
5074 | /* If X is narrower than MODE or if BITS is larger than the size of MODE, | |
5075 | just get X in the proper mode. */ | |
5076 | ||
5077 | if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) < GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) | |
5078 | || bits > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)) | |
5079 | return gen_lowpart_for_combine (mode, x); | |
5080 | ||
5081 | switch (code) | |
5082 | { | |
5083 | case SIGN_EXTEND: | |
5084 | case ZERO_EXTEND: | |
5085 | case ZERO_EXTRACT: | |
5086 | case SIGN_EXTRACT: | |
5087 | x = expand_compound_operation (x); | |
5088 | if (GET_CODE (x) != code) | |
5089 | return force_to_mode (x, mode, bits, reg); | |
5090 | break; | |
5091 | ||
5092 | case REG: | |
5093 | if (reg != 0 && (rtx_equal_p (get_last_value (reg), x) | |
5094 | || rtx_equal_p (reg, get_last_value (x)))) | |
5095 | x = reg; | |
5096 | break; | |
5097 | ||
5098 | case CONST_INT: | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
5099 | if (bits < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
5100 | x = GEN_INT (INTVAL (x) & (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bits) - 1)); | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5101 | return x; |
5102 | ||
5103 | case SUBREG: | |
5104 | /* Ignore low-order SUBREGs. */ | |
5105 | if (subreg_lowpart_p (x)) | |
5106 | return force_to_mode (SUBREG_REG (x), mode, bits, reg); | |
5107 | break; | |
5108 | ||
5109 | case AND: | |
5110 | /* If this is an AND with a constant. Otherwise, we fall through to | |
5111 | do the general binary case. */ | |
5112 | ||
5113 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT) | |
5114 | { | |
5f4f0e22 | 5115 | HOST_WIDE_INT mask = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)); |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5116 | int len = exact_log2 (mask + 1); |
5117 | rtx op = XEXP (x, 0); | |
5118 | ||
5119 | /* If this is masking some low-order bits, we may be able to | |
5120 | impose a stricter constraint on what bits of the operand are | |
5121 | required. */ | |
5122 | ||
5123 | op = force_to_mode (op, mode, len > 0 ? MIN (len, bits) : bits, | |
5124 | reg); | |
5125 | ||
5f4f0e22 CH |
5126 | if (bits < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
5127 | mask &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bits) - 1; | |
dfbe1b2f | 5128 | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
5129 | /* If we have no AND in MODE, use the original mode for the |
5130 | operation. */ | |
5131 | ||
5132 | if (and_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code == CODE_FOR_nothing) | |
5133 | op_mode = GET_MODE (x); | |
5134 | ||
5135 | x = simplify_and_const_int (x, op_mode, op, mask); | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5136 | |
5137 | /* If X is still an AND, see if it is an AND with a mask that | |
5138 | is just some low-order bits. If so, and it is BITS wide (it | |
5139 | can't be wider), we don't need it. */ | |
5140 | ||
5141 | if (GET_CODE (x) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
5142 | && bits < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
5143 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) == ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bits) - 1) | |
dfbe1b2f | 5144 | x = XEXP (x, 0); |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
5145 | |
5146 | break; | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5147 | } |
5148 | ||
5149 | /* ... fall through ... */ | |
5150 | ||
5151 | case PLUS: | |
5152 | case MINUS: | |
5153 | case MULT: | |
5154 | case IOR: | |
5155 | case XOR: | |
5156 | /* For most binary operations, just propagate into the operation and | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
5157 | change the mode if we have an operation of that mode. */ |
5158 | ||
5159 | if ((code == PLUS | |
5160 | && add_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code == CODE_FOR_nothing) | |
5161 | || (code == MINUS | |
5162 | && sub_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code == CODE_FOR_nothing) | |
5163 | || (code == MULT && (smul_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code | |
5164 | == CODE_FOR_nothing)) | |
53e33d95 RK |
5165 | || (code == AND |
5166 | && and_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code == CODE_FOR_nothing) | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
5167 | || (code == IOR |
5168 | && ior_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code == CODE_FOR_nothing) | |
5169 | || (code == XOR && (xor_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code | |
5170 | == CODE_FOR_nothing))) | |
5171 | op_mode = GET_MODE (x); | |
5172 | ||
5173 | x = gen_binary (code, op_mode, | |
5174 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (op_mode, | |
5175 | force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), | |
5176 | mode, bits, | |
5177 | reg)), | |
5178 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (op_mode, | |
5179 | force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 1), | |
5180 | mode, bits, | |
5181 | reg))); | |
5182 | break; | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5183 | |
5184 | case ASHIFT: | |
5185 | case LSHIFT: | |
5186 | /* For left shifts, do the same, but just for the first operand. | |
5187 | If the shift count is a constant, we need even fewer bits of the | |
5188 | first operand. */ | |
5189 | ||
5190 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < bits) | |
5191 | bits -= INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)); | |
5192 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
5193 | if ((code == ASHIFT |
5194 | && ashl_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code == CODE_FOR_nothing) | |
5195 | || (code == LSHIFT && (lshl_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code | |
5196 | == CODE_FOR_nothing))) | |
5197 | op_mode = GET_MODE (x); | |
5198 | ||
5199 | x = gen_binary (code, op_mode, | |
5200 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (op_mode, | |
5201 | force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), | |
5202 | mode, bits, | |
5203 | reg)), | |
5204 | XEXP (x, 1)); | |
5205 | break; | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5206 | |
5207 | case LSHIFTRT: | |
5208 | /* Here we can only do something if the shift count is a constant and | |
5209 | the count plus BITS is no larger than the width of MODE, we can do | |
5210 | the shift in MODE. */ | |
5211 | ||
5212 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5213 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + bits <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)) | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
5214 | { |
5215 | rtx inner = force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, | |
5216 | bits + INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)), reg); | |
5217 | ||
5218 | if (lshr_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code == CODE_FOR_nothing) | |
5219 | op_mode = GET_MODE (x); | |
5220 | ||
5221 | x = gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, op_mode, | |
5222 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (op_mode, inner), | |
5223 | XEXP (x, 1)); | |
5224 | } | |
5225 | break; | |
5226 | ||
5227 | case ASHIFTRT: | |
5228 | /* If this is a sign-extension operation that just affects bits | |
5229 | we don't care about, remove it. */ | |
5230 | ||
5231 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5232 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0 | |
5233 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x)) - bits | |
5234 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT | |
5235 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5236 | && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) | |
5237 | return force_to_mode (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), mode, bits, reg); | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5238 | break; |
5239 | ||
5240 | case NEG: | |
5241 | case NOT: | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
5242 | if ((code == NEG |
5243 | && neg_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code == CODE_FOR_nothing) | |
5244 | || (code == NOT && (one_cmpl_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code | |
5245 | == CODE_FOR_nothing))) | |
5246 | op_mode = GET_MODE (x); | |
5247 | ||
dfbe1b2f | 5248 | /* Handle these similarly to the way we handle most binary operations. */ |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
5249 | x = gen_unary (code, op_mode, |
5250 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (op_mode, | |
5251 | force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, | |
5252 | bits, reg))); | |
5253 | break; | |
5254 | ||
5255 | case IF_THEN_ELSE: | |
5256 | /* We have no way of knowing if the IF_THEN_ELSE can itself be | |
5257 | written in a narrower mode. We play it safe and do not do so. */ | |
5258 | ||
5259 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), | |
5260 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (GET_MODE (x), | |
5261 | force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 1), mode, | |
5262 | bits, reg))); | |
5263 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 2), | |
5264 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (GET_MODE (x), | |
5265 | force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 2), mode, | |
5266 | bits, reg))); | |
5267 | break; | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5268 | } |
5269 | ||
d0ab8cd3 | 5270 | /* Ensure we return a value of the proper mode. */ |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5271 | return gen_lowpart_for_combine (mode, x); |
5272 | } | |
5273 | \f | |
1a26b032 RK |
5274 | /* Return the value of expression X given the fact that condition COND |
5275 | is known to be true when applied to REG as its first operand and VAL | |
5276 | as its second. X is known to not be shared and so can be modified in | |
5277 | place. | |
5278 | ||
5279 | We only handle the simplest cases, and specifically those cases that | |
5280 | arise with IF_THEN_ELSE expressions. */ | |
5281 | ||
5282 | static rtx | |
5283 | known_cond (x, cond, reg, val) | |
5284 | rtx x; | |
5285 | enum rtx_code cond; | |
5286 | rtx reg, val; | |
5287 | { | |
5288 | enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x); | |
5289 | rtx new, temp; | |
5290 | char *fmt; | |
5291 | int i, j; | |
5292 | ||
5293 | if (side_effects_p (x)) | |
5294 | return x; | |
5295 | ||
5296 | if (cond == EQ && rtx_equal_p (x, reg)) | |
5297 | return val; | |
5298 | ||
5299 | /* If X is (abs REG) and we know something about REG's relationship | |
5300 | with zero, we may be able to simplify this. */ | |
5301 | ||
5302 | if (code == ABS && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), reg) && val == const0_rtx) | |
5303 | switch (cond) | |
5304 | { | |
5305 | case GE: case GT: case EQ: | |
5306 | return XEXP (x, 0); | |
5307 | case LT: case LE: | |
5308 | return gen_unary (NEG, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)), XEXP (x, 0)); | |
5309 | } | |
5310 | ||
5311 | /* The only other cases we handle are MIN, MAX, and comparisons if the | |
5312 | operands are the same as REG and VAL. */ | |
5313 | ||
5314 | else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<' || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c') | |
5315 | { | |
5316 | if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), val)) | |
5317 | cond = swap_condition (cond), temp = val, val = reg, reg = temp; | |
5318 | ||
5319 | if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), reg) && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 1), val)) | |
5320 | { | |
5321 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<') | |
5322 | return (comparison_dominates_p (cond, code) ? const_true_rtx | |
5323 | : (comparison_dominates_p (cond, | |
5324 | reverse_condition (code)) | |
5325 | ? const0_rtx : x)); | |
5326 | ||
5327 | else if (code == SMAX || code == SMIN | |
5328 | || code == UMIN || code == UMAX) | |
5329 | { | |
5330 | int unsignedp = (code == UMIN || code == UMAX); | |
5331 | ||
5332 | if (code == SMAX || code == UMAX) | |
5333 | cond = reverse_condition (cond); | |
5334 | ||
5335 | switch (cond) | |
5336 | { | |
5337 | case GE: case GT: | |
5338 | return unsignedp ? x : XEXP (x, 1); | |
5339 | case LE: case LT: | |
5340 | return unsignedp ? x : XEXP (x, 0); | |
5341 | case GEU: case GTU: | |
5342 | return unsignedp ? XEXP (x, 1) : x; | |
5343 | case LEU: case LTU: | |
5344 | return unsignedp ? XEXP (x, 0) : x; | |
5345 | } | |
5346 | } | |
5347 | } | |
5348 | } | |
5349 | ||
5350 | fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code); | |
5351 | for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--) | |
5352 | { | |
5353 | if (fmt[i] == 'e') | |
5354 | SUBST (XEXP (x, i), known_cond (XEXP (x, i), cond, reg, val)); | |
5355 | else if (fmt[i] == 'E') | |
5356 | for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--) | |
5357 | SUBST (XVECEXP (x, i, j), known_cond (XVECEXP (x, i, j), | |
5358 | cond, reg, val)); | |
5359 | } | |
5360 | ||
5361 | return x; | |
5362 | } | |
5363 | \f | |
230d793d RS |
5364 | /* See if X, a SET operation, can be rewritten as a bit-field assignment. |
5365 | Return that assignment if so. | |
5366 | ||
5367 | We only handle the most common cases. */ | |
5368 | ||
5369 | static rtx | |
5370 | make_field_assignment (x) | |
5371 | rtx x; | |
5372 | { | |
5373 | rtx dest = SET_DEST (x); | |
5374 | rtx src = SET_SRC (x); | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5375 | rtx ourdest; |
5376 | rtx assign; | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
5377 | HOST_WIDE_INT c1; |
5378 | int pos, len; | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5379 | rtx other; |
5380 | enum machine_mode mode; | |
230d793d RS |
5381 | |
5382 | /* If SRC was (and (not (ashift (const_int 1) POS)) DEST), this is | |
5383 | a clear of a one-bit field. We will have changed it to | |
5384 | (and (rotate (const_int -2) POS) DEST), so check for that. Also check | |
5385 | for a SUBREG. */ | |
5386 | ||
5387 | if (GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == ROTATE | |
5388 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0)) == CONST_INT | |
5389 | && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0)) == -2 | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5390 | && (rtx_equal_p (dest, XEXP (src, 1)) |
5391 | || rtx_equal_p (dest, get_last_value (XEXP (src, 1))) | |
5392 | || rtx_equal_p (get_last_value (dest), XEXP (src, 1)))) | |
230d793d RS |
5393 | { |
5394 | assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, -1, XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1), | |
5395 | 1, 1, 1, 0); | |
dfbe1b2f | 5396 | return gen_rtx (SET, VOIDmode, assign, const0_rtx); |
230d793d RS |
5397 | } |
5398 | ||
5399 | else if (GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == SUBREG | |
5400 | && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (src, 0)) | |
5401 | && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src, 0))) | |
5402 | < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0))))) | |
5403 | && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0))) == ROTATE | |
5404 | && INTVAL (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)), 0)) == -2 | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5405 | && (rtx_equal_p (dest, XEXP (src, 1)) |
5406 | || rtx_equal_p (dest, get_last_value (XEXP (src, 1))) | |
5407 | || rtx_equal_p (get_last_value (dest), XEXP (src, 1)))) | |
230d793d RS |
5408 | { |
5409 | assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, -1, | |
5410 | XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)), 1), | |
5411 | 1, 1, 1, 0); | |
dfbe1b2f | 5412 | return gen_rtx (SET, VOIDmode, assign, const0_rtx); |
230d793d RS |
5413 | } |
5414 | ||
5415 | /* If SRC is (ior (ashift (const_int 1) POS DEST)), this is a set of a | |
5416 | one-bit field. */ | |
5417 | else if (GET_CODE (src) == IOR && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == ASHIFT | |
5418 | && XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0) == const1_rtx | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5419 | && (rtx_equal_p (dest, XEXP (src, 1)) |
5420 | || rtx_equal_p (dest, get_last_value (XEXP (src, 1))) | |
5421 | || rtx_equal_p (get_last_value (dest), XEXP (src, 1)))) | |
230d793d RS |
5422 | { |
5423 | assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, -1, XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1), | |
5424 | 1, 1, 1, 0); | |
dfbe1b2f | 5425 | return gen_rtx (SET, VOIDmode, assign, const1_rtx); |
230d793d RS |
5426 | } |
5427 | ||
dfbe1b2f RK |
5428 | /* The other case we handle is assignments into a constant-position |
5429 | field. They look like (ior (and DEST C1) OTHER). If C1 represents | |
5430 | a mask that has all one bits except for a group of zero bits and | |
5431 | OTHER is known to have zeros where C1 has ones, this is such an | |
5432 | assignment. Compute the position and length from C1. Shift OTHER | |
5433 | to the appropriate position, force it to the required mode, and | |
5434 | make the extraction. Check for the AND in both operands. */ | |
5435 | ||
5436 | if (GET_CODE (src) == IOR && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == AND | |
5437 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5438 | && (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0), dest) | |
5439 | || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0), get_last_value (dest)) | |
5440 | || rtx_equal_p (get_last_value (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1)), dest))) | |
5441 | c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1)), other = XEXP (src, 1); | |
5442 | else if (GET_CODE (src) == IOR && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 1)) == AND | |
5443 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (src, 1), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5444 | && (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (src, 1), 0), dest) | |
5445 | || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (src, 1), 0), get_last_value (dest)) | |
5446 | || rtx_equal_p (get_last_value (XEXP (XEXP (src, 1), 0)), | |
5447 | dest))) | |
5448 | c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (src, 1), 1)), other = XEXP (src, 0); | |
5449 | else | |
5450 | return x; | |
230d793d | 5451 | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5452 | pos = get_pos_from_mask (~c1, &len); |
5453 | if (pos < 0 || pos + len > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) | |
ac49a949 RS |
5454 | || (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (other)) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
5455 | && (c1 & significant_bits (other, GET_MODE (other))) != 0)) | |
dfbe1b2f | 5456 | return x; |
230d793d | 5457 | |
5f4f0e22 | 5458 | assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, pos, NULL_RTX, len, 1, 1, 0); |
230d793d | 5459 | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5460 | /* The mode to use for the source is the mode of the assignment, or of |
5461 | what is inside a possible STRICT_LOW_PART. */ | |
5462 | mode = (GET_CODE (assign) == STRICT_LOW_PART | |
5463 | ? GET_MODE (XEXP (assign, 0)) : GET_MODE (assign)); | |
230d793d | 5464 | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5465 | /* Shift OTHER right POS places and make it the source, restricting it |
5466 | to the proper length and mode. */ | |
230d793d | 5467 | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
5468 | src = force_to_mode (simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, |
5469 | GET_MODE (src), other, pos), | |
dfbe1b2f | 5470 | mode, len, dest); |
230d793d | 5471 | |
dfbe1b2f | 5472 | return gen_rtx_combine (SET, VOIDmode, assign, src); |
230d793d RS |
5473 | } |
5474 | \f | |
5475 | /* See if X is of the form (+ (* a c) (* b c)) and convert to (* (+ a b) c) | |
5476 | if so. */ | |
5477 | ||
5478 | static rtx | |
5479 | apply_distributive_law (x) | |
5480 | rtx x; | |
5481 | { | |
5482 | enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x); | |
5483 | rtx lhs, rhs, other; | |
5484 | rtx tem; | |
5485 | enum rtx_code inner_code; | |
5486 | ||
5487 | /* The outer operation can only be one of the following: */ | |
5488 | if (code != IOR && code != AND && code != XOR | |
5489 | && code != PLUS && code != MINUS) | |
5490 | return x; | |
5491 | ||
5492 | lhs = XEXP (x, 0), rhs = XEXP (x, 1); | |
5493 | ||
dfbe1b2f | 5494 | /* If either operand is a primitive we can't do anything, so get out fast. */ |
230d793d | 5495 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (lhs)) == 'o' |
dfbe1b2f | 5496 | || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (rhs)) == 'o') |
230d793d RS |
5497 | return x; |
5498 | ||
5499 | lhs = expand_compound_operation (lhs); | |
5500 | rhs = expand_compound_operation (rhs); | |
5501 | inner_code = GET_CODE (lhs); | |
5502 | if (inner_code != GET_CODE (rhs)) | |
5503 | return x; | |
5504 | ||
5505 | /* See if the inner and outer operations distribute. */ | |
5506 | switch (inner_code) | |
5507 | { | |
5508 | case LSHIFTRT: | |
5509 | case ASHIFTRT: | |
5510 | case AND: | |
5511 | case IOR: | |
5512 | /* These all distribute except over PLUS. */ | |
5513 | if (code == PLUS || code == MINUS) | |
5514 | return x; | |
5515 | break; | |
5516 | ||
5517 | case MULT: | |
5518 | if (code != PLUS && code != MINUS) | |
5519 | return x; | |
5520 | break; | |
5521 | ||
5522 | case ASHIFT: | |
5523 | case LSHIFT: | |
5524 | /* These are also multiplies, so they distribute over everything. */ | |
5525 | break; | |
5526 | ||
5527 | case SUBREG: | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5528 | /* Non-paradoxical SUBREGs distributes over all operations, provided |
5529 | the inner modes and word numbers are the same, this is an extraction | |
2b4bd1bc JW |
5530 | of a low-order part, we don't convert an fp operation to int or |
5531 | vice versa, and we would not be converting a single-word | |
dfbe1b2f | 5532 | operation into a multi-word operation. The latter test is not |
2b4bd1bc | 5533 | required, but it prevents generating unneeded multi-word operations. |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5534 | Some of the previous tests are redundant given the latter test, but |
5535 | are retained because they are required for correctness. | |
5536 | ||
5537 | We produce the result slightly differently in this case. */ | |
5538 | ||
5539 | if (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (lhs)) != GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (rhs)) | |
5540 | || SUBREG_WORD (lhs) != SUBREG_WORD (rhs) | |
5541 | || ! subreg_lowpart_p (lhs) | |
2b4bd1bc JW |
5542 | || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (lhs)) |
5543 | != GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (lhs)))) | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
5544 | || (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (lhs)) |
5545 | < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (lhs)))) | |
5546 | || GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (lhs))) > UNITS_PER_WORD) | |
230d793d RS |
5547 | return x; |
5548 | ||
5549 | tem = gen_binary (code, GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (lhs)), | |
5550 | SUBREG_REG (lhs), SUBREG_REG (rhs)); | |
5551 | return gen_lowpart_for_combine (GET_MODE (x), tem); | |
5552 | ||
5553 | default: | |
5554 | return x; | |
5555 | } | |
5556 | ||
5557 | /* Set LHS and RHS to the inner operands (A and B in the example | |
5558 | above) and set OTHER to the common operand (C in the example). | |
5559 | These is only one way to do this unless the inner operation is | |
5560 | commutative. */ | |
5561 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (inner_code) == 'c' | |
5562 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 0), XEXP (rhs, 0))) | |
5563 | other = XEXP (lhs, 0), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 1), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 1); | |
5564 | else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (inner_code) == 'c' | |
5565 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 0), XEXP (rhs, 1))) | |
5566 | other = XEXP (lhs, 0), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 1), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0); | |
5567 | else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (inner_code) == 'c' | |
5568 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 1), XEXP (rhs, 0))) | |
5569 | other = XEXP (lhs, 1), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 1); | |
5570 | else if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 1), XEXP (rhs, 1))) | |
5571 | other = XEXP (lhs, 1), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0); | |
5572 | else | |
5573 | return x; | |
5574 | ||
5575 | /* Form the new inner operation, seeing if it simplifies first. */ | |
5576 | tem = gen_binary (code, GET_MODE (x), lhs, rhs); | |
5577 | ||
5578 | /* There is one exception to the general way of distributing: | |
5579 | (a ^ b) | (a ^ c) -> (~a) & (b ^ c) */ | |
5580 | if (code == XOR && inner_code == IOR) | |
5581 | { | |
5582 | inner_code = AND; | |
5583 | other = gen_unary (NOT, GET_MODE (x), other); | |
5584 | } | |
5585 | ||
5586 | /* We may be able to continuing distributing the result, so call | |
5587 | ourselves recursively on the inner operation before forming the | |
5588 | outer operation, which we return. */ | |
5589 | return gen_binary (inner_code, GET_MODE (x), | |
5590 | apply_distributive_law (tem), other); | |
5591 | } | |
5592 | \f | |
5593 | /* We have X, a logical `and' of VAROP with the constant CONSTOP, to be done | |
5594 | in MODE. | |
5595 | ||
5596 | Return an equivalent form, if different from X. Otherwise, return X. If | |
5597 | X is zero, we are to always construct the equivalent form. */ | |
5598 | ||
5599 | static rtx | |
5600 | simplify_and_const_int (x, mode, varop, constop) | |
5601 | rtx x; | |
5602 | enum machine_mode mode; | |
5603 | rtx varop; | |
5f4f0e22 | 5604 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT constop; |
230d793d RS |
5605 | { |
5606 | register enum machine_mode tmode; | |
5607 | register rtx temp; | |
5f4f0e22 | 5608 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT significant; |
230d793d RS |
5609 | |
5610 | /* There is a large class of optimizations based on the principle that | |
5611 | some operations produce results where certain bits are known to be zero, | |
5612 | and hence are not significant to the AND. For example, if we have just | |
5613 | done a left shift of one bit, the low-order bit is known to be zero and | |
5614 | hence an AND with a mask of ~1 would not do anything. | |
5615 | ||
5616 | At the end of the following loop, we set: | |
5617 | ||
5618 | VAROP to be the item to be AND'ed with; | |
5619 | CONSTOP to the constant value to AND it with. */ | |
5620 | ||
5621 | while (1) | |
5622 | { | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
5623 | /* If we ever encounter a mode wider than the host machine's widest |
5624 | integer size, we can't compute the masks accurately, so give up. */ | |
5625 | if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (varop)) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) | |
230d793d RS |
5626 | break; |
5627 | ||
5628 | /* Unless one of the cases below does a `continue', | |
5629 | a `break' will be executed to exit the loop. */ | |
5630 | ||
5631 | switch (GET_CODE (varop)) | |
5632 | { | |
5633 | case CLOBBER: | |
5634 | /* If VAROP is a (clobber (const_int)), return it since we know | |
5635 | we are generating something that won't match. */ | |
5636 | return varop; | |
5637 | ||
5638 | #if ! BITS_BIG_ENDIAN | |
5639 | case USE: | |
5640 | /* VAROP is a (use (mem ..)) that was made from a bit-field | |
5641 | extraction that spanned the boundary of the MEM. If we are | |
5642 | now masking so it is within that boundary, we don't need the | |
5643 | USE any more. */ | |
5644 | if ((constop & ~ GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (varop, 0)))) == 0) | |
5645 | { | |
5646 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
5647 | continue; | |
5648 | } | |
5649 | break; | |
5650 | #endif | |
5651 | ||
5652 | case SUBREG: | |
5653 | if (subreg_lowpart_p (varop) | |
5654 | /* We can ignore the effect this SUBREG if it narrows the mode | |
457816e2 | 5655 | or, on machines where byte operations extend, if the |
230d793d RS |
5656 | constant masks to zero all the bits the mode doesn't have. */ |
5657 | && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (varop)) | |
5658 | < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop)))) | |
457816e2 | 5659 | #if defined(BYTE_LOADS_ZERO_EXTEND) || defined(BYTE_LOADS_SIGN_EXTEND) |
230d793d RS |
5660 | || (0 == (constop |
5661 | & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (varop)) | |
5662 | & ~ GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop))))) | |
5663 | #endif | |
5664 | )) | |
5665 | { | |
5666 | varop = SUBREG_REG (varop); | |
5667 | continue; | |
5668 | } | |
5669 | break; | |
5670 | ||
5671 | case ZERO_EXTRACT: | |
5672 | case SIGN_EXTRACT: | |
5673 | case ZERO_EXTEND: | |
5674 | case SIGN_EXTEND: | |
5675 | /* Try to expand these into a series of shifts and then work | |
5676 | with that result. If we can't, for example, if the extract | |
5677 | isn't at a fixed position, give up. */ | |
5678 | temp = expand_compound_operation (varop); | |
5679 | if (temp != varop) | |
5680 | { | |
5681 | varop = temp; | |
5682 | continue; | |
5683 | } | |
5684 | break; | |
5685 | ||
5686 | case AND: | |
5687 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 1)) == CONST_INT) | |
5688 | { | |
5689 | constop &= INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)); | |
5690 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
5691 | continue; | |
5692 | } | |
5693 | break; | |
5694 | ||
5695 | case IOR: | |
5696 | case XOR: | |
5697 | /* If VAROP is (ior (lshiftrt FOO C1) C2), try to commute the IOR and | |
5698 | LSHIFT so we end up with an (and (lshiftrt (ior ...) ...) ...) | |
5699 | operation which may be a bitfield extraction. */ | |
5700 | ||
5701 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == LSHIFTRT | |
5702 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5703 | && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) >= 0 | |
5f4f0e22 | 5704 | && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d RS |
5705 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 1)) == CONST_INT |
5706 | && (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) | |
5707 | & ~ significant_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), | |
5708 | GET_MODE (varop)) == 0)) | |
5709 | { | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
5710 | temp = GEN_INT ((INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) & constop) |
5711 | << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1))); | |
230d793d RS |
5712 | temp = gen_binary (GET_CODE (varop), GET_MODE (varop), |
5713 | XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 0), temp); | |
5714 | varop = gen_rtx_combine (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (varop), | |
5715 | temp, XEXP (varop, 1)); | |
5716 | continue; | |
5717 | } | |
5718 | ||
5719 | /* Apply the AND to both branches of the IOR or XOR, then try to | |
5720 | apply the distributive law. This may eliminate operations | |
5721 | if either branch can be simplified because of the AND. | |
5722 | It may also make some cases more complex, but those cases | |
5723 | probably won't match a pattern either with or without this. */ | |
5724 | return | |
5725 | gen_lowpart_for_combine | |
5726 | (mode, apply_distributive_law | |
5727 | (gen_rtx_combine | |
5728 | (GET_CODE (varop), GET_MODE (varop), | |
5f4f0e22 | 5729 | simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, GET_MODE (varop), |
230d793d | 5730 | XEXP (varop, 0), constop), |
5f4f0e22 | 5731 | simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, GET_MODE (varop), |
230d793d RS |
5732 | XEXP (varop, 1), constop)))); |
5733 | ||
5734 | case NOT: | |
5735 | /* (and (not FOO)) is (and (xor FOO CONST_OP)) so if FOO is an | |
5736 | LSHIFTRT we can do the same as above. */ | |
5737 | ||
5738 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == LSHIFTRT | |
5739 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5740 | && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) >= 0 | |
5f4f0e22 | 5741 | && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
230d793d | 5742 | { |
5f4f0e22 | 5743 | temp = GEN_INT (constop << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1))); |
230d793d RS |
5744 | temp = gen_binary (XOR, GET_MODE (varop), |
5745 | XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 0), temp); | |
5746 | varop = gen_rtx_combine (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (varop), | |
5747 | temp, XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)); | |
5748 | continue; | |
5749 | } | |
5750 | break; | |
5751 | ||
5752 | case ASHIFTRT: | |
5753 | /* If we are just looking for the sign bit, we don't need this | |
5754 | shift at all, even if it has a variable count. */ | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
5755 | if (constop == ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 |
5756 | << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (varop)) - 1))) | |
230d793d RS |
5757 | { |
5758 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
5759 | continue; | |
5760 | } | |
5761 | ||
5762 | /* If this is a shift by a constant, get a mask that contains | |
5763 | those bits that are not copies of the sign bit. We then have | |
5764 | two cases: If CONSTOP only includes those bits, this can be | |
5765 | a logical shift, which may allow simplifications. If CONSTOP | |
5766 | is a single-bit field not within those bits, we are requesting | |
5767 | a copy of the sign bit and hence can shift the sign bit to | |
5768 | the appropriate location. */ | |
5769 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5770 | && INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) >= 0 | |
5f4f0e22 | 5771 | && INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
230d793d RS |
5772 | { |
5773 | int i = -1; | |
5774 | ||
5775 | significant = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (varop)); | |
5776 | significant >>= INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)); | |
5777 | ||
5778 | if ((constop & ~significant) == 0 | |
5779 | || (i = exact_log2 (constop)) >= 0) | |
5780 | { | |
5781 | varop = simplify_shift_const | |
5782 | (varop, LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (varop), XEXP (varop, 0), | |
5783 | i < 0 ? INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) | |
5784 | : GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (varop)) - 1 - i); | |
5785 | if (GET_CODE (varop) != ASHIFTRT) | |
5786 | continue; | |
5787 | } | |
5788 | } | |
5789 | ||
5790 | /* If our mask is 1, convert this to a LSHIFTRT. This can be done | |
5791 | even if the shift count isn't a constant. */ | |
5792 | if (constop == 1) | |
5793 | varop = gen_rtx_combine (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (varop), | |
5794 | XEXP (varop, 0), XEXP (varop, 1)); | |
5795 | break; | |
5796 | ||
5797 | case NE: | |
5798 | /* (and (ne FOO 0) CONST) can be (and FOO CONST) if CONST is | |
5799 | included in STORE_FLAG_VALUE and FOO has no significant bits | |
5800 | not in CONST. */ | |
5801 | if ((constop & ~ STORE_FLAG_VALUE) == 0 | |
5802 | && XEXP (varop, 0) == const0_rtx | |
5803 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), mode) & ~ constop) == 0) | |
5804 | { | |
5805 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
5806 | continue; | |
5807 | } | |
5808 | break; | |
5809 | ||
5810 | case PLUS: | |
5811 | /* In (and (plus FOO C1) M), if M is a mask that just turns off | |
5812 | low-order bits (as in an alignment operation) and FOO is already | |
5813 | aligned to that boundary, we can convert remove this AND | |
5814 | and possibly the PLUS if it is now adding zero. */ | |
5815 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5816 | && exact_log2 (-constop) >= 0 | |
5817 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), mode) & ~ constop) == 0) | |
5818 | { | |
5819 | varop = plus_constant (XEXP (varop, 0), | |
5820 | INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) & constop); | |
5821 | constop = ~0; | |
5822 | break; | |
5823 | } | |
5824 | ||
5825 | /* ... fall through ... */ | |
5826 | ||
5827 | case MINUS: | |
5828 | /* In (and (plus (and FOO M1) BAR) M2), if M1 and M2 are one | |
5829 | less than powers of two and M2 is narrower than M1, we can | |
5830 | eliminate the inner AND. This occurs when incrementing | |
5831 | bit fields. */ | |
5832 | ||
5833 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == ZERO_EXTRACT | |
5834 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND) | |
5835 | SUBST (XEXP (varop, 0), | |
5836 | expand_compound_operation (XEXP (varop, 0))); | |
5837 | ||
5838 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == AND | |
5839 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5840 | && exact_log2 (constop + 1) >= 0 | |
5841 | && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) + 1) >= 0 | |
5842 | && (~ INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) & constop) == 0) | |
5843 | SUBST (XEXP (varop, 0), XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 0)); | |
5844 | break; | |
5845 | } | |
5846 | ||
5847 | break; | |
5848 | } | |
5849 | ||
5850 | /* If we have reached a constant, this whole thing is constant. */ | |
5851 | if (GET_CODE (varop) == CONST_INT) | |
5f4f0e22 | 5852 | return GEN_INT (constop & INTVAL (varop)); |
230d793d RS |
5853 | |
5854 | /* See what bits are significant in VAROP. */ | |
5855 | significant = significant_bits (varop, mode); | |
5856 | ||
5857 | /* Turn off all bits in the constant that are known to already be zero. | |
5858 | Thus, if the AND isn't needed at all, we will have CONSTOP == SIGNIFICANT | |
5859 | which is tested below. */ | |
5860 | ||
5861 | constop &= significant; | |
5862 | ||
5863 | /* If we don't have any bits left, return zero. */ | |
5864 | if (constop == 0) | |
5865 | return const0_rtx; | |
5866 | ||
5867 | /* Get VAROP in MODE. Try to get a SUBREG if not. Don't make a new SUBREG | |
5868 | if we already had one (just check for the simplest cases). */ | |
5869 | if (x && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG | |
5870 | && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == mode | |
5871 | && SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)) == varop) | |
5872 | varop = XEXP (x, 0); | |
5873 | else | |
5874 | varop = gen_lowpart_for_combine (mode, varop); | |
5875 | ||
5876 | /* If we can't make the SUBREG, try to return what we were given. */ | |
5877 | if (GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER) | |
5878 | return x ? x : varop; | |
5879 | ||
5880 | /* If we are only masking insignificant bits, return VAROP. */ | |
5881 | if (constop == significant) | |
5882 | x = varop; | |
5883 | ||
5884 | /* Otherwise, return an AND. See how much, if any, of X we can use. */ | |
5885 | else if (x == 0 || GET_CODE (x) != AND || GET_MODE (x) != mode) | |
5f4f0e22 | 5886 | x = gen_rtx_combine (AND, mode, varop, GEN_INT (constop)); |
230d793d RS |
5887 | |
5888 | else | |
5889 | { | |
5890 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) != CONST_INT | |
5891 | || INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) != constop) | |
5f4f0e22 | 5892 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), GEN_INT (constop)); |
230d793d RS |
5893 | |
5894 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), varop); | |
5895 | } | |
5896 | ||
5897 | return x; | |
5898 | } | |
5899 | \f | |
5900 | /* Given an expression, X, compute which bits in X can be non-zero. | |
5901 | We don't care about bits outside of those defined in MODE. | |
5902 | ||
5903 | For most X this is simply GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (MODE)), but if X is | |
5904 | a shift, AND, or zero_extract, we can do better. */ | |
5905 | ||
5f4f0e22 | 5906 | static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT |
230d793d RS |
5907 | significant_bits (x, mode) |
5908 | rtx x; | |
5909 | enum machine_mode mode; | |
5910 | { | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
5911 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT significant = GET_MODE_MASK (mode); |
5912 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT inner_sig; | |
230d793d RS |
5913 | enum rtx_code code; |
5914 | int mode_width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode); | |
5915 | rtx tem; | |
5916 | ||
5917 | /* If X is wider than MODE, use its mode instead. */ | |
5918 | if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x)) > mode_width) | |
5919 | { | |
5920 | mode = GET_MODE (x); | |
5921 | significant = GET_MODE_MASK (mode); | |
5922 | mode_width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode); | |
5923 | } | |
5924 | ||
5f4f0e22 | 5925 | if (mode_width > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
230d793d RS |
5926 | /* Our only callers in this case look for single bit values. So |
5927 | just return the mode mask. Those tests will then be false. */ | |
5928 | return significant; | |
5929 | ||
5930 | code = GET_CODE (x); | |
5931 | switch (code) | |
5932 | { | |
5933 | case REG: | |
5934 | #ifdef STACK_BOUNDARY | |
5935 | /* If this is the stack pointer, we may know something about its | |
5936 | alignment. If PUSH_ROUNDING is defined, it is possible for the | |
5937 | stack to be momentarily aligned only to that amount, so we pick | |
5938 | the least alignment. */ | |
5939 | ||
5940 | if (x == stack_pointer_rtx) | |
5941 | { | |
5942 | int sp_alignment = STACK_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT; | |
5943 | ||
5944 | #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING | |
5945 | sp_alignment = MIN (PUSH_ROUNDING (1), sp_alignment); | |
5946 | #endif | |
5947 | ||
5948 | return significant & ~ (sp_alignment - 1); | |
5949 | } | |
5950 | #endif | |
5951 | ||
5952 | /* If X is a register whose value we can find, use that value. | |
5953 | Otherwise, use the previously-computed significant bits for this | |
5954 | register. */ | |
5955 | ||
5956 | tem = get_last_value (x); | |
5957 | if (tem) | |
5958 | return significant_bits (tem, mode); | |
5959 | else if (significant_valid && reg_significant[REGNO (x)]) | |
5960 | return reg_significant[REGNO (x)] & significant; | |
5961 | else | |
5962 | return significant; | |
5963 | ||
5964 | case CONST_INT: | |
5965 | return INTVAL (x); | |
5966 | ||
5967 | #ifdef BYTE_LOADS_ZERO_EXTEND | |
5968 | case MEM: | |
5969 | /* In many, if not most, RISC machines, reading a byte from memory | |
5970 | zeros the rest of the register. Noticing that fact saves a lot | |
5971 | of extra zero-extends. */ | |
5972 | significant &= GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)); | |
5973 | break; | |
5974 | #endif | |
5975 | ||
5976 | #if STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 | |
5977 | case EQ: case NE: | |
5978 | case GT: case GTU: | |
5979 | case LT: case LTU: | |
5980 | case GE: case GEU: | |
5981 | case LE: case LEU: | |
3f508eca RK |
5982 | |
5983 | if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT) | |
5984 | significant = 1; | |
230d793d RS |
5985 | |
5986 | /* A comparison operation only sets the bits given by its mode. The | |
5987 | rest are set undefined. */ | |
5988 | if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) < mode_width) | |
5989 | significant |= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) & ~ GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x))); | |
5990 | break; | |
5991 | #endif | |
5992 | ||
230d793d | 5993 | case NEG: |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
5994 | if (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (x)) |
5995 | == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x))) | |
230d793d RS |
5996 | significant = 1; |
5997 | ||
5998 | if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) < mode_width) | |
5999 | significant |= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) & ~ GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x))); | |
6000 | break; | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6001 | |
6002 | case ABS: | |
6003 | if (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (x)) | |
6004 | == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x))) | |
6005 | significant = 1; | |
6006 | break; | |
230d793d RS |
6007 | |
6008 | case TRUNCATE: | |
6009 | significant &= (significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) | |
6010 | & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)); | |
6011 | break; | |
6012 | ||
6013 | case ZERO_EXTEND: | |
6014 | significant &= significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6015 | if (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) != VOIDmode) | |
6016 | significant &= GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))); | |
6017 | break; | |
6018 | ||
6019 | case SIGN_EXTEND: | |
6020 | /* If the sign bit is known clear, this is the same as ZERO_EXTEND. | |
6021 | Otherwise, show all the bits in the outer mode but not the inner | |
6022 | may be non-zero. */ | |
6023 | inner_sig = significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6024 | if (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) != VOIDmode) | |
6025 | { | |
6026 | inner_sig &= GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))); | |
6027 | if (inner_sig & | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
6028 | (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 |
6029 | << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) - 1)))) | |
230d793d RS |
6030 | inner_sig |= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) |
6031 | & ~ GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))); | |
6032 | } | |
6033 | ||
6034 | significant &= inner_sig; | |
6035 | break; | |
6036 | ||
6037 | case AND: | |
6038 | significant &= (significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) | |
6039 | & significant_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode)); | |
6040 | break; | |
6041 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6042 | case XOR: case IOR: |
6043 | case UMIN: case UMAX: case SMIN: case SMAX: | |
230d793d RS |
6044 | significant &= (significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) |
6045 | | significant_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode)); | |
6046 | break; | |
6047 | ||
6048 | case PLUS: case MINUS: | |
6049 | case MULT: | |
6050 | case DIV: case UDIV: | |
6051 | case MOD: case UMOD: | |
6052 | /* We can apply the rules of arithmetic to compute the number of | |
6053 | high- and low-order zero bits of these operations. We start by | |
6054 | computing the width (position of the highest-order non-zero bit) | |
6055 | and the number of low-order zero bits for each value. */ | |
6056 | { | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
6057 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT sig0 = significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode); |
6058 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT sig1 = significant_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode); | |
230d793d RS |
6059 | int width0 = floor_log2 (sig0) + 1; |
6060 | int width1 = floor_log2 (sig1) + 1; | |
6061 | int low0 = floor_log2 (sig0 & -sig0); | |
6062 | int low1 = floor_log2 (sig1 & -sig1); | |
6063 | int op0_maybe_minusp = (sig0 & (1 << (mode_width - 1))); | |
6064 | int op1_maybe_minusp = (sig1 & (1 << (mode_width - 1))); | |
6065 | int result_width = mode_width; | |
6066 | int result_low = 0; | |
6067 | ||
6068 | switch (code) | |
6069 | { | |
6070 | case PLUS: | |
6071 | result_width = MAX (width0, width1) + 1; | |
6072 | result_low = MIN (low0, low1); | |
6073 | break; | |
6074 | case MINUS: | |
6075 | result_low = MIN (low0, low1); | |
6076 | break; | |
6077 | case MULT: | |
6078 | result_width = width0 + width1; | |
6079 | result_low = low0 + low1; | |
6080 | break; | |
6081 | case DIV: | |
6082 | if (! op0_maybe_minusp && ! op1_maybe_minusp) | |
6083 | result_width = width0; | |
6084 | break; | |
6085 | case UDIV: | |
6086 | result_width = width0; | |
6087 | break; | |
6088 | case MOD: | |
6089 | if (! op0_maybe_minusp && ! op1_maybe_minusp) | |
6090 | result_width = MIN (width0, width1); | |
6091 | result_low = MIN (low0, low1); | |
6092 | break; | |
6093 | case UMOD: | |
6094 | result_width = MIN (width0, width1); | |
6095 | result_low = MIN (low0, low1); | |
6096 | break; | |
6097 | } | |
6098 | ||
6099 | if (result_width < mode_width) | |
5f4f0e22 | 6100 | significant &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << result_width) - 1; |
230d793d RS |
6101 | |
6102 | if (result_low > 0) | |
5f4f0e22 | 6103 | significant &= ~ (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << result_low) - 1); |
230d793d RS |
6104 | } |
6105 | break; | |
6106 | ||
6107 | case ZERO_EXTRACT: | |
6108 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
6109 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
6110 | significant &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) - 1; | |
230d793d RS |
6111 | break; |
6112 | ||
6113 | case SUBREG: | |
c3c2cb37 RK |
6114 | /* If this is a SUBREG formed for a promoted variable that has |
6115 | been zero-extended, we know that at least the high-order bits | |
6116 | are zero, though others might be too. */ | |
6117 | ||
6118 | if (SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x) && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (x)) | |
6119 | significant = (GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)) | |
6120 | & significant_bits (SUBREG_REG (x), GET_MODE (x))); | |
6121 | ||
230d793d RS |
6122 | /* If the inner mode is a single word for both the host and target |
6123 | machines, we can compute this from which bits of the inner | |
6124 | object are known significant. */ | |
6125 | if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) <= BITS_PER_WORD | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
6126 | && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) |
6127 | <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)) | |
230d793d RS |
6128 | { |
6129 | significant &= significant_bits (SUBREG_REG (x), mode); | |
457816e2 | 6130 | #if ! defined(BYTE_LOADS_ZERO_EXTEND) && ! defined(BYTE_LOADS_SIGN_EXTEND) |
230d793d RS |
6131 | /* On many CISC machines, accessing an object in a wider mode |
6132 | causes the high-order bits to become undefined. So they are | |
6133 | not known to be zero. */ | |
6134 | if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) | |
6135 | > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))) | |
6136 | significant |= (GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)) | |
6137 | & ~ GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))); | |
6138 | #endif | |
6139 | } | |
6140 | break; | |
6141 | ||
6142 | case ASHIFTRT: | |
6143 | case LSHIFTRT: | |
6144 | case ASHIFT: | |
6145 | case LSHIFT: | |
6146 | case ROTATE: | |
6147 | /* The significant bits are in two classes: any bits within MODE | |
6148 | that aren't in GET_MODE (x) are always significant. The rest of the | |
6149 | significant bits are those that are significant in the operand of | |
6150 | the shift when shifted the appropriate number of bits. This | |
6151 | shows that high-order bits are cleared by the right shift and | |
6152 | low-order bits by left shifts. */ | |
6153 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
6154 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0 | |
5f4f0e22 | 6155 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
230d793d RS |
6156 | { |
6157 | enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (x); | |
6158 | int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode); | |
6159 | int count = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)); | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
6160 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mode_mask = GET_MODE_MASK (inner_mode); |
6161 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT op_significant | |
6162 | = significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6163 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT inner = op_significant & mode_mask; | |
6164 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT outer = 0; | |
230d793d RS |
6165 | |
6166 | if (mode_width > width) | |
6167 | outer = (op_significant & significant & ~ mode_mask); | |
6168 | ||
6169 | if (code == LSHIFTRT) | |
6170 | inner >>= count; | |
6171 | else if (code == ASHIFTRT) | |
6172 | { | |
6173 | inner >>= count; | |
6174 | ||
6175 | /* If the sign bit was significant at before the shift, we | |
6176 | need to mark all the places it could have been copied to | |
6177 | by the shift significant. */ | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
6178 | if (inner & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1 - count))) |
6179 | inner |= (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << count) - 1) << (width - count); | |
230d793d RS |
6180 | } |
6181 | else if (code == LSHIFT || code == ASHIFT) | |
6182 | inner <<= count; | |
6183 | else | |
6184 | inner = ((inner << (count % width) | |
6185 | | (inner >> (width - (count % width)))) & mode_mask); | |
6186 | ||
6187 | significant &= (outer | inner); | |
6188 | } | |
6189 | break; | |
6190 | ||
6191 | case FFS: | |
6192 | /* This is at most the number of bits in the mode. */ | |
5f4f0e22 | 6193 | significant = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (floor_log2 (mode_width) + 1)) - 1; |
230d793d | 6194 | break; |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6195 | |
6196 | case IF_THEN_ELSE: | |
6197 | significant &= (significant_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode) | |
6198 | | significant_bits (XEXP (x, 2), mode)); | |
6199 | break; | |
230d793d RS |
6200 | } |
6201 | ||
6202 | return significant; | |
6203 | } | |
6204 | \f | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6205 | /* Return the number of bits at the high-order end of X that are known to |
6206 | be equal to the sign bit. This number will always be between 1 and | |
6207 | the number of bits in the mode of X. MODE is the mode to be used | |
6208 | if X is VOIDmode. */ | |
6209 | ||
6210 | static int | |
6211 | num_sign_bit_copies (x, mode) | |
6212 | rtx x; | |
6213 | enum machine_mode mode; | |
6214 | { | |
6215 | enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x); | |
6216 | int bitwidth; | |
6217 | int num0, num1, result; | |
6218 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT sig; | |
6219 | rtx tem; | |
6220 | ||
6221 | /* If we weren't given a mode, use the mode of X. If the mode is still | |
6222 | VOIDmode, we don't know anything. */ | |
6223 | ||
6224 | if (mode == VOIDmode) | |
6225 | mode = GET_MODE (x); | |
6226 | ||
6227 | if (mode == VOIDmode) | |
6228 | return 0; | |
6229 | ||
6230 | bitwidth = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode); | |
6231 | ||
6232 | switch (code) | |
6233 | { | |
6234 | case REG: | |
6235 | if (significant_valid && reg_sign_bit_copies[REGNO (x)] != 0) | |
6236 | return reg_sign_bit_copies[REGNO (x)]; | |
6237 | ||
6238 | tem = get_last_value (x); | |
6239 | if (tem != 0) | |
6240 | return num_sign_bit_copies (tem, mode); | |
6241 | break; | |
6242 | ||
457816e2 RK |
6243 | #ifdef BYTE_LOADS_SIGN_EXTEND |
6244 | case MEM: | |
6245 | /* Some RISC machines sign-extend all loads of smaller than a word. */ | |
6246 | return MAX (1, bitwidth - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x)) + 1); | |
6247 | #endif | |
6248 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6249 | case CONST_INT: |
6250 | /* If the constant is negative, take its 1's complement and remask. | |
6251 | Then see how many zero bits we have. */ | |
6252 | sig = INTVAL (x) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode); | |
ac49a949 RS |
6253 | if (bitwidth <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
6254 | && (sig & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))) != 0) | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6255 | sig = (~ sig) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode); |
6256 | ||
6257 | return (sig == 0 ? bitwidth : bitwidth - floor_log2 (sig) - 1); | |
6258 | ||
6259 | case SUBREG: | |
c3c2cb37 RK |
6260 | /* If this is a SUBREG for a promoted object that is sign-extended |
6261 | and we are looking at it in a wider mode, we know that at least the | |
6262 | high-order bits are known to be sign bit copies. */ | |
6263 | ||
6264 | if (SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x) && ! SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (x)) | |
6265 | return (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x)) | |
6266 | + num_sign_bit_copies (SUBREG_REG (x), GET_MODE (x))); | |
6267 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6268 | /* For a smaller object, just ignore the high bits. */ |
6269 | if (bitwidth <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))) | |
6270 | { | |
6271 | num0 = num_sign_bit_copies (SUBREG_REG (x), VOIDmode); | |
6272 | return MAX (1, (num0 | |
6273 | - (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) | |
6274 | - bitwidth))); | |
6275 | } | |
457816e2 RK |
6276 | |
6277 | #if defined(BYTE_LOADS_ZERO_EXTEND) || defined(BYTE_LOADS_SIGN_EXTEND) | |
6278 | /* For paradoxical SUBREGs, just look inside since, on machines with | |
6279 | one of these defined, we assume that operations are actually | |
6280 | performed on the full register. Note that we are passing MODE | |
6281 | to the recursive call, so the number of sign bit copies will | |
6282 | remain relative to that mode, not the inner mode. */ | |
6283 | ||
6284 | if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) | |
6285 | > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))) | |
6286 | return num_sign_bit_copies (SUBREG_REG (x), mode); | |
6287 | #endif | |
6288 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6289 | break; |
6290 | ||
6291 | case SIGN_EXTRACT: | |
6292 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT) | |
6293 | return MAX (1, bitwidth - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))); | |
6294 | break; | |
6295 | ||
6296 | case SIGN_EXTEND: | |
6297 | return (bitwidth - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) | |
6298 | + num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), VOIDmode)); | |
6299 | ||
6300 | case TRUNCATE: | |
6301 | /* For a smaller object, just ignore the high bits. */ | |
6302 | num0 = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), VOIDmode); | |
6303 | return MAX (1, (num0 - (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) | |
6304 | - bitwidth))); | |
6305 | ||
6306 | case NOT: | |
6307 | return num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6308 | ||
6309 | case ROTATE: case ROTATERT: | |
6310 | /* If we are rotating left by a number of bits less than the number | |
6311 | of sign bit copies, we can just subtract that amount from the | |
6312 | number. */ | |
6313 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
6314 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < bitwidth) | |
6315 | { | |
6316 | num0 = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6317 | return MAX (1, num0 - (code == ROTATE ? INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) | |
6318 | : bitwidth - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))); | |
6319 | } | |
6320 | break; | |
6321 | ||
6322 | case NEG: | |
6323 | /* In general, this subtracts one sign bit copy. But if the value | |
6324 | is known to be positive, the number of sign bit copies is the | |
6325 | same as that of the input. Finally, if the input has just one | |
6326 | significant bit, all the bits are copies of the sign bit. */ | |
6327 | sig = significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6328 | if (sig == 1) | |
6329 | return bitwidth; | |
6330 | ||
6331 | num0 = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6332 | if (num0 > 1 | |
ac49a949 | 6333 | && bitwidth <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6334 | && (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1)) & sig)) |
6335 | num0--; | |
6336 | ||
6337 | return num0; | |
6338 | ||
6339 | case IOR: case AND: case XOR: | |
6340 | case SMIN: case SMAX: case UMIN: case UMAX: | |
6341 | /* Logical operations will preserve the number of sign-bit copies. | |
6342 | MIN and MAX operations always return one of the operands. */ | |
6343 | num0 = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6344 | num1 = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 1), mode); | |
6345 | return MIN (num0, num1); | |
6346 | ||
6347 | case PLUS: case MINUS: | |
6348 | /* For addition and subtraction, we can have a 1-bit carry. However, | |
6349 | if we are subtracting 1 from a positive number, there will not | |
6350 | be such a carry. Furthermore, if the positive number is known to | |
6351 | be 0 or 1, we know the result is either -1 or 0. */ | |
6352 | ||
3e3ea975 RS |
6353 | if (code == PLUS && XEXP (x, 1) == constm1_rtx |
6354 | /* Don't do this if XEXP (x, 0) is a paradoxical subreg | |
6355 | because in principle we don't know what the high bits are. */ | |
6356 | && !(GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG | |
6357 | && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))) | |
6358 | < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))))) | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6359 | { |
6360 | sig = significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6361 | if ((((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1)) & sig) == 0) | |
6362 | return (sig == 1 || sig == 0 ? bitwidth | |
d038420e | 6363 | : bitwidth - floor_log2 (sig) - 1); |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6364 | } |
6365 | ||
6366 | num0 = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6367 | num1 = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 1), mode); | |
6368 | return MAX (1, MIN (num0, num1) - 1); | |
6369 | ||
6370 | case MULT: | |
6371 | /* The number of bits of the product is the sum of the number of | |
6372 | bits of both terms. However, unless one of the terms if known | |
6373 | to be positive, we must allow for an additional bit since negating | |
6374 | a negative number can remove one sign bit copy. */ | |
6375 | ||
6376 | num0 = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6377 | num1 = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 1), mode); | |
6378 | ||
6379 | result = bitwidth - (bitwidth - num0) - (bitwidth - num1); | |
6380 | if (result > 0 | |
ac49a949 | 6381 | && bitwidth <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6382 | && ((significant_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) |
6383 | & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))) != 0) | |
6384 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode) | |
6385 | & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1)) != 0)) | |
6386 | result--; | |
6387 | ||
6388 | return MAX (1, result); | |
6389 | ||
6390 | case UDIV: | |
6391 | /* The result must be <= the first operand. */ | |
6392 | return num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6393 | ||
6394 | case UMOD: | |
6395 | /* The result must be <= the scond operand. */ | |
6396 | return num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 1), mode); | |
6397 | ||
6398 | case DIV: | |
6399 | /* Similar to unsigned division, except that we have to worry about | |
6400 | the case where the divisor is negative, in which case we have | |
6401 | to add 1. */ | |
6402 | result = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6403 | if (result > 1 | |
ac49a949 | 6404 | && bitwidth <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6405 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode) |
6406 | & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))) != 0) | |
6407 | result --; | |
6408 | ||
6409 | return result; | |
6410 | ||
6411 | case MOD: | |
6412 | result = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 1), mode); | |
6413 | if (result > 1 | |
ac49a949 | 6414 | && bitwidth <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6415 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode) |
6416 | & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))) != 0) | |
6417 | result --; | |
6418 | ||
6419 | return result; | |
6420 | ||
6421 | case ASHIFTRT: | |
6422 | /* Shifts by a constant add to the number of bits equal to the | |
6423 | sign bit. */ | |
6424 | num0 = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6425 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
6426 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) > 0) | |
6427 | num0 = MIN (bitwidth, num0 + INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))); | |
6428 | ||
6429 | return num0; | |
6430 | ||
6431 | case ASHIFT: | |
6432 | case LSHIFT: | |
6433 | /* Left shifts destroy copies. */ | |
6434 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) != CONST_INT | |
6435 | || INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < 0 | |
6436 | || INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= bitwidth) | |
6437 | return 1; | |
6438 | ||
6439 | num0 = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode); | |
6440 | return MAX (1, num0 - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))); | |
6441 | ||
6442 | case IF_THEN_ELSE: | |
6443 | num0 = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 1), mode); | |
6444 | num1 = num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 2), mode); | |
6445 | return MIN (num0, num1); | |
6446 | ||
6447 | #if STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1 | |
6448 | case EQ: case NE: case GE: case GT: case LE: case LT: | |
6449 | case GEU: case GTU: case LEU: case LTU: | |
6450 | return bitwidth; | |
6451 | #endif | |
6452 | } | |
6453 | ||
6454 | /* If we haven't been able to figure it out by one of the above rules, | |
6455 | see if some of the high-order bits are known to be zero. If so, | |
ac49a949 RS |
6456 | count those bits and return one less than that amount. If we can't |
6457 | safely compute the mask for this mode, always return BITWIDTH. */ | |
6458 | ||
6459 | if (bitwidth > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) | |
6460 | return bitwidth; | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6461 | |
6462 | sig = significant_bits (x, mode); | |
6463 | return sig == GET_MODE_MASK (mode) ? 1 : bitwidth - floor_log2 (sig) - 1; | |
6464 | } | |
6465 | \f | |
1a26b032 RK |
6466 | /* Return the number of "extended" bits there are in X, when interpreted |
6467 | as a quantity in MODE whose signedness is indicated by UNSIGNEDP. For | |
6468 | unsigned quantities, this is the number of high-order zero bits. | |
6469 | For signed quantities, this is the number of copies of the sign bit | |
6470 | minus 1. In both case, this function returns the number of "spare" | |
6471 | bits. For example, if two quantities for which this function returns | |
6472 | at least 1 are added, the addition is known not to overflow. | |
6473 | ||
6474 | This function will always return 0 unless called during combine, which | |
6475 | implies that it must be called from a define_split. */ | |
6476 | ||
6477 | int | |
6478 | extended_count (x, mode, unsignedp) | |
6479 | rtx x; | |
6480 | enum machine_mode mode; | |
6481 | int unsignedp; | |
6482 | { | |
6483 | if (significant_valid == 0) | |
6484 | return 0; | |
6485 | ||
6486 | return (unsignedp | |
ac49a949 RS |
6487 | ? (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
6488 | && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1 | |
6489 | - floor_log2 (significant_bits (x, mode)))) | |
1a26b032 RK |
6490 | : num_sign_bit_copies (x, mode) - 1); |
6491 | } | |
6492 | \f | |
230d793d RS |
6493 | /* This function is called from `simplify_shift_const' to merge two |
6494 | outer operations. Specifically, we have already found that we need | |
6495 | to perform operation *POP0 with constant *PCONST0 at the outermost | |
6496 | position. We would now like to also perform OP1 with constant CONST1 | |
6497 | (with *POP0 being done last). | |
6498 | ||
6499 | Return 1 if we can do the operation and update *POP0 and *PCONST0 with | |
6500 | the resulting operation. *PCOMP_P is set to 1 if we would need to | |
6501 | complement the innermost operand, otherwise it is unchanged. | |
6502 | ||
6503 | MODE is the mode in which the operation will be done. No bits outside | |
6504 | the width of this mode matter. It is assumed that the width of this mode | |
5f4f0e22 | 6505 | is smaller than or equal to HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT. |
230d793d RS |
6506 | |
6507 | If *POP0 or OP1 are NIL, it means no operation is required. Only NEG, PLUS, | |
6508 | IOR, XOR, and AND are supported. We may set *POP0 to SET if the proper | |
6509 | result is simply *PCONST0. | |
6510 | ||
6511 | If the resulting operation cannot be expressed as one operation, we | |
6512 | return 0 and do not change *POP0, *PCONST0, and *PCOMP_P. */ | |
6513 | ||
6514 | static int | |
6515 | merge_outer_ops (pop0, pconst0, op1, const1, mode, pcomp_p) | |
6516 | enum rtx_code *pop0; | |
5f4f0e22 | 6517 | HOST_WIDE_INT *pconst0; |
230d793d | 6518 | enum rtx_code op1; |
5f4f0e22 | 6519 | HOST_WIDE_INT const1; |
230d793d RS |
6520 | enum machine_mode mode; |
6521 | int *pcomp_p; | |
6522 | { | |
6523 | enum rtx_code op0 = *pop0; | |
5f4f0e22 | 6524 | HOST_WIDE_INT const0 = *pconst0; |
230d793d RS |
6525 | |
6526 | const0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode); | |
6527 | const1 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode); | |
6528 | ||
6529 | /* If OP0 is an AND, clear unimportant bits in CONST1. */ | |
6530 | if (op0 == AND) | |
6531 | const1 &= const0; | |
6532 | ||
6533 | /* If OP0 or OP1 is NIL, this is easy. Similarly if they are the same or | |
6534 | if OP0 is SET. */ | |
6535 | ||
6536 | if (op1 == NIL || op0 == SET) | |
6537 | return 1; | |
6538 | ||
6539 | else if (op0 == NIL) | |
6540 | op0 = op1, const0 = const1; | |
6541 | ||
6542 | else if (op0 == op1) | |
6543 | { | |
6544 | switch (op0) | |
6545 | { | |
6546 | case AND: | |
6547 | const0 &= const1; | |
6548 | break; | |
6549 | case IOR: | |
6550 | const0 |= const1; | |
6551 | break; | |
6552 | case XOR: | |
6553 | const0 ^= const1; | |
6554 | break; | |
6555 | case PLUS: | |
6556 | const0 += const1; | |
6557 | break; | |
6558 | case NEG: | |
6559 | op0 = NIL; | |
6560 | break; | |
6561 | } | |
6562 | } | |
6563 | ||
6564 | /* Otherwise, if either is a PLUS or NEG, we can't do anything. */ | |
6565 | else if (op0 == PLUS || op1 == PLUS || op0 == NEG || op1 == NEG) | |
6566 | return 0; | |
6567 | ||
6568 | /* If the two constants aren't the same, we can't do anything. The | |
6569 | remaining six cases can all be done. */ | |
6570 | else if (const0 != const1) | |
6571 | return 0; | |
6572 | ||
6573 | else | |
6574 | switch (op0) | |
6575 | { | |
6576 | case IOR: | |
6577 | if (op1 == AND) | |
6578 | /* (a & b) | b == b */ | |
6579 | op0 = SET; | |
6580 | else /* op1 == XOR */ | |
6581 | /* (a ^ b) | b == a | b */ | |
6582 | ; | |
6583 | break; | |
6584 | ||
6585 | case XOR: | |
6586 | if (op1 == AND) | |
6587 | /* (a & b) ^ b == (~a) & b */ | |
6588 | op0 = AND, *pcomp_p = 1; | |
6589 | else /* op1 == IOR */ | |
6590 | /* (a | b) ^ b == a & ~b */ | |
6591 | op0 = AND, *pconst0 = ~ const0; | |
6592 | break; | |
6593 | ||
6594 | case AND: | |
6595 | if (op1 == IOR) | |
6596 | /* (a | b) & b == b */ | |
6597 | op0 = SET; | |
6598 | else /* op1 == XOR */ | |
6599 | /* (a ^ b) & b) == (~a) & b */ | |
6600 | *pcomp_p = 1; | |
6601 | break; | |
6602 | } | |
6603 | ||
6604 | /* Check for NO-OP cases. */ | |
6605 | const0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode); | |
6606 | if (const0 == 0 | |
6607 | && (op0 == IOR || op0 == XOR || op0 == PLUS)) | |
6608 | op0 = NIL; | |
6609 | else if (const0 == 0 && op0 == AND) | |
6610 | op0 = SET; | |
6611 | else if (const0 == GET_MODE_MASK (mode) && op0 == AND) | |
6612 | op0 = NIL; | |
6613 | ||
6614 | *pop0 = op0; | |
6615 | *pconst0 = const0; | |
6616 | ||
6617 | return 1; | |
6618 | } | |
6619 | \f | |
6620 | /* Simplify a shift of VAROP by COUNT bits. CODE says what kind of shift. | |
6621 | The result of the shift is RESULT_MODE. X, if non-zero, is an expression | |
6622 | that we started with. | |
6623 | ||
6624 | The shift is normally computed in the widest mode we find in VAROP, as | |
6625 | long as it isn't a different number of words than RESULT_MODE. Exceptions | |
6626 | are ASHIFTRT and ROTATE, which are always done in their original mode, */ | |
6627 | ||
6628 | static rtx | |
6629 | simplify_shift_const (x, code, result_mode, varop, count) | |
6630 | rtx x; | |
6631 | enum rtx_code code; | |
6632 | enum machine_mode result_mode; | |
6633 | rtx varop; | |
6634 | int count; | |
6635 | { | |
6636 | enum rtx_code orig_code = code; | |
6637 | int orig_count = count; | |
6638 | enum machine_mode mode = result_mode; | |
6639 | enum machine_mode shift_mode, tmode; | |
6640 | int mode_words | |
6641 | = (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD; | |
6642 | /* We form (outer_op (code varop count) (outer_const)). */ | |
6643 | enum rtx_code outer_op = NIL; | |
5f4f0e22 | 6644 | HOST_WIDE_INT outer_const; |
230d793d RS |
6645 | rtx const_rtx; |
6646 | int complement_p = 0; | |
6647 | rtx new; | |
6648 | ||
6649 | /* If we were given an invalid count, don't do anything except exactly | |
6650 | what was requested. */ | |
6651 | ||
6652 | if (count < 0 || count > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)) | |
6653 | { | |
6654 | if (x) | |
6655 | return x; | |
6656 | ||
5f4f0e22 | 6657 | return gen_rtx (code, mode, varop, GEN_INT (count)); |
230d793d RS |
6658 | } |
6659 | ||
6660 | /* Unless one of the branches of the `if' in this loop does a `continue', | |
6661 | we will `break' the loop after the `if'. */ | |
6662 | ||
6663 | while (count != 0) | |
6664 | { | |
6665 | /* If we have an operand of (clobber (const_int 0)), just return that | |
6666 | value. */ | |
6667 | if (GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER) | |
6668 | return varop; | |
6669 | ||
6670 | /* If we discovered we had to complement VAROP, leave. Making a NOT | |
6671 | here would cause an infinite loop. */ | |
6672 | if (complement_p) | |
6673 | break; | |
6674 | ||
6675 | /* Convert ROTATETRT to ROTATE. */ | |
6676 | if (code == ROTATERT) | |
6677 | code = ROTATE, count = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode) - count; | |
6678 | ||
6679 | /* Canonicalize LSHIFT to ASHIFT. */ | |
6680 | if (code == LSHIFT) | |
6681 | code = ASHIFT; | |
6682 | ||
6683 | /* We need to determine what mode we will do the shift in. If the | |
6684 | shift is a ASHIFTRT or ROTATE, we must always do it in the mode it | |
6685 | was originally done in. Otherwise, we can do it in MODE, the widest | |
6686 | mode encountered. */ | |
6687 | shift_mode = (code == ASHIFTRT || code == ROTATE ? result_mode : mode); | |
6688 | ||
6689 | /* Handle cases where the count is greater than the size of the mode | |
6690 | minus 1. For ASHIFT, use the size minus one as the count (this can | |
6691 | occur when simplifying (lshiftrt (ashiftrt ..))). For rotates, | |
6692 | take the count modulo the size. For other shifts, the result is | |
6693 | zero. | |
6694 | ||
6695 | Since these shifts are being produced by the compiler by combining | |
6696 | multiple operations, each of which are defined, we know what the | |
6697 | result is supposed to be. */ | |
6698 | ||
6699 | if (count > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (shift_mode) - 1) | |
6700 | { | |
6701 | if (code == ASHIFTRT) | |
6702 | count = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (shift_mode) - 1; | |
6703 | else if (code == ROTATE || code == ROTATERT) | |
6704 | count %= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (shift_mode); | |
6705 | else | |
6706 | { | |
6707 | /* We can't simply return zero because there may be an | |
6708 | outer op. */ | |
6709 | varop = const0_rtx; | |
6710 | count = 0; | |
6711 | break; | |
6712 | } | |
6713 | } | |
6714 | ||
6715 | /* Negative counts are invalid and should not have been made (a | |
6716 | programmer-specified negative count should have been handled | |
6717 | above). */ | |
6718 | else if (count < 0) | |
6719 | abort (); | |
6720 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6721 | /* An arithmetic right shift of a quantity known to be -1 or 0 |
6722 | is a no-op. */ | |
6723 | if (code == ASHIFTRT | |
6724 | && (num_sign_bit_copies (varop, shift_mode) | |
6725 | == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (shift_mode))) | |
6726 | { | |
6727 | count = 0; | |
6728 | break; | |
6729 | } | |
6730 | ||
230d793d RS |
6731 | /* We simplify the tests below and elsewhere by converting |
6732 | ASHIFTRT to LSHIFTRT if we know the sign bit is clear. | |
6733 | `make_compound_operation' will convert it to a ASHIFTRT for | |
6734 | those machines (such as Vax) that don't have a LSHIFTRT. */ | |
5f4f0e22 | 6735 | if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (shift_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d | 6736 | && code == ASHIFTRT |
5f4f0e22 CH |
6737 | && ((significant_bits (varop, shift_mode) |
6738 | & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (shift_mode) - 1))) | |
6739 | == 0)) | |
230d793d RS |
6740 | code = LSHIFTRT; |
6741 | ||
6742 | switch (GET_CODE (varop)) | |
6743 | { | |
6744 | case SIGN_EXTEND: | |
6745 | case ZERO_EXTEND: | |
6746 | case SIGN_EXTRACT: | |
6747 | case ZERO_EXTRACT: | |
6748 | new = expand_compound_operation (varop); | |
6749 | if (new != varop) | |
6750 | { | |
6751 | varop = new; | |
6752 | continue; | |
6753 | } | |
6754 | break; | |
6755 | ||
6756 | case MEM: | |
6757 | /* If we have (xshiftrt (mem ...) C) and C is MODE_WIDTH | |
6758 | minus the width of a smaller mode, we can do this with a | |
6759 | SIGN_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTEND from the narrower memory location. */ | |
6760 | if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT) | |
6761 | && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (varop, 0)) | |
6762 | && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (varop) | |
6763 | && (tmode = mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - count, | |
6764 | MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode) | |
6765 | { | |
6766 | #if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN | |
6767 | new = gen_rtx (MEM, tmode, XEXP (varop, 0)); | |
6768 | #else | |
6769 | new = gen_rtx (MEM, tmode, | |
6770 | plus_constant (XEXP (varop, 0), | |
6771 | count / BITS_PER_UNIT)); | |
6772 | RTX_UNCHANGING_P (new) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (varop); | |
6773 | MEM_VOLATILE_P (new) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (varop); | |
6774 | MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (new) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (varop); | |
6775 | #endif | |
6776 | varop = gen_rtx_combine (code == ASHIFTRT ? SIGN_EXTEND | |
6777 | : ZERO_EXTEND, mode, new); | |
6778 | count = 0; | |
6779 | continue; | |
6780 | } | |
6781 | break; | |
6782 | ||
6783 | case USE: | |
6784 | /* Similar to the case above, except that we can only do this if | |
6785 | the resulting mode is the same as that of the underlying | |
6786 | MEM and adjust the address depending on the *bits* endianness | |
6787 | because of the way that bit-field extract insns are defined. */ | |
6788 | if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT) | |
6789 | && (tmode = mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - count, | |
6790 | MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode | |
6791 | && tmode == GET_MODE (XEXP (varop, 0))) | |
6792 | { | |
6793 | #if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN | |
6794 | new = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
6795 | #else | |
6796 | new = copy_rtx (XEXP (varop, 0)); | |
6797 | SUBST (XEXP (new, 0), | |
6798 | plus_constant (XEXP (new, 0), | |
6799 | count / BITS_PER_UNIT)); | |
6800 | #endif | |
6801 | ||
6802 | varop = gen_rtx_combine (code == ASHIFTRT ? SIGN_EXTEND | |
6803 | : ZERO_EXTEND, mode, new); | |
6804 | count = 0; | |
6805 | continue; | |
6806 | } | |
6807 | break; | |
6808 | ||
6809 | case SUBREG: | |
6810 | /* If VAROP is a SUBREG, strip it as long as the inner operand has | |
6811 | the same number of words as what we've seen so far. Then store | |
6812 | the widest mode in MODE. */ | |
f9e67232 RS |
6813 | if (subreg_lowpart_p (varop) |
6814 | && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop))) | |
6815 | > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (varop))) | |
230d793d RS |
6816 | && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop))) |
6817 | + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD) | |
6818 | == mode_words)) | |
6819 | { | |
6820 | varop = SUBREG_REG (varop); | |
6821 | if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (varop)) > GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)) | |
6822 | mode = GET_MODE (varop); | |
6823 | continue; | |
6824 | } | |
6825 | break; | |
6826 | ||
6827 | case MULT: | |
6828 | /* Some machines use MULT instead of ASHIFT because MULT | |
6829 | is cheaper. But it is still better on those machines to | |
6830 | merge two shifts into one. */ | |
6831 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
6832 | && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1))) >= 0) | |
6833 | { | |
6834 | varop = gen_binary (ASHIFT, GET_MODE (varop), XEXP (varop, 0), | |
5f4f0e22 | 6835 | GEN_INT (exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)))));; |
230d793d RS |
6836 | continue; |
6837 | } | |
6838 | break; | |
6839 | ||
6840 | case UDIV: | |
6841 | /* Similar, for when divides are cheaper. */ | |
6842 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
6843 | && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1))) >= 0) | |
6844 | { | |
6845 | varop = gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (varop), XEXP (varop, 0), | |
5f4f0e22 | 6846 | GEN_INT (exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1))))); |
230d793d RS |
6847 | continue; |
6848 | } | |
6849 | break; | |
6850 | ||
6851 | case ASHIFTRT: | |
6852 | /* If we are extracting just the sign bit of an arithmetic right | |
6853 | shift, that shift is not needed. */ | |
6854 | if (code == LSHIFTRT && count == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode) - 1) | |
6855 | { | |
6856 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
6857 | continue; | |
6858 | } | |
6859 | ||
6860 | /* ... fall through ... */ | |
6861 | ||
6862 | case LSHIFTRT: | |
6863 | case ASHIFT: | |
6864 | case LSHIFT: | |
6865 | case ROTATE: | |
6866 | /* Here we have two nested shifts. The result is usually the | |
6867 | AND of a new shift with a mask. We compute the result below. */ | |
6868 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
6869 | && INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) >= 0 | |
6870 | && INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (varop)) | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
6871 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
6872 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) | |
230d793d RS |
6873 | { |
6874 | enum rtx_code first_code = GET_CODE (varop); | |
6875 | int first_count = INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)); | |
5f4f0e22 | 6876 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask; |
230d793d RS |
6877 | rtx mask_rtx; |
6878 | rtx inner; | |
6879 | ||
6880 | if (first_code == LSHIFT) | |
6881 | first_code = ASHIFT; | |
6882 | ||
6883 | /* We have one common special case. We can't do any merging if | |
6884 | the inner code is an ASHIFTRT of a smaller mode. However, if | |
6885 | we have (ashift:M1 (subreg:M1 (ashiftrt:M2 FOO C1) 0) C2) | |
6886 | with C2 == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (M1) - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (M2), | |
6887 | we can convert it to | |
6888 | (ashiftrt:M1 (ashift:M1 (and:M1 (subreg:M1 FOO 0 C2) C3) C1). | |
6889 | This simplifies certain SIGN_EXTEND operations. */ | |
6890 | if (code == ASHIFT && first_code == ASHIFTRT | |
6891 | && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode) | |
6892 | - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (varop))) == count) | |
6893 | { | |
6894 | /* C3 has the low-order C1 bits zero. */ | |
6895 | ||
5f4f0e22 CH |
6896 | mask = (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) |
6897 | & ~ (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << first_count) - 1)); | |
230d793d | 6898 | |
5f4f0e22 | 6899 | varop = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, result_mode, |
230d793d | 6900 | XEXP (varop, 0), mask); |
5f4f0e22 | 6901 | varop = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, result_mode, |
230d793d RS |
6902 | varop, count); |
6903 | count = first_count; | |
6904 | code = ASHIFTRT; | |
6905 | continue; | |
6906 | } | |
6907 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6908 | /* If this was (ashiftrt (ashift foo C1) C2) and FOO has more |
6909 | than C1 high-order bits equal to the sign bit, we can convert | |
6910 | this to either an ASHIFT or a ASHIFTRT depending on the | |
6911 | two counts. | |
230d793d RS |
6912 | |
6913 | We cannot do this if VAROP's mode is not SHIFT_MODE. */ | |
6914 | ||
6915 | if (code == ASHIFTRT && first_code == ASHIFT | |
6916 | && GET_MODE (varop) == shift_mode | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6917 | && (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (varop, 0), shift_mode) |
6918 | > first_count)) | |
230d793d | 6919 | { |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
6920 | count -= first_count; |
6921 | if (count < 0) | |
6922 | count = - count, code = ASHIFT; | |
6923 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
6924 | continue; | |
230d793d RS |
6925 | } |
6926 | ||
6927 | /* There are some cases we can't do. If CODE is ASHIFTRT, | |
6928 | we can only do this if FIRST_CODE is also ASHIFTRT. | |
6929 | ||
6930 | We can't do the case when CODE is ROTATE and FIRST_CODE is | |
6931 | ASHIFTRT. | |
6932 | ||
6933 | If the mode of this shift is not the mode of the outer shift, | |
6934 | we can't do this if either shift is ASHIFTRT or ROTATE. | |
6935 | ||
6936 | Finally, we can't do any of these if the mode is too wide | |
6937 | unless the codes are the same. | |
6938 | ||
6939 | Handle the case where the shift codes are the same | |
6940 | first. */ | |
6941 | ||
6942 | if (code == first_code) | |
6943 | { | |
6944 | if (GET_MODE (varop) != result_mode | |
6945 | && (code == ASHIFTRT || code == ROTATE)) | |
6946 | break; | |
6947 | ||
6948 | count += first_count; | |
6949 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
6950 | continue; | |
6951 | } | |
6952 | ||
6953 | if (code == ASHIFTRT | |
6954 | || (code == ROTATE && first_code == ASHIFTRT) | |
5f4f0e22 | 6955 | || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d RS |
6956 | || (GET_MODE (varop) != result_mode |
6957 | && (first_code == ASHIFTRT || first_code == ROTATE | |
6958 | || code == ROTATE))) | |
6959 | break; | |
6960 | ||
6961 | /* To compute the mask to apply after the shift, shift the | |
6962 | significant bits of the inner shift the same way the | |
6963 | outer shift will. */ | |
6964 | ||
5f4f0e22 | 6965 | mask_rtx = GEN_INT (significant_bits (varop, GET_MODE (varop))); |
230d793d RS |
6966 | |
6967 | mask_rtx | |
6968 | = simplify_binary_operation (code, result_mode, mask_rtx, | |
5f4f0e22 | 6969 | GEN_INT (count)); |
230d793d RS |
6970 | |
6971 | /* Give up if we can't compute an outer operation to use. */ | |
6972 | if (mask_rtx == 0 | |
6973 | || GET_CODE (mask_rtx) != CONST_INT | |
6974 | || ! merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, AND, | |
6975 | INTVAL (mask_rtx), | |
6976 | result_mode, &complement_p)) | |
6977 | break; | |
6978 | ||
6979 | /* If the shifts are in the same direction, we add the | |
6980 | counts. Otherwise, we subtract them. */ | |
6981 | if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT) | |
6982 | == (first_code == ASHIFTRT || first_code == LSHIFTRT)) | |
6983 | count += first_count; | |
6984 | else | |
6985 | count -= first_count; | |
6986 | ||
6987 | /* If COUNT is positive, the new shift is usually CODE, | |
6988 | except for the two exceptions below, in which case it is | |
6989 | FIRST_CODE. If the count is negative, FIRST_CODE should | |
6990 | always be used */ | |
6991 | if (count > 0 | |
6992 | && ((first_code == ROTATE && code == ASHIFT) | |
6993 | || (first_code == ASHIFTRT && code == LSHIFTRT))) | |
6994 | code = first_code; | |
6995 | else if (count < 0) | |
6996 | code = first_code, count = - count; | |
6997 | ||
6998 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
6999 | continue; | |
7000 | } | |
7001 | ||
7002 | /* If we have (A << B << C) for any shift, we can convert this to | |
7003 | (A << C << B). This wins if A is a constant. Only try this if | |
7004 | B is not a constant. */ | |
7005 | ||
7006 | else if (GET_CODE (varop) == code | |
7007 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 1)) != CONST_INT | |
7008 | && 0 != (new | |
7009 | = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, | |
7010 | XEXP (varop, 0), | |
5f4f0e22 | 7011 | GEN_INT (count)))) |
230d793d RS |
7012 | { |
7013 | varop = gen_rtx_combine (code, mode, new, XEXP (varop, 1)); | |
7014 | count = 0; | |
7015 | continue; | |
7016 | } | |
7017 | break; | |
7018 | ||
7019 | case NOT: | |
7020 | /* Make this fit the case below. */ | |
7021 | varop = gen_rtx_combine (XOR, mode, XEXP (varop, 0), | |
5f4f0e22 | 7022 | GEN_INT (GET_MODE_MASK (mode))); |
230d793d RS |
7023 | continue; |
7024 | ||
7025 | case IOR: | |
7026 | case AND: | |
7027 | case XOR: | |
7028 | /* If we have (xshiftrt (ior (plus X (const_int -1)) X) C) | |
7029 | with C the size of VAROP - 1 and the shift is logical if | |
7030 | STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 and arithmetic if STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1, | |
7031 | we have an (le X 0) operation. If we have an arithmetic shift | |
7032 | and STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 or we have a logical shift with | |
7033 | STORE_FLAG_VALUE of -1, we have a (neg (le X 0)) operation. */ | |
7034 | ||
7035 | if (GET_CODE (varop) == IOR && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == PLUS | |
7036 | && XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1) == constm1_rtx | |
7037 | && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1) | |
7038 | && (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT) | |
7039 | && count == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (varop)) - 1 | |
7040 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 0), XEXP (varop, 1))) | |
7041 | { | |
7042 | count = 0; | |
7043 | varop = gen_rtx_combine (LE, GET_MODE (varop), XEXP (varop, 1), | |
7044 | const0_rtx); | |
7045 | ||
7046 | if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 ? code == ASHIFTRT : code == LSHIFTRT) | |
7047 | varop = gen_rtx_combine (NEG, GET_MODE (varop), varop); | |
7048 | ||
7049 | continue; | |
7050 | } | |
7051 | ||
7052 | /* If we have (shift (logical)), move the logical to the outside | |
7053 | to allow it to possibly combine with another logical and the | |
7054 | shift to combine with another shift. This also canonicalizes to | |
7055 | what a ZERO_EXTRACT looks like. Also, some machines have | |
7056 | (and (shift)) insns. */ | |
7057 | ||
7058 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
7059 | && (new = simplify_binary_operation (code, result_mode, | |
7060 | XEXP (varop, 1), | |
5f4f0e22 | 7061 | GEN_INT (count))) != 0 |
230d793d RS |
7062 | && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, GET_CODE (varop), |
7063 | INTVAL (new), result_mode, &complement_p)) | |
7064 | { | |
7065 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
7066 | continue; | |
7067 | } | |
7068 | ||
7069 | /* If we can't do that, try to simplify the shift in each arm of the | |
7070 | logical expression, make a new logical expression, and apply | |
7071 | the inverse distributive law. */ | |
7072 | { | |
5f4f0e22 | 7073 | rtx lhs = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, code, result_mode, |
230d793d | 7074 | XEXP (varop, 0), count); |
5f4f0e22 | 7075 | rtx rhs = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, code, result_mode, |
230d793d RS |
7076 | XEXP (varop, 1), count); |
7077 | ||
7078 | varop = gen_binary (GET_CODE (varop), result_mode, lhs, rhs); | |
7079 | varop = apply_distributive_law (varop); | |
7080 | ||
7081 | count = 0; | |
7082 | } | |
7083 | break; | |
7084 | ||
7085 | case EQ: | |
7086 | /* convert (lshift (eq FOO 0) C) to (xor FOO 1) if STORE_FLAG_VALUE | |
7087 | says that the sign bit can be tested, FOO has mode MODE, C is | |
7088 | GET_MODE_BITSIZE (MODE) - 1, and FOO has only the low-order bit | |
7089 | significant. */ | |
7090 | if (code == LSHIFT | |
7091 | && XEXP (varop, 1) == const0_rtx | |
7092 | && GET_MODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == result_mode | |
7093 | && count == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode) - 1 | |
5f4f0e22 | 7094 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d | 7095 | && ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE |
5f4f0e22 | 7096 | & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode) - 1)))) |
230d793d | 7097 | && significant_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) == 1 |
5f4f0e22 CH |
7098 | && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, XOR, |
7099 | (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1, result_mode, | |
7100 | &complement_p)) | |
230d793d RS |
7101 | { |
7102 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
7103 | count = 0; | |
7104 | continue; | |
7105 | } | |
7106 | break; | |
7107 | ||
7108 | case NEG: | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
7109 | /* (lshiftrt (neg A) C) where A is either 0 or 1 and C is one less |
7110 | than the number of bits in the mode is equivalent to A. */ | |
7111 | if (code == LSHIFTRT && count == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode) - 1 | |
230d793d RS |
7112 | && significant_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) == 1) |
7113 | { | |
d0ab8cd3 | 7114 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); |
230d793d RS |
7115 | count = 0; |
7116 | continue; | |
7117 | } | |
7118 | ||
7119 | /* NEG commutes with ASHIFT since it is multiplication. Move the | |
7120 | NEG outside to allow shifts to combine. */ | |
7121 | if (code == ASHIFT | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
7122 | && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, NEG, |
7123 | (HOST_WIDE_INT) 0, result_mode, | |
7124 | &complement_p)) | |
230d793d RS |
7125 | { |
7126 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
7127 | continue; | |
7128 | } | |
7129 | break; | |
7130 | ||
7131 | case PLUS: | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
7132 | /* (lshiftrt (plus A -1) C) where A is either 0 or 1 and C |
7133 | is one less than the number of bits in the mode is | |
7134 | equivalent to (xor A 1). */ | |
230d793d RS |
7135 | if (code == LSHIFTRT && count == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode) - 1 |
7136 | && XEXP (varop, 1) == constm1_rtx | |
7137 | && significant_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) == 1 | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
7138 | && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, XOR, |
7139 | (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1, result_mode, | |
7140 | &complement_p)) | |
230d793d RS |
7141 | { |
7142 | count = 0; | |
7143 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
7144 | continue; | |
7145 | } | |
7146 | ||
3f508eca RK |
7147 | /* If we have (xshiftrt (plus FOO BAR) C), and the only bits |
7148 | significant in BAR are those being shifted out and those | |
7149 | bits are known zero in FOO, we can replace the PLUS with FOO. | |
7150 | Similarly in the other operand order. This code occurs when | |
7151 | we are computing the size of a variable-size array. */ | |
7152 | ||
7153 | if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT) | |
5f4f0e22 | 7154 | && count < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
3f508eca RK |
7155 | && significant_bits (XEXP (varop, 1), result_mode) >> count == 0 |
7156 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (varop, 1), result_mode) | |
7157 | & significant_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode)) == 0) | |
7158 | { | |
7159 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
7160 | continue; | |
7161 | } | |
7162 | else if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT) | |
5f4f0e22 | 7163 | && count < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
ac49a949 | 7164 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
3f508eca RK |
7165 | && 0 == (significant_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) |
7166 | >> count) | |
7167 | && 0 == (significant_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) | |
7168 | & significant_bits (XEXP (varop, 1), | |
7169 | result_mode))) | |
7170 | { | |
7171 | varop = XEXP (varop, 1); | |
7172 | continue; | |
7173 | } | |
7174 | ||
230d793d RS |
7175 | /* (ashift (plus foo C) N) is (plus (ashift foo N) C'). */ |
7176 | if (code == ASHIFT | |
7177 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
7178 | && (new = simplify_binary_operation (ASHIFT, result_mode, | |
7179 | XEXP (varop, 1), | |
5f4f0e22 | 7180 | GEN_INT (count))) != 0 |
230d793d RS |
7181 | && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, PLUS, |
7182 | INTVAL (new), result_mode, &complement_p)) | |
7183 | { | |
7184 | varop = XEXP (varop, 0); | |
7185 | continue; | |
7186 | } | |
7187 | break; | |
7188 | ||
7189 | case MINUS: | |
7190 | /* If we have (xshiftrt (minus (ashiftrt X C)) X) C) | |
7191 | with C the size of VAROP - 1 and the shift is logical if | |
7192 | STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 and arithmetic if STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1, | |
7193 | we have a (gt X 0) operation. If the shift is arithmetic with | |
7194 | STORE_FLAG_VALUE of 1 or logical with STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1, | |
7195 | we have a (neg (gt X 0)) operation. */ | |
7196 | ||
7197 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == ASHIFTRT | |
7198 | && count == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (varop)) - 1 | |
7199 | && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1) | |
7200 | && (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT) | |
7201 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
7202 | && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) == count | |
7203 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 0), XEXP (varop, 1))) | |
7204 | { | |
7205 | count = 0; | |
7206 | varop = gen_rtx_combine (GT, GET_MODE (varop), XEXP (varop, 1), | |
7207 | const0_rtx); | |
7208 | ||
7209 | if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 ? code == ASHIFTRT : code == LSHIFTRT) | |
7210 | varop = gen_rtx_combine (NEG, GET_MODE (varop), varop); | |
7211 | ||
7212 | continue; | |
7213 | } | |
7214 | break; | |
7215 | } | |
7216 | ||
7217 | break; | |
7218 | } | |
7219 | ||
7220 | /* We need to determine what mode to do the shift in. If the shift is | |
7221 | a ASHIFTRT or ROTATE, we must always do it in the mode it was originally | |
7222 | done in. Otherwise, we can do it in MODE, the widest mode encountered. | |
7223 | The code we care about is that of the shift that will actually be done, | |
7224 | not the shift that was originally requested. */ | |
7225 | shift_mode = (code == ASHIFTRT || code == ROTATE ? result_mode : mode); | |
7226 | ||
7227 | /* We have now finished analyzing the shift. The result should be | |
7228 | a shift of type CODE with SHIFT_MODE shifting VAROP COUNT places. If | |
7229 | OUTER_OP is non-NIL, it is an operation that needs to be applied | |
7230 | to the result of the shift. OUTER_CONST is the relevant constant, | |
7231 | but we must turn off all bits turned off in the shift. | |
7232 | ||
7233 | If we were passed a value for X, see if we can use any pieces of | |
7234 | it. If not, make new rtx. */ | |
7235 | ||
7236 | if (x && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x)) == '2' | |
7237 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
7238 | && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) == count) | |
7239 | const_rtx = XEXP (x, 1); | |
7240 | else | |
5f4f0e22 | 7241 | const_rtx = GEN_INT (count); |
230d793d RS |
7242 | |
7243 | if (x && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG | |
7244 | && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == shift_mode | |
7245 | && SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)) == varop) | |
7246 | varop = XEXP (x, 0); | |
7247 | else if (GET_MODE (varop) != shift_mode) | |
7248 | varop = gen_lowpart_for_combine (shift_mode, varop); | |
7249 | ||
7250 | /* If we can't make the SUBREG, try to return what we were given. */ | |
7251 | if (GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER) | |
7252 | return x ? x : varop; | |
7253 | ||
7254 | new = simplify_binary_operation (code, shift_mode, varop, const_rtx); | |
7255 | if (new != 0) | |
7256 | x = new; | |
7257 | else | |
7258 | { | |
7259 | if (x == 0 || GET_CODE (x) != code || GET_MODE (x) != shift_mode) | |
7260 | x = gen_rtx_combine (code, shift_mode, varop, const_rtx); | |
7261 | ||
7262 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), varop); | |
7263 | SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), const_rtx); | |
7264 | } | |
7265 | ||
7266 | /* If we were doing a LSHIFTRT in a wider mode than it was originally, | |
7267 | turn off all the bits that the shift would have turned off. */ | |
7268 | if (orig_code == LSHIFTRT && result_mode != shift_mode) | |
5f4f0e22 | 7269 | x = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, shift_mode, x, |
230d793d RS |
7270 | GET_MODE_MASK (result_mode) >> orig_count); |
7271 | ||
7272 | /* Do the remainder of the processing in RESULT_MODE. */ | |
7273 | x = gen_lowpart_for_combine (result_mode, x); | |
7274 | ||
7275 | /* If COMPLEMENT_P is set, we have to complement X before doing the outer | |
7276 | operation. */ | |
7277 | if (complement_p) | |
7278 | x = gen_unary (NOT, result_mode, x); | |
7279 | ||
7280 | if (outer_op != NIL) | |
7281 | { | |
5f4f0e22 | 7282 | if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
230d793d RS |
7283 | outer_const &= GET_MODE_MASK (result_mode); |
7284 | ||
7285 | if (outer_op == AND) | |
5f4f0e22 | 7286 | x = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, result_mode, x, outer_const); |
230d793d RS |
7287 | else if (outer_op == SET) |
7288 | /* This means that we have determined that the result is | |
7289 | equivalent to a constant. This should be rare. */ | |
5f4f0e22 | 7290 | x = GEN_INT (outer_const); |
230d793d RS |
7291 | else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (outer_op) == '1') |
7292 | x = gen_unary (outer_op, result_mode, x); | |
7293 | else | |
5f4f0e22 | 7294 | x = gen_binary (outer_op, result_mode, x, GEN_INT (outer_const)); |
230d793d RS |
7295 | } |
7296 | ||
7297 | return x; | |
7298 | } | |
7299 | \f | |
7300 | /* Like recog, but we receive the address of a pointer to a new pattern. | |
7301 | We try to match the rtx that the pointer points to. | |
7302 | If that fails, we may try to modify or replace the pattern, | |
7303 | storing the replacement into the same pointer object. | |
7304 | ||
7305 | Modifications include deletion or addition of CLOBBERs. | |
7306 | ||
7307 | PNOTES is a pointer to a location where any REG_UNUSED notes added for | |
7308 | the CLOBBERs are placed. | |
7309 | ||
7310 | The value is the final insn code from the pattern ultimately matched, | |
7311 | or -1. */ | |
7312 | ||
7313 | static int | |
7314 | recog_for_combine (pnewpat, insn, pnotes) | |
7315 | rtx *pnewpat; | |
7316 | rtx insn; | |
7317 | rtx *pnotes; | |
7318 | { | |
7319 | register rtx pat = *pnewpat; | |
7320 | int insn_code_number; | |
7321 | int num_clobbers_to_add = 0; | |
7322 | int i; | |
7323 | rtx notes = 0; | |
7324 | ||
7325 | /* Is the result of combination a valid instruction? */ | |
7326 | insn_code_number = recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers_to_add); | |
7327 | ||
7328 | /* If it isn't, there is the possibility that we previously had an insn | |
7329 | that clobbered some register as a side effect, but the combined | |
7330 | insn doesn't need to do that. So try once more without the clobbers | |
7331 | unless this represents an ASM insn. */ | |
7332 | ||
7333 | if (insn_code_number < 0 && ! check_asm_operands (pat) | |
7334 | && GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL) | |
7335 | { | |
7336 | int pos; | |
7337 | ||
7338 | for (pos = 0, i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++) | |
7339 | if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) != CLOBBER) | |
7340 | { | |
7341 | if (i != pos) | |
7342 | SUBST (XVECEXP (pat, 0, pos), XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)); | |
7343 | pos++; | |
7344 | } | |
7345 | ||
7346 | SUBST_INT (XVECLEN (pat, 0), pos); | |
7347 | ||
7348 | if (pos == 1) | |
7349 | pat = XVECEXP (pat, 0, 0); | |
7350 | ||
7351 | insn_code_number = recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers_to_add); | |
7352 | } | |
7353 | ||
7354 | /* If we had any clobbers to add, make a new pattern than contains | |
7355 | them. Then check to make sure that all of them are dead. */ | |
7356 | if (num_clobbers_to_add) | |
7357 | { | |
7358 | rtx newpat = gen_rtx (PARALLEL, VOIDmode, | |
7359 | gen_rtvec (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL | |
7360 | ? XVECLEN (pat, 0) + num_clobbers_to_add | |
7361 | : num_clobbers_to_add + 1)); | |
7362 | ||
7363 | if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL) | |
7364 | for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++) | |
7365 | XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i) = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i); | |
7366 | else | |
7367 | XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0) = pat; | |
7368 | ||
7369 | add_clobbers (newpat, insn_code_number); | |
7370 | ||
7371 | for (i = XVECLEN (newpat, 0) - num_clobbers_to_add; | |
7372 | i < XVECLEN (newpat, 0); i++) | |
7373 | { | |
7374 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0)) == REG | |
7375 | && ! reg_dead_at_p (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0), insn)) | |
7376 | return -1; | |
7377 | notes = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_UNUSED, | |
7378 | XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0), notes); | |
7379 | } | |
7380 | pat = newpat; | |
7381 | } | |
7382 | ||
7383 | *pnewpat = pat; | |
7384 | *pnotes = notes; | |
7385 | ||
7386 | return insn_code_number; | |
7387 | } | |
7388 | \f | |
7389 | /* Like gen_lowpart but for use by combine. In combine it is not possible | |
7390 | to create any new pseudoregs. However, it is safe to create | |
7391 | invalid memory addresses, because combine will try to recognize | |
7392 | them and all they will do is make the combine attempt fail. | |
7393 | ||
7394 | If for some reason this cannot do its job, an rtx | |
7395 | (clobber (const_int 0)) is returned. | |
7396 | An insn containing that will not be recognized. */ | |
7397 | ||
7398 | #undef gen_lowpart | |
7399 | ||
7400 | static rtx | |
7401 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (mode, x) | |
7402 | enum machine_mode mode; | |
7403 | register rtx x; | |
7404 | { | |
7405 | rtx result; | |
7406 | ||
7407 | if (GET_MODE (x) == mode) | |
7408 | return x; | |
7409 | ||
7410 | if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > UNITS_PER_WORD) | |
7411 | return gen_rtx (CLOBBER, GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx); | |
7412 | ||
7413 | /* X might be a paradoxical (subreg (mem)). In that case, gen_lowpart | |
7414 | won't know what to do. So we will strip off the SUBREG here and | |
7415 | process normally. */ | |
7416 | if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == MEM) | |
7417 | { | |
7418 | x = SUBREG_REG (x); | |
7419 | if (GET_MODE (x) == mode) | |
7420 | return x; | |
7421 | } | |
7422 | ||
7423 | result = gen_lowpart_common (mode, x); | |
7424 | if (result) | |
7425 | return result; | |
7426 | ||
7427 | if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM) | |
7428 | { | |
7429 | register int offset = 0; | |
7430 | rtx new; | |
7431 | ||
7432 | /* Refuse to work on a volatile memory ref or one with a mode-dependent | |
7433 | address. */ | |
7434 | if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) || mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (x, 0))) | |
7435 | return gen_rtx (CLOBBER, GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx); | |
7436 | ||
7437 | /* If we want to refer to something bigger than the original memref, | |
7438 | generate a perverse subreg instead. That will force a reload | |
7439 | of the original memref X. */ | |
7440 | if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) < GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)) | |
7441 | return gen_rtx (SUBREG, mode, x, 0); | |
7442 | ||
7443 | #if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN | |
7444 | offset = (MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)), UNITS_PER_WORD) | |
7445 | - MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD)); | |
7446 | #endif | |
7447 | #if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN | |
7448 | /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data | |
7449 | is unchanged. */ | |
7450 | offset -= (MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)) | |
7451 | - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)))); | |
7452 | #endif | |
7453 | new = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, plus_constant (XEXP (x, 0), offset)); | |
7454 | RTX_UNCHANGING_P (new) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x); | |
7455 | MEM_VOLATILE_P (new) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (x); | |
7456 | MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (new) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x); | |
7457 | return new; | |
7458 | } | |
7459 | ||
7460 | /* If X is a comparison operator, rewrite it in a new mode. This | |
7461 | probably won't match, but may allow further simplifications. */ | |
7462 | else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x)) == '<') | |
7463 | return gen_rtx_combine (GET_CODE (x), mode, XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1)); | |
7464 | ||
7465 | /* If we couldn't simplify X any other way, just enclose it in a | |
7466 | SUBREG. Normally, this SUBREG won't match, but some patterns may | |
a7c99304 | 7467 | include an explicit SUBREG or we may simplify it further in combine. */ |
230d793d | 7468 | else |
dfbe1b2f RK |
7469 | { |
7470 | int word = 0; | |
7471 | ||
7472 | if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) > UNITS_PER_WORD) | |
7473 | word = ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) | |
7474 | - MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD)) | |
7475 | / UNITS_PER_WORD); | |
7476 | return gen_rtx (SUBREG, mode, x, word); | |
7477 | } | |
230d793d RS |
7478 | } |
7479 | \f | |
7480 | /* Make an rtx expression. This is a subset of gen_rtx and only supports | |
7481 | expressions of 1, 2, or 3 operands, each of which are rtx expressions. | |
7482 | ||
7483 | If the identical expression was previously in the insn (in the undobuf), | |
7484 | it will be returned. Only if it is not found will a new expression | |
7485 | be made. */ | |
7486 | ||
7487 | /*VARARGS2*/ | |
7488 | static rtx | |
7489 | gen_rtx_combine (va_alist) | |
7490 | va_dcl | |
7491 | { | |
7492 | va_list p; | |
7493 | enum rtx_code code; | |
7494 | enum machine_mode mode; | |
7495 | int n_args; | |
7496 | rtx args[3]; | |
7497 | int i, j; | |
7498 | char *fmt; | |
7499 | rtx rt; | |
7500 | ||
7501 | va_start (p); | |
7502 | code = va_arg (p, enum rtx_code); | |
7503 | mode = va_arg (p, enum machine_mode); | |
7504 | n_args = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); | |
7505 | fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code); | |
7506 | ||
7507 | if (n_args == 0 || n_args > 3) | |
7508 | abort (); | |
7509 | ||
7510 | /* Get each arg and verify that it is supposed to be an expression. */ | |
7511 | for (j = 0; j < n_args; j++) | |
7512 | { | |
7513 | if (*fmt++ != 'e') | |
7514 | abort (); | |
7515 | ||
7516 | args[j] = va_arg (p, rtx); | |
7517 | } | |
7518 | ||
7519 | /* See if this is in undobuf. Be sure we don't use objects that came | |
7520 | from another insn; this could produce circular rtl structures. */ | |
7521 | ||
7522 | for (i = previous_num_undos; i < undobuf.num_undo; i++) | |
7523 | if (!undobuf.undo[i].is_int | |
7c046e4e RK |
7524 | && GET_CODE (undobuf.undo[i].old_contents.rtx) == code |
7525 | && GET_MODE (undobuf.undo[i].old_contents.rtx) == mode) | |
230d793d RS |
7526 | { |
7527 | for (j = 0; j < n_args; j++) | |
7c046e4e | 7528 | if (XEXP (undobuf.undo[i].old_contents.rtx, j) != args[j]) |
230d793d RS |
7529 | break; |
7530 | ||
7531 | if (j == n_args) | |
7c046e4e | 7532 | return undobuf.undo[i].old_contents.rtx; |
230d793d RS |
7533 | } |
7534 | ||
7535 | /* Otherwise make a new rtx. We know we have 1, 2, or 3 args. | |
7536 | Use rtx_alloc instead of gen_rtx because it's faster on RISC. */ | |
7537 | rt = rtx_alloc (code); | |
7538 | PUT_MODE (rt, mode); | |
7539 | XEXP (rt, 0) = args[0]; | |
7540 | if (n_args > 1) | |
7541 | { | |
7542 | XEXP (rt, 1) = args[1]; | |
7543 | if (n_args > 2) | |
7544 | XEXP (rt, 2) = args[2]; | |
7545 | } | |
7546 | return rt; | |
7547 | } | |
7548 | ||
7549 | /* These routines make binary and unary operations by first seeing if they | |
7550 | fold; if not, a new expression is allocated. */ | |
7551 | ||
7552 | static rtx | |
7553 | gen_binary (code, mode, op0, op1) | |
7554 | enum rtx_code code; | |
7555 | enum machine_mode mode; | |
7556 | rtx op0, op1; | |
7557 | { | |
7558 | rtx result; | |
1a26b032 RK |
7559 | rtx tem; |
7560 | ||
7561 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c' | |
7562 | && (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT | |
7563 | || (CONSTANT_P (op0) && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT))) | |
7564 | tem = op0, op0 = op1, op1 = tem; | |
230d793d RS |
7565 | |
7566 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<') | |
7567 | { | |
7568 | enum machine_mode op_mode = GET_MODE (op0); | |
7569 | if (op_mode == VOIDmode) | |
7570 | op_mode = GET_MODE (op1); | |
7571 | result = simplify_relational_operation (code, op_mode, op0, op1); | |
7572 | } | |
7573 | else | |
7574 | result = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, op0, op1); | |
7575 | ||
7576 | if (result) | |
7577 | return result; | |
7578 | ||
7579 | /* Put complex operands first and constants second. */ | |
7580 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c' | |
7581 | && ((CONSTANT_P (op0) && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT) | |
7582 | || (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (op0)) == 'o' | |
7583 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (op1)) != 'o') | |
7584 | || (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG | |
7585 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) == 'o' | |
7586 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (op1)) != 'o'))) | |
7587 | return gen_rtx_combine (code, mode, op1, op0); | |
7588 | ||
7589 | return gen_rtx_combine (code, mode, op0, op1); | |
7590 | } | |
7591 | ||
7592 | static rtx | |
7593 | gen_unary (code, mode, op0) | |
7594 | enum rtx_code code; | |
7595 | enum machine_mode mode; | |
7596 | rtx op0; | |
7597 | { | |
7598 | rtx result = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, op0, mode); | |
7599 | ||
7600 | if (result) | |
7601 | return result; | |
7602 | ||
7603 | return gen_rtx_combine (code, mode, op0); | |
7604 | } | |
7605 | \f | |
7606 | /* Simplify a comparison between *POP0 and *POP1 where CODE is the | |
7607 | comparison code that will be tested. | |
7608 | ||
7609 | The result is a possibly different comparison code to use. *POP0 and | |
7610 | *POP1 may be updated. | |
7611 | ||
7612 | It is possible that we might detect that a comparison is either always | |
7613 | true or always false. However, we do not perform general constant | |
5089e22e | 7614 | folding in combine, so this knowledge isn't useful. Such tautologies |
230d793d RS |
7615 | should have been detected earlier. Hence we ignore all such cases. */ |
7616 | ||
7617 | static enum rtx_code | |
7618 | simplify_comparison (code, pop0, pop1) | |
7619 | enum rtx_code code; | |
7620 | rtx *pop0; | |
7621 | rtx *pop1; | |
7622 | { | |
7623 | rtx op0 = *pop0; | |
7624 | rtx op1 = *pop1; | |
7625 | rtx tem, tem1; | |
7626 | int i; | |
7627 | enum machine_mode mode, tmode; | |
7628 | ||
7629 | /* Try a few ways of applying the same transformation to both operands. */ | |
7630 | while (1) | |
7631 | { | |
7632 | /* If both operands are the same constant shift, see if we can ignore the | |
7633 | shift. We can if the shift is a rotate or if the bits shifted out of | |
7634 | this shift are not significant for either input and if the type of | |
7635 | comparison is compatible with the shift. */ | |
7636 | if (GET_CODE (op0) == GET_CODE (op1) | |
5f4f0e22 | 7637 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d RS |
7638 | && ((GET_CODE (op0) == ROTATE && (code == NE || code == EQ)) |
7639 | || ((GET_CODE (op0) == LSHIFTRT | |
7640 | || GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFT || GET_CODE (op0) == LSHIFT) | |
7641 | && (code != GT && code != LT && code != GE && code != LE)) | |
7642 | || (GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFTRT | |
7643 | && (code != GTU && code != LTU | |
7644 | && code != GEU && code != GEU))) | |
7645 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
7646 | && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) >= 0 | |
5f4f0e22 | 7647 | && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d RS |
7648 | && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (op1, 1)) |
7649 | { | |
7650 | enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op0); | |
5f4f0e22 | 7651 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode); |
230d793d RS |
7652 | int shift_count = INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)); |
7653 | ||
7654 | if (GET_CODE (op0) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFTRT) | |
7655 | mask &= (mask >> shift_count) << shift_count; | |
7656 | else if (GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFT || GET_CODE (op0) == LSHIFT) | |
7657 | mask = (mask & (mask << shift_count)) >> shift_count; | |
7658 | ||
7659 | if ((significant_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode) & ~ mask) == 0 | |
7660 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (op1, 0), mode) & ~ mask) == 0) | |
7661 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0), op1 = XEXP (op1, 0); | |
7662 | else | |
7663 | break; | |
7664 | } | |
7665 | ||
7666 | /* If both operands are AND's of a paradoxical SUBREG by constant, the | |
7667 | SUBREGs are of the same mode, and, in both cases, the AND would | |
7668 | be redundant if the comparison was done in the narrower mode, | |
7669 | do the comparison in the narrower mode (e.g., we are AND'ing with 1 | |
7670 | and the operand's significant bits are 0xffffff01; in that case if | |
7671 | we only care about QImode, we don't need the AND). This case occurs | |
7672 | if the output mode of an scc insn is not SImode and | |
7673 | STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 (e.g., the 386). */ | |
7674 | ||
7675 | else if (GET_CODE (op0) == AND && GET_CODE (op1) == AND | |
7676 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
7677 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
7678 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == SUBREG | |
7679 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 0)) == SUBREG | |
7680 | && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0))) | |
7681 | > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0, 0))))) | |
7682 | && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0, 0))) | |
7683 | == GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op1, 0)))) | |
ac49a949 RS |
7684 | && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0, 0)))) |
7685 | <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) | |
230d793d RS |
7686 | && (significant_bits (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0, 0)), |
7687 | GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0, 0)))) | |
7688 | & ~ INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))) == 0 | |
7689 | && (significant_bits (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op1, 0)), | |
7690 | GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op1, 0)))) | |
7691 | & ~ INTVAL (XEXP (op1, 1))) == 0) | |
7692 | { | |
7693 | op0 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0, 0)); | |
7694 | op1 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op1, 0)); | |
7695 | ||
7696 | /* the resulting comparison is always unsigned since we masked off | |
7697 | the original sign bit. */ | |
7698 | code = unsigned_condition (code); | |
7699 | } | |
7700 | else | |
7701 | break; | |
7702 | } | |
7703 | ||
7704 | /* If the first operand is a constant, swap the operands and adjust the | |
7705 | comparison code appropriately. */ | |
7706 | if (CONSTANT_P (op0)) | |
7707 | { | |
7708 | tem = op0, op0 = op1, op1 = tem; | |
7709 | code = swap_condition (code); | |
7710 | } | |
7711 | ||
7712 | /* We now enter a loop during which we will try to simplify the comparison. | |
7713 | For the most part, we only are concerned with comparisons with zero, | |
7714 | but some things may really be comparisons with zero but not start | |
7715 | out looking that way. */ | |
7716 | ||
7717 | while (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT) | |
7718 | { | |
7719 | enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op0); | |
7720 | int mode_width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode); | |
5f4f0e22 | 7721 | unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode); |
230d793d RS |
7722 | int equality_comparison_p; |
7723 | int sign_bit_comparison_p; | |
7724 | int unsigned_comparison_p; | |
5f4f0e22 | 7725 | HOST_WIDE_INT const_op; |
230d793d RS |
7726 | |
7727 | /* We only want to handle integral modes. This catches VOIDmode, | |
7728 | CCmode, and the floating-point modes. An exception is that we | |
7729 | can handle VOIDmode if OP0 is a COMPARE or a comparison | |
7730 | operation. */ | |
7731 | ||
7732 | if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT | |
7733 | && ! (mode == VOIDmode | |
7734 | && (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE | |
7735 | || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (op0)) == '<'))) | |
7736 | break; | |
7737 | ||
7738 | /* Get the constant we are comparing against and turn off all bits | |
7739 | not on in our mode. */ | |
7740 | const_op = INTVAL (op1); | |
5f4f0e22 | 7741 | if (mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
4803a34a | 7742 | const_op &= mask; |
230d793d RS |
7743 | |
7744 | /* If we are comparing against a constant power of two and the value | |
7745 | being compared has only that single significant bit (e.g., it was | |
7746 | `and'ed with that bit), we can replace this with a comparison | |
7747 | with zero. */ | |
7748 | if (const_op | |
7749 | && (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == GEU | |
7750 | || code == LT || code == LTU) | |
5f4f0e22 | 7751 | && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d RS |
7752 | && exact_log2 (const_op) >= 0 |
7753 | && significant_bits (op0, mode) == const_op) | |
7754 | { | |
7755 | code = (code == EQ || code == GE || code == GEU ? NE : EQ); | |
7756 | op1 = const0_rtx, const_op = 0; | |
7757 | } | |
7758 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
7759 | /* Similarly, if we are comparing a value known to be either -1 or |
7760 | 0 with -1, change it to the opposite comparison against zero. */ | |
7761 | ||
7762 | if (const_op == -1 | |
7763 | && (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GT || code == LE | |
7764 | || code == GEU || code == LTU) | |
7765 | && num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode) == mode_width) | |
7766 | { | |
7767 | code = (code == EQ || code == LE || code == GEU ? NE : EQ); | |
7768 | op1 = const0_rtx, const_op = 0; | |
7769 | } | |
7770 | ||
230d793d | 7771 | /* Do some canonicalizations based on the comparison code. We prefer |
4803a34a RK |
7772 | comparisons against zero and then prefer equality comparisons. |
7773 | If we can reduce the size of a constant, we will do that too. */ | |
230d793d RS |
7774 | |
7775 | switch (code) | |
7776 | { | |
7777 | case LT: | |
4803a34a RK |
7778 | /* < C is equivalent to <= (C - 1) */ |
7779 | if (const_op > 0) | |
230d793d | 7780 | { |
4803a34a | 7781 | const_op -= 1; |
5f4f0e22 | 7782 | op1 = GEN_INT (const_op); |
230d793d RS |
7783 | code = LE; |
7784 | /* ... fall through to LE case below. */ | |
7785 | } | |
7786 | else | |
7787 | break; | |
7788 | ||
7789 | case LE: | |
4803a34a RK |
7790 | /* <= C is equivalent to < (C + 1); we do this for C < 0 */ |
7791 | if (const_op < 0) | |
7792 | { | |
7793 | const_op += 1; | |
5f4f0e22 | 7794 | op1 = GEN_INT (const_op); |
4803a34a RK |
7795 | code = LT; |
7796 | } | |
230d793d RS |
7797 | |
7798 | /* If we are doing a <= 0 comparison on a value known to have | |
7799 | a zero sign bit, we can replace this with == 0. */ | |
7800 | else if (const_op == 0 | |
5f4f0e22 | 7801 | && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d | 7802 | && (significant_bits (op0, mode) |
5f4f0e22 | 7803 | & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1))) == 0) |
230d793d RS |
7804 | code = EQ; |
7805 | break; | |
7806 | ||
7807 | case GE: | |
4803a34a RK |
7808 | /* >= C is equivalent to > (C - 1). */ |
7809 | if (const_op > 0) | |
230d793d | 7810 | { |
4803a34a | 7811 | const_op -= 1; |
5f4f0e22 | 7812 | op1 = GEN_INT (const_op); |
230d793d RS |
7813 | code = GT; |
7814 | /* ... fall through to GT below. */ | |
7815 | } | |
7816 | else | |
7817 | break; | |
7818 | ||
7819 | case GT: | |
4803a34a RK |
7820 | /* > C is equivalent to >= (C + 1); we do this for C < 0*/ |
7821 | if (const_op < 0) | |
7822 | { | |
7823 | const_op += 1; | |
5f4f0e22 | 7824 | op1 = GEN_INT (const_op); |
4803a34a RK |
7825 | code = GE; |
7826 | } | |
230d793d RS |
7827 | |
7828 | /* If we are doing a > 0 comparison on a value known to have | |
7829 | a zero sign bit, we can replace this with != 0. */ | |
7830 | else if (const_op == 0 | |
5f4f0e22 | 7831 | && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d | 7832 | && (significant_bits (op0, mode) |
5f4f0e22 | 7833 | & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1))) == 0) |
230d793d RS |
7834 | code = NE; |
7835 | break; | |
7836 | ||
230d793d | 7837 | case LTU: |
4803a34a RK |
7838 | /* < C is equivalent to <= (C - 1). */ |
7839 | if (const_op > 0) | |
7840 | { | |
7841 | const_op -= 1; | |
5f4f0e22 | 7842 | op1 = GEN_INT (const_op); |
4803a34a RK |
7843 | code = LEU; |
7844 | /* ... fall through ... */ | |
7845 | } | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
7846 | |
7847 | /* (unsigned) < 0x80000000 is equivalent to >= 0. */ | |
7848 | else if (const_op == (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)) | |
7849 | { | |
7850 | const_op = 0, op1 = const0_rtx; | |
7851 | code = GE; | |
7852 | break; | |
7853 | } | |
4803a34a RK |
7854 | else |
7855 | break; | |
230d793d RS |
7856 | |
7857 | case LEU: | |
7858 | /* unsigned <= 0 is equivalent to == 0 */ | |
7859 | if (const_op == 0) | |
7860 | code = EQ; | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
7861 | |
7862 | /* (unsigned) <= 0x7fffffff is equivalent to >= 0. */ | |
7863 | else if (const_op == ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)) - 1) | |
7864 | { | |
7865 | const_op = 0, op1 = const0_rtx; | |
7866 | code = GE; | |
7867 | } | |
230d793d RS |
7868 | break; |
7869 | ||
4803a34a RK |
7870 | case GEU: |
7871 | /* >= C is equivalent to < (C - 1). */ | |
7872 | if (const_op > 1) | |
7873 | { | |
7874 | const_op -= 1; | |
5f4f0e22 | 7875 | op1 = GEN_INT (const_op); |
4803a34a RK |
7876 | code = GTU; |
7877 | /* ... fall through ... */ | |
7878 | } | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
7879 | |
7880 | /* (unsigned) >= 0x80000000 is equivalent to < 0. */ | |
7881 | else if (const_op == (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)) | |
7882 | { | |
7883 | const_op = 0, op1 = const0_rtx; | |
7884 | code = LT; | |
7885 | } | |
4803a34a RK |
7886 | else |
7887 | break; | |
7888 | ||
230d793d RS |
7889 | case GTU: |
7890 | /* unsigned > 0 is equivalent to != 0 */ | |
7891 | if (const_op == 0) | |
7892 | code = NE; | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
7893 | |
7894 | /* (unsigned) > 0x7fffffff is equivalent to < 0. */ | |
7895 | else if (const_op == ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)) - 1) | |
7896 | { | |
7897 | const_op = 0, op1 = const0_rtx; | |
7898 | code = LT; | |
7899 | } | |
230d793d RS |
7900 | break; |
7901 | } | |
7902 | ||
7903 | /* Compute some predicates to simplify code below. */ | |
7904 | ||
7905 | equality_comparison_p = (code == EQ || code == NE); | |
7906 | sign_bit_comparison_p = ((code == LT || code == GE) && const_op == 0); | |
7907 | unsigned_comparison_p = (code == LTU || code == LEU || code == GTU | |
7908 | || code == LEU); | |
7909 | ||
7910 | /* Now try cases based on the opcode of OP0. If none of the cases | |
7911 | does a "continue", we exit this loop immediately after the | |
7912 | switch. */ | |
7913 | ||
7914 | switch (GET_CODE (op0)) | |
7915 | { | |
7916 | case ZERO_EXTRACT: | |
7917 | /* If we are extracting a single bit from a variable position in | |
7918 | a constant that has only a single bit set and are comparing it | |
7919 | with zero, we can convert this into an equality comparison | |
7920 | between the position and the location of the single bit. We can't | |
7921 | do this if bit endian and we don't have an extzv since we then | |
7922 | can't know what mode to use for the endianness adjustment. */ | |
7923 | ||
7924 | #if ! BITS_BIG_ENDIAN || defined (HAVE_extzv) | |
7925 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == CONST_INT | |
7926 | && XEXP (op0, 1) == const1_rtx | |
7927 | && equality_comparison_p && const_op == 0 | |
7928 | && (i = exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 0)))) >= 0) | |
7929 | { | |
7930 | #if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN | |
7931 | i = (GET_MODE_BITSIZE | |
7932 | (insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_extzv][1]) - 1 - i); | |
7933 | #endif | |
7934 | ||
7935 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 2); | |
5f4f0e22 | 7936 | op1 = GEN_INT (i); |
230d793d RS |
7937 | const_op = i; |
7938 | ||
7939 | /* Result is nonzero iff shift count is equal to I. */ | |
7940 | code = reverse_condition (code); | |
7941 | continue; | |
7942 | } | |
7943 | #endif | |
7944 | ||
7945 | /* ... fall through ... */ | |
7946 | ||
7947 | case SIGN_EXTRACT: | |
7948 | tem = expand_compound_operation (op0); | |
7949 | if (tem != op0) | |
7950 | { | |
7951 | op0 = tem; | |
7952 | continue; | |
7953 | } | |
7954 | break; | |
7955 | ||
7956 | case NOT: | |
7957 | /* If testing for equality, we can take the NOT of the constant. */ | |
7958 | if (equality_comparison_p | |
7959 | && (tem = simplify_unary_operation (NOT, mode, op1, mode)) != 0) | |
7960 | { | |
7961 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
7962 | op1 = tem; | |
7963 | continue; | |
7964 | } | |
7965 | ||
7966 | /* If just looking at the sign bit, reverse the sense of the | |
7967 | comparison. */ | |
7968 | if (sign_bit_comparison_p) | |
7969 | { | |
7970 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
7971 | code = (code == GE ? LT : GE); | |
7972 | continue; | |
7973 | } | |
7974 | break; | |
7975 | ||
7976 | case NEG: | |
7977 | /* If testing for equality, we can take the NEG of the constant. */ | |
7978 | if (equality_comparison_p | |
7979 | && (tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op1, mode)) != 0) | |
7980 | { | |
7981 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
7982 | op1 = tem; | |
7983 | continue; | |
7984 | } | |
7985 | ||
7986 | /* The remaining cases only apply to comparisons with zero. */ | |
7987 | if (const_op != 0) | |
7988 | break; | |
7989 | ||
7990 | /* When X is ABS or is known positive, | |
7991 | (neg X) is < 0 if and only if X != 0. */ | |
7992 | ||
7993 | if (sign_bit_comparison_p | |
7994 | && (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ABS | |
5f4f0e22 | 7995 | || (mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d | 7996 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode) |
5f4f0e22 | 7997 | & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1))) == 0))) |
230d793d RS |
7998 | { |
7999 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
8000 | code = (code == LT ? NE : EQ); | |
8001 | continue; | |
8002 | } | |
8003 | ||
8004 | /* If we have NEG of something that is the result of a | |
8005 | SIGN_EXTEND, SIGN_EXTRACT, or ASHIFTRT, we know that the | |
8006 | two high-order bits must be the same and hence that | |
8007 | "(-a) < 0" is equivalent to "a > 0". Otherwise, we can't | |
8008 | do this. */ | |
8009 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == SIGN_EXTEND | |
8010 | || (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == SIGN_EXTRACT | |
8011 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8012 | && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) | |
8013 | < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0))))) | |
8014 | || (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFTRT | |
8015 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8016 | && XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1) != const0_rtx) | |
8017 | || ((tem = get_last_value (XEXP (op0, 0))) != 0 | |
8018 | && (GET_CODE (tem) == SIGN_EXTEND | |
8019 | || (GET_CODE (tem) == SIGN_EXTRACT | |
8020 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8021 | && (INTVAL (XEXP (tem, 1)) | |
8022 | < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (tem, 0))))) | |
8023 | || (GET_CODE (tem) == ASHIFTRT | |
8024 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8025 | && XEXP (tem, 1) != const0_rtx)))) | |
8026 | { | |
8027 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
8028 | code = swap_condition (code); | |
8029 | continue; | |
8030 | } | |
8031 | break; | |
8032 | ||
8033 | case ROTATE: | |
8034 | /* If we are testing equality and our count is a constant, we | |
8035 | can perform the inverse operation on our RHS. */ | |
8036 | if (equality_comparison_p && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8037 | && (tem = simplify_binary_operation (ROTATERT, mode, | |
8038 | op1, XEXP (op0, 1))) != 0) | |
8039 | { | |
8040 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
8041 | op1 = tem; | |
8042 | continue; | |
8043 | } | |
8044 | ||
8045 | /* If we are doing a < 0 or >= 0 comparison, it means we are testing | |
8046 | a particular bit. Convert it to an AND of a constant of that | |
8047 | bit. This will be converted into a ZERO_EXTRACT. */ | |
8048 | if (const_op == 0 && sign_bit_comparison_p | |
8049 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5f4f0e22 | 8050 | && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
230d793d | 8051 | { |
5f4f0e22 CH |
8052 | op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (op0, 0), |
8053 | ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 | |
8054 | << (mode_width - 1 | |
8055 | - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))))); | |
230d793d RS |
8056 | code = (code == LT ? NE : EQ); |
8057 | continue; | |
8058 | } | |
8059 | ||
8060 | /* ... fall through ... */ | |
8061 | ||
8062 | case ABS: | |
8063 | /* ABS is ignorable inside an equality comparison with zero. */ | |
8064 | if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p) | |
8065 | { | |
8066 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
8067 | continue; | |
8068 | } | |
8069 | break; | |
8070 | ||
8071 | ||
8072 | case SIGN_EXTEND: | |
8073 | /* Can simplify (compare (zero/sign_extend FOO) CONST) | |
8074 | to (compare FOO CONST) if CONST fits in FOO's mode and we | |
8075 | are either testing inequality or have an unsigned comparison | |
8076 | with ZERO_EXTEND or a signed comparison with SIGN_EXTEND. */ | |
8077 | if (! unsigned_comparison_p | |
8078 | && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0))) | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
8079 | <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
8080 | && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op | |
8081 | < (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 | |
8082 | << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0))) - 1))))) | |
230d793d RS |
8083 | { |
8084 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
8085 | continue; | |
8086 | } | |
8087 | break; | |
8088 | ||
8089 | case SUBREG: | |
a687e897 RK |
8090 | /* Check for the case where we are comparing A - C1 with C2, |
8091 | both constants are smaller than 1/2 the maxium positive | |
8092 | value in MODE, and the comparison is equality or unsigned. | |
8093 | In that case, if A is either zero-extended to MODE or has | |
8094 | sufficient sign bits so that the high-order bit in MODE | |
8095 | is a copy of the sign in the inner mode, we can prove that it is | |
8096 | safe to do the operation in the wider mode. This simplifies | |
8097 | many range checks. */ | |
8098 | ||
8099 | if (mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT | |
8100 | && subreg_lowpart_p (op0) | |
8101 | && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)) == PLUS | |
8102 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8103 | && INTVAL (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 1)) < 0 | |
8104 | && (- INTVAL (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 1)) | |
8105 | < GET_MODE_MASK (mode) / 2) | |
8106 | && (unsigned) const_op < GET_MODE_MASK (mode) / 2 | |
8107 | && (0 == (significant_bits (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 0), | |
8108 | GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) | |
8109 | & ~ GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) | |
8110 | || (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 0), | |
8111 | GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) | |
8112 | > (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) | |
8113 | - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))))) | |
8114 | { | |
8115 | op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0); | |
8116 | continue; | |
8117 | } | |
8118 | ||
fe0cf571 RK |
8119 | /* If the inner mode is narrower and we are extracting the low part, |
8120 | we can treat the SUBREG as if it were a ZERO_EXTEND. */ | |
8121 | if (subreg_lowpart_p (op0) | |
89f1c7f2 RS |
8122 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) < mode_width) |
8123 | /* Fall through */ ; | |
8124 | else | |
230d793d RS |
8125 | break; |
8126 | ||
8127 | /* ... fall through ... */ | |
8128 | ||
8129 | case ZERO_EXTEND: | |
8130 | if ((unsigned_comparison_p || equality_comparison_p) | |
8131 | && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0))) | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
8132 | <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
8133 | && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op | |
230d793d RS |
8134 | < GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0))))) |
8135 | { | |
8136 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
8137 | continue; | |
8138 | } | |
8139 | break; | |
8140 | ||
8141 | case PLUS: | |
8142 | /* (eq (plus X C1) C2) -> (eq X (minus C2 C1)). We can only do | |
5089e22e | 8143 | this for equality comparisons due to pathological cases involving |
230d793d RS |
8144 | overflows. */ |
8145 | if (equality_comparison_p && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8146 | && (tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op1, | |
8147 | XEXP (op0, 1))) != 0) | |
8148 | { | |
8149 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
8150 | op1 = tem; | |
8151 | continue; | |
8152 | } | |
8153 | ||
8154 | /* (plus (abs X) (const_int -1)) is < 0 if and only if X == 0. */ | |
8155 | if (const_op == 0 && XEXP (op0, 1) == constm1_rtx | |
8156 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ABS && sign_bit_comparison_p) | |
8157 | { | |
8158 | op0 = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0); | |
8159 | code = (code == LT ? EQ : NE); | |
8160 | continue; | |
8161 | } | |
8162 | break; | |
8163 | ||
8164 | case MINUS: | |
8165 | /* The sign bit of (minus (ashiftrt X C) X), where C is the number | |
8166 | of bits in X minus 1, is one iff X > 0. */ | |
8167 | if (sign_bit_comparison_p && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFTRT | |
8168 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8169 | && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) == mode_width - 1 | |
8170 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), XEXP (op0, 1))) | |
8171 | { | |
8172 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 1); | |
8173 | code = (code == GE ? LE : GT); | |
8174 | continue; | |
8175 | } | |
8176 | break; | |
8177 | ||
8178 | case XOR: | |
8179 | /* (eq (xor A B) C) -> (eq A (xor B C)). This is a simplification | |
8180 | if C is zero or B is a constant. */ | |
8181 | if (equality_comparison_p | |
8182 | && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (XOR, mode, | |
8183 | XEXP (op0, 1), op1))) | |
8184 | { | |
8185 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
8186 | op1 = tem; | |
8187 | continue; | |
8188 | } | |
8189 | break; | |
8190 | ||
8191 | case EQ: case NE: | |
8192 | case LT: case LTU: case LE: case LEU: | |
8193 | case GT: case GTU: case GE: case GEU: | |
8194 | /* We can't do anything if OP0 is a condition code value, rather | |
8195 | than an actual data value. */ | |
8196 | if (const_op != 0 | |
8197 | #ifdef HAVE_cc0 | |
8198 | || XEXP (op0, 0) == cc0_rtx | |
8199 | #endif | |
8200 | || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0))) == MODE_CC) | |
8201 | break; | |
8202 | ||
8203 | /* Get the two operands being compared. */ | |
8204 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == COMPARE) | |
8205 | tem = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), tem1 = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1); | |
8206 | else | |
8207 | tem = XEXP (op0, 0), tem1 = XEXP (op0, 1); | |
8208 | ||
8209 | /* Check for the cases where we simply want the result of the | |
8210 | earlier test or the opposite of that result. */ | |
8211 | if (code == NE | |
8212 | || (code == EQ && reversible_comparison_p (op0)) | |
5f4f0e22 | 8213 | || (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
3f508eca | 8214 | && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT |
230d793d | 8215 | && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE |
5f4f0e22 CH |
8216 | & (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 |
8217 | << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)) - 1)))) | |
230d793d RS |
8218 | && (code == LT |
8219 | || (code == GE && reversible_comparison_p (op0))))) | |
8220 | { | |
8221 | code = (code == LT || code == NE | |
8222 | ? GET_CODE (op0) : reverse_condition (GET_CODE (op0))); | |
8223 | op0 = tem, op1 = tem1; | |
8224 | continue; | |
8225 | } | |
8226 | break; | |
8227 | ||
8228 | case IOR: | |
8229 | /* The sign bit of (ior (plus X (const_int -1)) X) is non-zero | |
8230 | iff X <= 0. */ | |
8231 | if (sign_bit_comparison_p && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == PLUS | |
8232 | && XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1) == constm1_rtx | |
8233 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), XEXP (op0, 1))) | |
8234 | { | |
8235 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 1); | |
8236 | code = (code == GE ? GT : LE); | |
8237 | continue; | |
8238 | } | |
8239 | break; | |
8240 | ||
8241 | case AND: | |
8242 | /* Convert (and (xshift 1 X) Y) to (and (lshiftrt Y X) 1). This | |
8243 | will be converted to a ZERO_EXTRACT later. */ | |
8244 | if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p | |
8245 | && (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFT | |
8246 | || GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == LSHIFT) | |
8247 | && XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0) == const1_rtx) | |
8248 | { | |
8249 | op0 = simplify_and_const_int | |
8250 | (op0, mode, gen_rtx_combine (LSHIFTRT, mode, | |
8251 | XEXP (op0, 1), | |
8252 | XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)), | |
5f4f0e22 | 8253 | (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1); |
230d793d RS |
8254 | continue; |
8255 | } | |
8256 | ||
8257 | /* If we are comparing (and (lshiftrt X C1) C2) for equality with | |
8258 | zero and X is a comparison and C1 and C2 describe only bits set | |
8259 | in STORE_FLAG_VALUE, we can compare with X. */ | |
8260 | if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p | |
5f4f0e22 | 8261 | && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d RS |
8262 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT |
8263 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == LSHIFTRT | |
8264 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8265 | && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) >= 0 | |
5f4f0e22 | 8266 | && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
230d793d RS |
8267 | { |
8268 | mask = ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) | |
8269 | << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1))); | |
8270 | if ((~ STORE_FLAG_VALUE & mask) == 0 | |
8271 | && (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0))) == '<' | |
8272 | || ((tem = get_last_value (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0))) != 0 | |
8273 | && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) == '<'))) | |
8274 | { | |
8275 | op0 = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0); | |
8276 | continue; | |
8277 | } | |
8278 | } | |
8279 | ||
8280 | /* If we are doing an equality comparison of an AND of a bit equal | |
8281 | to the sign bit, replace this with a LT or GE comparison of | |
8282 | the underlying value. */ | |
8283 | if (equality_comparison_p | |
8284 | && const_op == 0 | |
8285 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
5f4f0e22 | 8286 | && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d | 8287 | && ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) |
5f4f0e22 | 8288 | == (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1))) |
230d793d RS |
8289 | { |
8290 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
8291 | code = (code == EQ ? GE : LT); | |
8292 | continue; | |
8293 | } | |
8294 | ||
8295 | /* If this AND operation is really a ZERO_EXTEND from a narrower | |
8296 | mode, the constant fits within that mode, and this is either an | |
8297 | equality or unsigned comparison, try to do this comparison in | |
8298 | the narrower mode. */ | |
8299 | if ((equality_comparison_p || unsigned_comparison_p) | |
8300 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8301 | && (i = exact_log2 ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) | |
8302 | & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) | |
8303 | + 1)) >= 0 | |
8304 | && const_op >> i == 0 | |
8305 | && (tmode = mode_for_size (i, MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode) | |
8306 | { | |
8307 | op0 = gen_lowpart_for_combine (tmode, XEXP (op0, 0)); | |
8308 | continue; | |
8309 | } | |
8310 | break; | |
8311 | ||
8312 | case ASHIFT: | |
8313 | case LSHIFT: | |
8314 | /* If we have (compare (xshift FOO N) (const_int C)) and | |
8315 | the high order N bits of FOO (N+1 if an inequality comparison) | |
8316 | are not significant, we can do this by comparing FOO with C | |
8317 | shifted right N bits so long as the low-order N bits of C are | |
8318 | zero. */ | |
8319 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8320 | && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) >= 0 | |
8321 | && ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) + ! equality_comparison_p) | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
8322 | < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
8323 | && ((const_op | |
1a26b032 | 8324 | & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))) - 1) == 0) |
5f4f0e22 | 8325 | && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
230d793d RS |
8326 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode) |
8327 | & ~ (mask >> (INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) | |
8328 | + ! equality_comparison_p))) == 0) | |
8329 | { | |
8330 | const_op >>= INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)); | |
5f4f0e22 | 8331 | op1 = GEN_INT (const_op); |
230d793d RS |
8332 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); |
8333 | continue; | |
8334 | } | |
8335 | ||
dfbe1b2f | 8336 | /* If we are doing a sign bit comparison, it means we are testing |
230d793d | 8337 | a particular bit. Convert it to the appropriate AND. */ |
dfbe1b2f | 8338 | if (sign_bit_comparison_p && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT |
5f4f0e22 | 8339 | && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) |
230d793d | 8340 | { |
5f4f0e22 CH |
8341 | op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (op0, 0), |
8342 | ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 | |
8343 | << (mode_width - 1 | |
8344 | - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))))); | |
230d793d RS |
8345 | code = (code == LT ? NE : EQ); |
8346 | continue; | |
8347 | } | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
8348 | |
8349 | /* If this an equality comparison with zero and we are shifting | |
8350 | the low bit to the sign bit, we can convert this to an AND of the | |
8351 | low-order bit. */ | |
8352 | if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p | |
8353 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8354 | && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) == mode_width - 1) | |
8355 | { | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
8356 | op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (op0, 0), |
8357 | (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1); | |
dfbe1b2f RK |
8358 | continue; |
8359 | } | |
230d793d RS |
8360 | break; |
8361 | ||
8362 | case ASHIFTRT: | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
8363 | /* If this is an equality comparison with zero, we can do this |
8364 | as a logical shift, which might be much simpler. */ | |
8365 | if (equality_comparison_p && const_op == 0 | |
8366 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT) | |
8367 | { | |
8368 | op0 = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, mode, | |
8369 | XEXP (op0, 0), | |
8370 | INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))); | |
8371 | continue; | |
8372 | } | |
8373 | ||
230d793d RS |
8374 | /* If OP0 is a sign extension and CODE is not an unsigned comparison, |
8375 | do the comparison in a narrower mode. */ | |
8376 | if (! unsigned_comparison_p | |
8377 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8378 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFT | |
8379 | && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1) | |
8380 | && (tmode = mode_for_size (mode_width - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)), | |
22331794 | 8381 | MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode |
5f4f0e22 CH |
8382 | && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op <= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode) |
8383 | || ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) - const_op | |
8384 | <= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode)))) | |
230d793d RS |
8385 | { |
8386 | op0 = gen_lowpart_for_combine (tmode, XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0)); | |
8387 | continue; | |
8388 | } | |
8389 | ||
8390 | /* ... fall through ... */ | |
8391 | case LSHIFTRT: | |
8392 | /* If we have (compare (xshiftrt FOO N) (const_int C)) and | |
8393 | the low order N bits of FOO are not significant, we can do this | |
8394 | by comparing FOO with C shifted left N bits so long as no | |
8395 | overflow occurs. */ | |
8396 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8397 | && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) >= 0 | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
8398 | && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT |
8399 | && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT | |
230d793d | 8400 | && (significant_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode) |
5f4f0e22 | 8401 | & (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))) - 1)) == 0 |
230d793d RS |
8402 | && (const_op == 0 |
8403 | || (floor_log2 (const_op) + INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) | |
8404 | < mode_width))) | |
8405 | { | |
8406 | const_op <<= INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)); | |
5f4f0e22 | 8407 | op1 = GEN_INT (const_op); |
230d793d RS |
8408 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); |
8409 | continue; | |
8410 | } | |
8411 | ||
8412 | /* If we are using this shift to extract just the sign bit, we | |
8413 | can replace this with an LT or GE comparison. */ | |
8414 | if (const_op == 0 | |
8415 | && (equality_comparison_p || sign_bit_comparison_p) | |
8416 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT | |
8417 | && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) == mode_width - 1) | |
8418 | { | |
8419 | op0 = XEXP (op0, 0); | |
8420 | code = (code == NE || code == GT ? LT : GE); | |
8421 | continue; | |
8422 | } | |
8423 | break; | |
8424 | } | |
8425 | ||
8426 | break; | |
8427 | } | |
8428 | ||
8429 | /* Now make any compound operations involved in this comparison. Then, | |
8430 | check for an outmost SUBREG on OP0 that isn't doing anything or is | |
8431 | paradoxical. The latter case can only occur when it is known that the | |
8432 | "extra" bits will be zero. Therefore, it is safe to remove the SUBREG. | |
8433 | We can never remove a SUBREG for a non-equality comparison because the | |
8434 | sign bit is in a different place in the underlying object. */ | |
8435 | ||
8436 | op0 = make_compound_operation (op0, op1 == const0_rtx ? COMPARE : SET); | |
8437 | op1 = make_compound_operation (op1, SET); | |
8438 | ||
8439 | if (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (op0) | |
8440 | && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT | |
8441 | && (code == NE || code == EQ) | |
8442 | && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0)) | |
8443 | > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))))) | |
8444 | { | |
8445 | op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0); | |
8446 | op1 = gen_lowpart_for_combine (GET_MODE (op0), op1); | |
8447 | } | |
8448 | ||
8449 | else if (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (op0) | |
8450 | && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT | |
8451 | && (code == NE || code == EQ) | |
ac49a949 RS |
8452 | && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) |
8453 | <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) | |
230d793d RS |
8454 | && (significant_bits (SUBREG_REG (op0), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) |
8455 | & ~ GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0))) == 0 | |
8456 | && (tem = gen_lowpart_for_combine (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)), | |
8457 | op1), | |
8458 | (significant_bits (tem, GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) | |
8459 | & ~ GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0))) == 0)) | |
8460 | op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0), op1 = tem; | |
8461 | ||
8462 | /* We now do the opposite procedure: Some machines don't have compare | |
8463 | insns in all modes. If OP0's mode is an integer mode smaller than a | |
8464 | word and we can't do a compare in that mode, see if there is a larger | |
a687e897 RK |
8465 | mode for which we can do the compare. There are a number of cases in |
8466 | which we can use the wider mode. */ | |
230d793d RS |
8467 | |
8468 | mode = GET_MODE (op0); | |
8469 | if (mode != VOIDmode && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT | |
8470 | && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD | |
8471 | && cmp_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code == CODE_FOR_nothing) | |
8472 | for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode); | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
8473 | (tmode != VOIDmode |
8474 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (tmode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT); | |
230d793d | 8475 | tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode)) |
a687e897 | 8476 | if (cmp_optab->handlers[(int) tmode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing) |
230d793d | 8477 | { |
a687e897 RK |
8478 | /* If the only significant bits in OP0 and OP1 are those in the |
8479 | narrower mode and this is an equality or unsigned comparison, | |
8480 | we can use the wider mode. Similarly for sign-extended | |
8481 | values and equality or signed comparisons. */ | |
8482 | if (((code == EQ || code == NE | |
8483 | || code == GEU || code == GTU || code == LEU || code == LTU) | |
8484 | && ((significant_bits (op0, tmode) & ~ GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) | |
8485 | == 0) | |
8486 | && ((significant_bits (op1, tmode) & ~ GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) | |
8487 | == 0)) | |
8488 | || ((code == EQ || code == NE | |
8489 | || code == GE || code == GT || code == LE || code == LT) | |
8490 | && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, tmode) | |
58744483 | 8491 | > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (tmode) - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)) |
a687e897 | 8492 | && (num_sign_bit_copies (op1, tmode) |
58744483 | 8493 | > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (tmode) - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)))) |
a687e897 RK |
8494 | { |
8495 | op0 = gen_lowpart_for_combine (tmode, op0); | |
8496 | op1 = gen_lowpart_for_combine (tmode, op1); | |
8497 | break; | |
8498 | } | |
230d793d | 8499 | |
a687e897 RK |
8500 | /* If this is a test for negative, we can make an explicit |
8501 | test of the sign bit. */ | |
8502 | ||
8503 | if (op1 == const0_rtx && (code == LT || code == GE) | |
8504 | && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) | |
230d793d | 8505 | { |
a687e897 RK |
8506 | op0 = gen_binary (AND, tmode, |
8507 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (tmode, op0), | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
8508 | GEN_INT ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 |
8509 | << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1))); | |
230d793d | 8510 | code = (code == LT) ? NE : EQ; |
a687e897 | 8511 | break; |
230d793d | 8512 | } |
230d793d RS |
8513 | } |
8514 | ||
8515 | *pop0 = op0; | |
8516 | *pop1 = op1; | |
8517 | ||
8518 | return code; | |
8519 | } | |
8520 | \f | |
8521 | /* Return 1 if we know that X, a comparison operation, is not operating | |
8522 | on a floating-point value or is EQ or NE, meaning that we can safely | |
8523 | reverse it. */ | |
8524 | ||
8525 | static int | |
8526 | reversible_comparison_p (x) | |
8527 | rtx x; | |
8528 | { | |
8529 | if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT | |
8530 | || GET_CODE (x) == NE || GET_CODE (x) == EQ) | |
8531 | return 1; | |
8532 | ||
8533 | switch (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) | |
8534 | { | |
8535 | case MODE_INT: | |
8536 | return 1; | |
8537 | ||
8538 | case MODE_CC: | |
8539 | x = get_last_value (XEXP (x, 0)); | |
8540 | return (x && GET_CODE (x) == COMPARE | |
8541 | && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) == MODE_INT); | |
8542 | } | |
8543 | ||
8544 | return 0; | |
8545 | } | |
8546 | \f | |
8547 | /* Utility function for following routine. Called when X is part of a value | |
8548 | being stored into reg_last_set_value. Sets reg_last_set_table_tick | |
8549 | for each register mentioned. Similar to mention_regs in cse.c */ | |
8550 | ||
8551 | static void | |
8552 | update_table_tick (x) | |
8553 | rtx x; | |
8554 | { | |
8555 | register enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x); | |
8556 | register char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code); | |
8557 | register int i; | |
8558 | ||
8559 | if (code == REG) | |
8560 | { | |
8561 | int regno = REGNO (x); | |
8562 | int endregno = regno + (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
8563 | ? HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)) : 1); | |
8564 | ||
8565 | for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++) | |
8566 | reg_last_set_table_tick[i] = label_tick; | |
8567 | ||
8568 | return; | |
8569 | } | |
8570 | ||
8571 | for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--) | |
8572 | /* Note that we can't have an "E" in values stored; see | |
8573 | get_last_value_validate. */ | |
8574 | if (fmt[i] == 'e') | |
8575 | update_table_tick (XEXP (x, i)); | |
8576 | } | |
8577 | ||
8578 | /* Record that REG is set to VALUE in insn INSN. If VALUE is zero, we | |
8579 | are saying that the register is clobbered and we no longer know its | |
8580 | value. If INSN is zero, don't update reg_last_set; this call is normally | |
8581 | done with VALUE also zero to invalidate the register. */ | |
8582 | ||
8583 | static void | |
8584 | record_value_for_reg (reg, insn, value) | |
8585 | rtx reg; | |
8586 | rtx insn; | |
8587 | rtx value; | |
8588 | { | |
8589 | int regno = REGNO (reg); | |
8590 | int endregno = regno + (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
8591 | ? HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (reg)) : 1); | |
8592 | int i; | |
8593 | ||
8594 | /* If VALUE contains REG and we have a previous value for REG, substitute | |
8595 | the previous value. */ | |
8596 | if (value && insn && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, value)) | |
8597 | { | |
8598 | rtx tem; | |
8599 | ||
8600 | /* Set things up so get_last_value is allowed to see anything set up to | |
8601 | our insn. */ | |
8602 | subst_low_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn); | |
8603 | tem = get_last_value (reg); | |
8604 | ||
8605 | if (tem) | |
8606 | value = replace_rtx (copy_rtx (value), reg, tem); | |
8607 | } | |
8608 | ||
8609 | /* For each register modified, show we don't know its value, that | |
8610 | its value has been updated, and that we don't know the location of | |
8611 | the death of the register. */ | |
8612 | for (i = regno; i < endregno; i ++) | |
8613 | { | |
8614 | if (insn) | |
8615 | reg_last_set[i] = insn; | |
8616 | reg_last_set_value[i] = 0; | |
8617 | reg_last_death[i] = 0; | |
8618 | } | |
8619 | ||
8620 | /* Mark registers that are being referenced in this value. */ | |
8621 | if (value) | |
8622 | update_table_tick (value); | |
8623 | ||
8624 | /* Now update the status of each register being set. | |
8625 | If someone is using this register in this block, set this register | |
8626 | to invalid since we will get confused between the two lives in this | |
8627 | basic block. This makes using this register always invalid. In cse, we | |
8628 | scan the table to invalidate all entries using this register, but this | |
8629 | is too much work for us. */ | |
8630 | ||
8631 | for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++) | |
8632 | { | |
8633 | reg_last_set_label[i] = label_tick; | |
8634 | if (value && reg_last_set_table_tick[i] == label_tick) | |
8635 | reg_last_set_invalid[i] = 1; | |
8636 | else | |
8637 | reg_last_set_invalid[i] = 0; | |
8638 | } | |
8639 | ||
8640 | /* The value being assigned might refer to X (like in "x++;"). In that | |
8641 | case, we must replace it with (clobber (const_int 0)) to prevent | |
8642 | infinite loops. */ | |
8643 | if (value && ! get_last_value_validate (&value, | |
8644 | reg_last_set_label[regno], 0)) | |
8645 | { | |
8646 | value = copy_rtx (value); | |
8647 | if (! get_last_value_validate (&value, reg_last_set_label[regno], 1)) | |
8648 | value = 0; | |
8649 | } | |
8650 | ||
8651 | /* For the main register being modified, update the value. */ | |
8652 | reg_last_set_value[regno] = value; | |
8653 | ||
8654 | } | |
8655 | ||
8656 | /* Used for communication between the following two routines. */ | |
8657 | static rtx record_dead_insn; | |
8658 | ||
8659 | /* Called via note_stores from record_dead_and_set_regs to handle one | |
8660 | SET or CLOBBER in an insn. */ | |
8661 | ||
8662 | static void | |
8663 | record_dead_and_set_regs_1 (dest, setter) | |
8664 | rtx dest, setter; | |
8665 | { | |
8666 | if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG) | |
8667 | { | |
8668 | /* If we are setting the whole register, we know its value. Otherwise | |
8669 | show that we don't know the value. We can handle SUBREG in | |
8670 | some cases. */ | |
8671 | if (GET_CODE (setter) == SET && dest == SET_DEST (setter)) | |
8672 | record_value_for_reg (dest, record_dead_insn, SET_SRC (setter)); | |
8673 | else if (GET_CODE (setter) == SET | |
8674 | && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (setter)) == SUBREG | |
8675 | && SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (setter)) == dest | |
8676 | && subreg_lowpart_p (SET_DEST (setter))) | |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
8677 | record_value_for_reg (dest, record_dead_insn, |
8678 | gen_lowpart_for_combine (GET_MODE (dest), | |
8679 | SET_SRC (setter))); | |
230d793d | 8680 | else |
5f4f0e22 | 8681 | record_value_for_reg (dest, record_dead_insn, NULL_RTX); |
230d793d RS |
8682 | } |
8683 | else if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM | |
8684 | /* Ignore pushes, they clobber nothing. */ | |
8685 | && ! push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest))) | |
8686 | mem_last_set = INSN_CUID (record_dead_insn); | |
8687 | } | |
8688 | ||
8689 | /* Update the records of when each REG was most recently set or killed | |
8690 | for the things done by INSN. This is the last thing done in processing | |
8691 | INSN in the combiner loop. | |
8692 | ||
8693 | We update reg_last_set, reg_last_set_value, reg_last_death, and also the | |
8694 | similar information mem_last_set (which insn most recently modified memory) | |
8695 | and last_call_cuid (which insn was the most recent subroutine call). */ | |
8696 | ||
8697 | static void | |
8698 | record_dead_and_set_regs (insn) | |
8699 | rtx insn; | |
8700 | { | |
8701 | register rtx link; | |
8702 | for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1)) | |
8703 | { | |
8704 | if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_DEAD) | |
8705 | reg_last_death[REGNO (XEXP (link, 0))] = insn; | |
8706 | else if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC) | |
5f4f0e22 | 8707 | record_value_for_reg (XEXP (link, 0), insn, NULL_RTX); |
230d793d RS |
8708 | } |
8709 | ||
8710 | if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN) | |
8711 | last_call_cuid = mem_last_set = INSN_CUID (insn); | |
8712 | ||
8713 | record_dead_insn = insn; | |
8714 | note_stores (PATTERN (insn), record_dead_and_set_regs_1); | |
8715 | } | |
8716 | \f | |
8717 | /* Utility routine for the following function. Verify that all the registers | |
8718 | mentioned in *LOC are valid when *LOC was part of a value set when | |
8719 | label_tick == TICK. Return 0 if some are not. | |
8720 | ||
8721 | If REPLACE is non-zero, replace the invalid reference with | |
8722 | (clobber (const_int 0)) and return 1. This replacement is useful because | |
8723 | we often can get useful information about the form of a value (e.g., if | |
8724 | it was produced by a shift that always produces -1 or 0) even though | |
8725 | we don't know exactly what registers it was produced from. */ | |
8726 | ||
8727 | static int | |
8728 | get_last_value_validate (loc, tick, replace) | |
8729 | rtx *loc; | |
8730 | int tick; | |
8731 | int replace; | |
8732 | { | |
8733 | rtx x = *loc; | |
8734 | char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x)); | |
8735 | int len = GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x)); | |
8736 | int i; | |
8737 | ||
8738 | if (GET_CODE (x) == REG) | |
8739 | { | |
8740 | int regno = REGNO (x); | |
8741 | int endregno = regno + (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
8742 | ? HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)) : 1); | |
8743 | int j; | |
8744 | ||
8745 | for (j = regno; j < endregno; j++) | |
8746 | if (reg_last_set_invalid[j] | |
8747 | /* If this is a pseudo-register that was only set once, it is | |
8748 | always valid. */ | |
8749 | || (! (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_n_sets[regno] == 1) | |
8750 | && reg_last_set_label[j] > tick)) | |
8751 | { | |
8752 | if (replace) | |
8753 | *loc = gen_rtx (CLOBBER, GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx); | |
8754 | return replace; | |
8755 | } | |
8756 | ||
8757 | return 1; | |
8758 | } | |
8759 | ||
8760 | for (i = 0; i < len; i++) | |
8761 | if ((fmt[i] == 'e' | |
8762 | && get_last_value_validate (&XEXP (x, i), tick, replace) == 0) | |
8763 | /* Don't bother with these. They shouldn't occur anyway. */ | |
8764 | || fmt[i] == 'E') | |
8765 | return 0; | |
8766 | ||
8767 | /* If we haven't found a reason for it to be invalid, it is valid. */ | |
8768 | return 1; | |
8769 | } | |
8770 | ||
8771 | /* Get the last value assigned to X, if known. Some registers | |
8772 | in the value may be replaced with (clobber (const_int 0)) if their value | |
8773 | is known longer known reliably. */ | |
8774 | ||
8775 | static rtx | |
8776 | get_last_value (x) | |
8777 | rtx x; | |
8778 | { | |
8779 | int regno; | |
8780 | rtx value; | |
8781 | ||
8782 | /* If this is a non-paradoxical SUBREG, get the value of its operand and | |
8783 | then convert it to the desired mode. If this is a paradoxical SUBREG, | |
8784 | we cannot predict what values the "extra" bits might have. */ | |
8785 | if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG | |
8786 | && subreg_lowpart_p (x) | |
8787 | && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) | |
8788 | <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))) | |
8789 | && (value = get_last_value (SUBREG_REG (x))) != 0) | |
8790 | return gen_lowpart_for_combine (GET_MODE (x), value); | |
8791 | ||
8792 | if (GET_CODE (x) != REG) | |
8793 | return 0; | |
8794 | ||
8795 | regno = REGNO (x); | |
8796 | value = reg_last_set_value[regno]; | |
8797 | ||
d0ab8cd3 | 8798 | /* If we don't have a value or if it isn't for this basic block, return 0. */ |
230d793d RS |
8799 | |
8800 | if (value == 0 | |
8801 | || (reg_n_sets[regno] != 1 | |
d0ab8cd3 | 8802 | && (reg_last_set_label[regno] != label_tick))) |
230d793d RS |
8803 | return 0; |
8804 | ||
d0ab8cd3 RK |
8805 | /* If the value was set in a later insn that the ones we are processing, |
8806 | we can't use it, but make a quick check to see if the previous insn | |
8807 | set it to something. This is commonly the case when the same pseudo | |
8808 | is used by repeated insns. */ | |
8809 | ||
8810 | if (reg_n_sets[regno] != 1 | |
8811 | && INSN_CUID (reg_last_set[regno]) >= subst_low_cuid) | |
8812 | { | |
8813 | rtx insn, set; | |
8814 | ||
2fc9c644 | 8815 | for (insn = prev_nonnote_insn (subst_insn); |
d0ab8cd3 | 8816 | insn && INSN_CUID (insn) >= subst_low_cuid; |
2fc9c644 | 8817 | insn = prev_nonnote_insn (insn)) |
d0ab8cd3 RK |
8818 | ; |
8819 | ||
8820 | if (insn | |
8821 | && (set = single_set (insn)) != 0 | |
8822 | && rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (set), x)) | |
8823 | { | |
8824 | value = SET_SRC (set); | |
8825 | ||
8826 | /* Make sure that VALUE doesn't reference X. Replace any | |
8827 | expliit references with a CLOBBER. If there are any remaining | |
8828 | references (rare), don't use the value. */ | |
8829 | ||
8830 | if (reg_mentioned_p (x, value)) | |
8831 | value = replace_rtx (copy_rtx (value), x, | |
8832 | gen_rtx (CLOBBER, GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx)); | |
8833 | ||
8834 | if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, value)) | |
8835 | return 0; | |
8836 | } | |
8837 | else | |
8838 | return 0; | |
8839 | } | |
8840 | ||
8841 | /* If the value has all its registers valid, return it. */ | |
230d793d RS |
8842 | if (get_last_value_validate (&value, reg_last_set_label[regno], 0)) |
8843 | return value; | |
8844 | ||
8845 | /* Otherwise, make a copy and replace any invalid register with | |
8846 | (clobber (const_int 0)). If that fails for some reason, return 0. */ | |
8847 | ||
8848 | value = copy_rtx (value); | |
8849 | if (get_last_value_validate (&value, reg_last_set_label[regno], 1)) | |
8850 | return value; | |
8851 | ||
8852 | return 0; | |
8853 | } | |
8854 | \f | |
8855 | /* Return nonzero if expression X refers to a REG or to memory | |
8856 | that is set in an instruction more recent than FROM_CUID. */ | |
8857 | ||
8858 | static int | |
8859 | use_crosses_set_p (x, from_cuid) | |
8860 | register rtx x; | |
8861 | int from_cuid; | |
8862 | { | |
8863 | register char *fmt; | |
8864 | register int i; | |
8865 | register enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x); | |
8866 | ||
8867 | if (code == REG) | |
8868 | { | |
8869 | register int regno = REGNO (x); | |
8870 | #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING | |
8871 | /* Don't allow uses of the stack pointer to be moved, | |
8872 | because we don't know whether the move crosses a push insn. */ | |
8873 | if (regno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM) | |
8874 | return 1; | |
8875 | #endif | |
8876 | return (reg_last_set[regno] | |
8877 | && INSN_CUID (reg_last_set[regno]) > from_cuid); | |
8878 | } | |
8879 | ||
8880 | if (code == MEM && mem_last_set > from_cuid) | |
8881 | return 1; | |
8882 | ||
8883 | fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code); | |
8884 | ||
8885 | for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--) | |
8886 | { | |
8887 | if (fmt[i] == 'E') | |
8888 | { | |
8889 | register int j; | |
8890 | for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--) | |
8891 | if (use_crosses_set_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from_cuid)) | |
8892 | return 1; | |
8893 | } | |
8894 | else if (fmt[i] == 'e' | |
8895 | && use_crosses_set_p (XEXP (x, i), from_cuid)) | |
8896 | return 1; | |
8897 | } | |
8898 | return 0; | |
8899 | } | |
8900 | \f | |
8901 | /* Define three variables used for communication between the following | |
8902 | routines. */ | |
8903 | ||
8904 | static int reg_dead_regno, reg_dead_endregno; | |
8905 | static int reg_dead_flag; | |
8906 | ||
8907 | /* Function called via note_stores from reg_dead_at_p. | |
8908 | ||
8909 | If DEST is within [reg_dead_rengno, reg_dead_endregno), set | |
8910 | reg_dead_flag to 1 if X is a CLOBBER and to -1 it is a SET. */ | |
8911 | ||
8912 | static void | |
8913 | reg_dead_at_p_1 (dest, x) | |
8914 | rtx dest; | |
8915 | rtx x; | |
8916 | { | |
8917 | int regno, endregno; | |
8918 | ||
8919 | if (GET_CODE (dest) != REG) | |
8920 | return; | |
8921 | ||
8922 | regno = REGNO (dest); | |
8923 | endregno = regno + (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
8924 | ? HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (dest)) : 1); | |
8925 | ||
8926 | if (reg_dead_endregno > regno && reg_dead_regno < endregno) | |
8927 | reg_dead_flag = (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER) ? 1 : -1; | |
8928 | } | |
8929 | ||
8930 | /* Return non-zero if REG is known to be dead at INSN. | |
8931 | ||
8932 | We scan backwards from INSN. If we hit a REG_DEAD note or a CLOBBER | |
8933 | referencing REG, it is dead. If we hit a SET referencing REG, it is | |
8934 | live. Otherwise, see if it is live or dead at the start of the basic | |
8935 | block we are in. */ | |
8936 | ||
8937 | static int | |
8938 | reg_dead_at_p (reg, insn) | |
8939 | rtx reg; | |
8940 | rtx insn; | |
8941 | { | |
8942 | int block, i; | |
8943 | ||
8944 | /* Set variables for reg_dead_at_p_1. */ | |
8945 | reg_dead_regno = REGNO (reg); | |
8946 | reg_dead_endregno = reg_dead_regno + (reg_dead_regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
8947 | ? HARD_REGNO_NREGS (reg_dead_regno, | |
8948 | GET_MODE (reg)) | |
8949 | : 1); | |
8950 | ||
8951 | reg_dead_flag = 0; | |
8952 | ||
8953 | /* Scan backwards until we find a REG_DEAD note, SET, CLOBBER, label, or | |
8954 | beginning of function. */ | |
8955 | for (; insn && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL; | |
8956 | insn = prev_nonnote_insn (insn)) | |
8957 | { | |
8958 | note_stores (PATTERN (insn), reg_dead_at_p_1); | |
8959 | if (reg_dead_flag) | |
8960 | return reg_dead_flag == 1 ? 1 : 0; | |
8961 | ||
8962 | if (find_regno_note (insn, REG_DEAD, reg_dead_regno)) | |
8963 | return 1; | |
8964 | } | |
8965 | ||
8966 | /* Get the basic block number that we were in. */ | |
8967 | if (insn == 0) | |
8968 | block = 0; | |
8969 | else | |
8970 | { | |
8971 | for (block = 0; block < n_basic_blocks; block++) | |
8972 | if (insn == basic_block_head[block]) | |
8973 | break; | |
8974 | ||
8975 | if (block == n_basic_blocks) | |
8976 | return 0; | |
8977 | } | |
8978 | ||
8979 | for (i = reg_dead_regno; i < reg_dead_endregno; i++) | |
5f4f0e22 CH |
8980 | if (basic_block_live_at_start[block][i / REGSET_ELT_BITS] |
8981 | & ((REGSET_ELT_TYPE) 1 << (i % REGSET_ELT_BITS))) | |
230d793d RS |
8982 | return 0; |
8983 | ||
8984 | return 1; | |
8985 | } | |
8986 | \f | |
8987 | /* Remove register number REGNO from the dead registers list of INSN. | |
8988 | ||
8989 | Return the note used to record the death, if there was one. */ | |
8990 | ||
8991 | rtx | |
8992 | remove_death (regno, insn) | |
8993 | int regno; | |
8994 | rtx insn; | |
8995 | { | |
8996 | register rtx note = find_regno_note (insn, REG_DEAD, regno); | |
8997 | ||
8998 | if (note) | |
1a26b032 RK |
8999 | { |
9000 | reg_n_deaths[regno]--; | |
9001 | remove_note (insn, note); | |
9002 | } | |
230d793d RS |
9003 | |
9004 | return note; | |
9005 | } | |
9006 | ||
9007 | /* For each register (hardware or pseudo) used within expression X, if its | |
9008 | death is in an instruction with cuid between FROM_CUID (inclusive) and | |
9009 | TO_INSN (exclusive), put a REG_DEAD note for that register in the | |
9010 | list headed by PNOTES. | |
9011 | ||
9012 | This is done when X is being merged by combination into TO_INSN. These | |
9013 | notes will then be distributed as needed. */ | |
9014 | ||
9015 | static void | |
9016 | move_deaths (x, from_cuid, to_insn, pnotes) | |
9017 | rtx x; | |
9018 | int from_cuid; | |
9019 | rtx to_insn; | |
9020 | rtx *pnotes; | |
9021 | { | |
9022 | register char *fmt; | |
9023 | register int len, i; | |
9024 | register enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x); | |
9025 | ||
9026 | if (code == REG) | |
9027 | { | |
9028 | register int regno = REGNO (x); | |
9029 | register rtx where_dead = reg_last_death[regno]; | |
9030 | ||
9031 | if (where_dead && INSN_CUID (where_dead) >= from_cuid | |
9032 | && INSN_CUID (where_dead) < INSN_CUID (to_insn)) | |
9033 | { | |
9034 | rtx note = remove_death (regno, reg_last_death[regno]); | |
9035 | ||
9036 | /* It is possible for the call above to return 0. This can occur | |
9037 | when reg_last_death points to I2 or I1 that we combined with. | |
9038 | In that case make a new note. */ | |
9039 | ||
9040 | if (note) | |
9041 | { | |
9042 | XEXP (note, 1) = *pnotes; | |
9043 | *pnotes = note; | |
9044 | } | |
9045 | else | |
9046 | *pnotes = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_DEAD, x, *pnotes); | |
1a26b032 RK |
9047 | |
9048 | reg_n_deaths[regno]++; | |
230d793d RS |
9049 | } |
9050 | ||
9051 | return; | |
9052 | } | |
9053 | ||
9054 | else if (GET_CODE (x) == SET) | |
9055 | { | |
9056 | rtx dest = SET_DEST (x); | |
9057 | ||
9058 | move_deaths (SET_SRC (x), from_cuid, to_insn, pnotes); | |
9059 | ||
a7c99304 RK |
9060 | /* In the case of a ZERO_EXTRACT, a STRICT_LOW_PART, or a SUBREG |
9061 | that accesses one word of a multi-word item, some | |
9062 | piece of everything register in the expression is used by | |
9063 | this insn, so remove any old death. */ | |
9064 | ||
9065 | if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT | |
9066 | || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART | |
9067 | || (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG | |
9068 | && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) | |
9069 | + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD) | |
9070 | == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) | |
9071 | + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD)))) | |
230d793d | 9072 | { |
a7c99304 RK |
9073 | move_deaths (dest, from_cuid, to_insn, pnotes); |
9074 | return; | |
230d793d RS |
9075 | } |
9076 | ||
a7c99304 RK |
9077 | /* If this is some other SUBREG, we know it replaces the entire |
9078 | value, so use that as the destination. */ | |
9079 | if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG) | |
9080 | dest = SUBREG_REG (dest); | |
9081 | ||
9082 | /* If this is a MEM, adjust deaths of anything used in the address. | |
9083 | For a REG (the only other possibility), the entire value is | |
9084 | being replaced so the old value is not used in this insn. */ | |
230d793d RS |
9085 | |
9086 | if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM) | |
9087 | move_deaths (XEXP (dest, 0), from_cuid, to_insn, pnotes); | |
9088 | return; | |
9089 | } | |
9090 | ||
9091 | else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER) | |
9092 | return; | |
9093 | ||
9094 | len = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); | |
9095 | fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code); | |
9096 | ||
9097 | for (i = 0; i < len; i++) | |
9098 | { | |
9099 | if (fmt[i] == 'E') | |
9100 | { | |
9101 | register int j; | |
9102 | for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--) | |
9103 | move_deaths (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from_cuid, to_insn, pnotes); | |
9104 | } | |
9105 | else if (fmt[i] == 'e') | |
9106 | move_deaths (XEXP (x, i), from_cuid, to_insn, pnotes); | |
9107 | } | |
9108 | } | |
9109 | \f | |
a7c99304 RK |
9110 | /* Return 1 if X is the target of a bit-field assignment in BODY, the |
9111 | pattern of an insn. X must be a REG. */ | |
230d793d RS |
9112 | |
9113 | static int | |
a7c99304 RK |
9114 | reg_bitfield_target_p (x, body) |
9115 | rtx x; | |
230d793d RS |
9116 | rtx body; |
9117 | { | |
9118 | int i; | |
9119 | ||
9120 | if (GET_CODE (body) == SET) | |
a7c99304 RK |
9121 | { |
9122 | rtx dest = SET_DEST (body); | |
9123 | rtx target; | |
9124 | int regno, tregno, endregno, endtregno; | |
9125 | ||
9126 | if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT) | |
9127 | target = XEXP (dest, 0); | |
9128 | else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART) | |
9129 | target = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)); | |
9130 | else | |
9131 | return 0; | |
9132 | ||
9133 | if (GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG) | |
9134 | target = SUBREG_REG (target); | |
9135 | ||
9136 | if (GET_CODE (target) != REG) | |
9137 | return 0; | |
9138 | ||
9139 | tregno = REGNO (target), regno = REGNO (x); | |
9140 | if (tregno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) | |
9141 | return target == x; | |
9142 | ||
9143 | endtregno = tregno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (tregno, GET_MODE (target)); | |
9144 | endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)); | |
9145 | ||
9146 | return endregno > tregno && regno < endtregno; | |
9147 | } | |
230d793d RS |
9148 | |
9149 | else if (GET_CODE (body) == PARALLEL) | |
9150 | for (i = XVECLEN (body, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--) | |
a7c99304 | 9151 | if (reg_bitfield_target_p (x, XVECEXP (body, 0, i))) |
230d793d RS |
9152 | return 1; |
9153 | ||
9154 | return 0; | |
9155 | } | |
9156 | \f | |
9157 | /* Given a chain of REG_NOTES originally from FROM_INSN, try to place them | |
9158 | as appropriate. I3 and I2 are the insns resulting from the combination | |
9159 | insns including FROM (I2 may be zero). | |
9160 | ||
9161 | ELIM_I2 and ELIM_I1 are either zero or registers that we know will | |
9162 | not need REG_DEAD notes because they are being substituted for. This | |
9163 | saves searching in the most common cases. | |
9164 | ||
9165 | Each note in the list is either ignored or placed on some insns, depending | |
9166 | on the type of note. */ | |
9167 | ||
9168 | static void | |
9169 | distribute_notes (notes, from_insn, i3, i2, elim_i2, elim_i1) | |
9170 | rtx notes; | |
9171 | rtx from_insn; | |
9172 | rtx i3, i2; | |
9173 | rtx elim_i2, elim_i1; | |
9174 | { | |
9175 | rtx note, next_note; | |
9176 | rtx tem; | |
9177 | ||
9178 | for (note = notes; note; note = next_note) | |
9179 | { | |
9180 | rtx place = 0, place2 = 0; | |
9181 | ||
9182 | /* If this NOTE references a pseudo register, ensure it references | |
9183 | the latest copy of that register. */ | |
9184 | if (XEXP (note, 0) && GET_CODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == REG | |
9185 | && REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) | |
9186 | XEXP (note, 0) = regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))]; | |
9187 | ||
9188 | next_note = XEXP (note, 1); | |
9189 | switch (REG_NOTE_KIND (note)) | |
9190 | { | |
9191 | case REG_UNUSED: | |
9192 | /* If this register is set or clobbered in I3, put the note there | |
9193 | unless there is one already. */ | |
9194 | if (reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3))) | |
9195 | { | |
9196 | if (! (GET_CODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == REG | |
9197 | ? find_regno_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))) | |
9198 | : find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, XEXP (note, 0)))) | |
9199 | place = i3; | |
9200 | } | |
9201 | /* Otherwise, if this register is used by I3, then this register | |
9202 | now dies here, so we must put a REG_DEAD note here unless there | |
9203 | is one already. */ | |
9204 | else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3)) | |
9205 | && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == REG | |
9206 | ? find_regno_note (i3, REG_DEAD, REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))) | |
9207 | : find_reg_note (i3, REG_DEAD, XEXP (note, 0)))) | |
9208 | { | |
9209 | PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_DEAD); | |
9210 | place = i3; | |
9211 | } | |
9212 | break; | |
9213 | ||
9214 | case REG_EQUAL: | |
9215 | case REG_EQUIV: | |
9216 | case REG_NONNEG: | |
9217 | /* These notes say something about results of an insn. We can | |
9218 | only support them if they used to be on I3 in which case they | |
a687e897 RK |
9219 | remain on I3. Otherwise they are ignored. |
9220 | ||
9221 | If the note refers to an expression that is not a constant, we | |
9222 | must also ignore the note since we cannot tell whether the | |
9223 | equivalence is still true. It might be possible to do | |
9224 | slightly better than this (we only have a problem if I2DEST | |
9225 | or I1DEST is present in the expression), but it doesn't | |
9226 | seem worth the trouble. */ | |
9227 | ||
9228 | if (from_insn == i3 | |
9229 | && (XEXP (note, 0) == 0 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (note, 0)))) | |
230d793d RS |
9230 | place = i3; |
9231 | break; | |
9232 | ||
9233 | case REG_INC: | |
9234 | case REG_NO_CONFLICT: | |
9235 | case REG_LABEL: | |
9236 | /* These notes say something about how a register is used. They must | |
9237 | be present on any use of the register in I2 or I3. */ | |
9238 | if (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3))) | |
9239 | place = i3; | |
9240 | ||
9241 | if (i2 && reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2))) | |
9242 | { | |
9243 | if (place) | |
9244 | place2 = i2; | |
9245 | else | |
9246 | place = i2; | |
9247 | } | |
9248 | break; | |
9249 | ||
9250 | case REG_WAS_0: | |
9251 | /* It is too much trouble to try to see if this note is still | |
9252 | correct in all situations. It is better to simply delete it. */ | |
9253 | break; | |
9254 | ||
9255 | case REG_RETVAL: | |
9256 | /* If the insn previously containing this note still exists, | |
9257 | put it back where it was. Otherwise move it to the previous | |
9258 | insn. Adjust the corresponding REG_LIBCALL note. */ | |
9259 | if (GET_CODE (from_insn) != NOTE) | |
9260 | place = from_insn; | |
9261 | else | |
9262 | { | |
5f4f0e22 | 9263 | tem = find_reg_note (XEXP (note, 0), REG_LIBCALL, NULL_RTX); |
230d793d RS |
9264 | place = prev_real_insn (from_insn); |
9265 | if (tem && place) | |
9266 | XEXP (tem, 0) = place; | |
9267 | } | |
9268 | break; | |
9269 | ||
9270 | case REG_LIBCALL: | |
9271 | /* This is handled similarly to REG_RETVAL. */ | |
9272 | if (GET_CODE (from_insn) != NOTE) | |
9273 | place = from_insn; | |
9274 | else | |
9275 | { | |
5f4f0e22 | 9276 | tem = find_reg_note (XEXP (note, 0), REG_RETVAL, NULL_RTX); |
230d793d RS |
9277 | place = next_real_insn (from_insn); |
9278 | if (tem && place) | |
9279 | XEXP (tem, 0) = place; | |
9280 | } | |
9281 | break; | |
9282 | ||
9283 | case REG_DEAD: | |
9284 | /* If the register is used as an input in I3, it dies there. | |
9285 | Similarly for I2, if it is non-zero and adjacent to I3. | |
9286 | ||
9287 | If the register is not used as an input in either I3 or I2 | |
9288 | and it is not one of the registers we were supposed to eliminate, | |
9289 | there are two possibilities. We might have a non-adjacent I2 | |
9290 | or we might have somehow eliminated an additional register | |
9291 | from a computation. For example, we might have had A & B where | |
9292 | we discover that B will always be zero. In this case we will | |
9293 | eliminate the reference to A. | |
9294 | ||
9295 | In both cases, we must search to see if we can find a previous | |
9296 | use of A and put the death note there. */ | |
9297 | ||
9298 | if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3))) | |
9299 | place = i3; | |
9300 | else if (i2 != 0 && next_nonnote_insn (i2) == i3 | |
9301 | && reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2))) | |
9302 | place = i2; | |
9303 | ||
9304 | if (XEXP (note, 0) == elim_i2 || XEXP (note, 0) == elim_i1) | |
9305 | break; | |
9306 | ||
510dd77e RK |
9307 | /* If the register is used in both I2 and I3 and it dies in I3, |
9308 | we might have added another reference to it. If reg_n_refs | |
9309 | was 2, bump it to 3. This has to be correct since the | |
9310 | register must have been set somewhere. The reason this is | |
9311 | done is because local-alloc.c treats 2 references as a | |
9312 | special case. */ | |
9313 | ||
9314 | if (place == i3 && i2 != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == REG | |
9315 | && reg_n_refs[REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))]== 2 | |
9316 | && reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2))) | |
9317 | reg_n_refs[REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))] = 3; | |
9318 | ||
230d793d RS |
9319 | if (place == 0) |
9320 | for (tem = prev_nonnote_insn (i3); | |
9321 | tem && (GET_CODE (tem) == INSN | |
9322 | || GET_CODE (tem) == CALL_INSN); | |
9323 | tem = prev_nonnote_insn (tem)) | |
9324 | { | |
9325 | /* If the register is being set at TEM, see if that is all | |
9326 | TEM is doing. If so, delete TEM. Otherwise, make this | |
9327 | into a REG_UNUSED note instead. */ | |
9328 | if (reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (tem))) | |
9329 | { | |
9330 | rtx set = single_set (tem); | |
9331 | ||
5089e22e RS |
9332 | /* Verify that it was the set, and not a clobber that |
9333 | modified the register. */ | |
9334 | ||
9335 | if (set != 0 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set)) | |
9336 | && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note, 0), SET_DEST (set))) | |
230d793d RS |
9337 | { |
9338 | /* Move the notes and links of TEM elsewhere. | |
9339 | This might delete other dead insns recursively. | |
9340 | First set the pattern to something that won't use | |
9341 | any register. */ | |
9342 | ||
9343 | PATTERN (tem) = pc_rtx; | |
9344 | ||
5f4f0e22 CH |
9345 | distribute_notes (REG_NOTES (tem), tem, tem, |
9346 | NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX); | |
230d793d RS |
9347 | distribute_links (LOG_LINKS (tem)); |
9348 | ||
9349 | PUT_CODE (tem, NOTE); | |
9350 | NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (tem) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED; | |
9351 | NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (tem) = 0; | |
9352 | } | |
9353 | else | |
9354 | { | |
9355 | PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_UNUSED); | |
9356 | ||
9357 | /* If there isn't already a REG_UNUSED note, put one | |
9358 | here. */ | |
9359 | if (! find_regno_note (tem, REG_UNUSED, | |
9360 | REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)))) | |
9361 | place = tem; | |
9362 | break; | |
9363 | } | |
9364 | } | |
9365 | else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (tem))) | |
9366 | { | |
9367 | place = tem; | |
9368 | break; | |
9369 | } | |
9370 | } | |
9371 | ||
9372 | /* If the register is set or already dead at PLACE, we needn't do | |
9373 | anything with this note if it is still a REG_DEAD note. | |
9374 | ||
9375 | Note that we cannot use just `dead_or_set_p' here since we can | |
9376 | convert an assignment to a register into a bit-field assignment. | |
9377 | Therefore, we must also omit the note if the register is the | |
9378 | target of a bitfield assignment. */ | |
9379 | ||
9380 | if (place && REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_DEAD) | |
9381 | { | |
9382 | int regno = REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)); | |
9383 | ||
9384 | if (dead_or_set_p (place, XEXP (note, 0)) | |
9385 | || reg_bitfield_target_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (place))) | |
9386 | { | |
9387 | /* Unless the register previously died in PLACE, clear | |
9388 | reg_last_death. [I no longer understand why this is | |
9389 | being done.] */ | |
9390 | if (reg_last_death[regno] != place) | |
9391 | reg_last_death[regno] = 0; | |
9392 | place = 0; | |
9393 | } | |
9394 | else | |
9395 | reg_last_death[regno] = place; | |
9396 | ||
9397 | /* If this is a death note for a hard reg that is occupying | |
9398 | multiple registers, ensure that we are still using all | |
9399 | parts of the object. If we find a piece of the object | |
9400 | that is unused, we must add a USE for that piece before | |
9401 | PLACE and put the appropriate REG_DEAD note on it. | |
9402 | ||
9403 | An alternative would be to put a REG_UNUSED for the pieces | |
9404 | on the insn that set the register, but that can't be done if | |
9405 | it is not in the same block. It is simpler, though less | |
9406 | efficient, to add the USE insns. */ | |
9407 | ||
9408 | if (place && regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER | |
9409 | && HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0))) > 1) | |
9410 | { | |
9411 | int endregno | |
9412 | = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, | |
9413 | GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0))); | |
9414 | int all_used = 1; | |
9415 | int i; | |
9416 | ||
9417 | for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++) | |
9418 | if (! refers_to_regno_p (i, i + 1, PATTERN (place), 0)) | |
9419 | { | |
9420 | rtx piece = gen_rtx (REG, word_mode, i); | |
28f6d3af RK |
9421 | rtx p; |
9422 | ||
9423 | /* See if we already placed a USE note for this | |
9424 | register in front of PLACE. */ | |
9425 | for (p = place; | |
9426 | GET_CODE (PREV_INSN (p)) == INSN | |
9427 | && GET_CODE (PATTERN (PREV_INSN (p))) == USE; | |
9428 | p = PREV_INSN (p)) | |
9429 | if (rtx_equal_p (piece, | |
9430 | XEXP (PATTERN (PREV_INSN (p)), 0))) | |
9431 | { | |
9432 | p = 0; | |
9433 | break; | |
9434 | } | |
9435 | ||
9436 | if (p) | |
9437 | { | |
9438 | rtx use_insn | |
9439 | = emit_insn_before (gen_rtx (USE, VOIDmode, | |
9440 | piece), | |
9441 | p); | |
9442 | REG_NOTES (use_insn) | |
9443 | = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_DEAD, piece, | |
9444 | REG_NOTES (use_insn)); | |
9445 | } | |
230d793d | 9446 | |
5089e22e | 9447 | all_used = 0; |
230d793d RS |
9448 | } |
9449 | ||
9450 | if (! all_used) | |
9451 | { | |
9452 | /* Put only REG_DEAD notes for pieces that are | |
9453 | still used and that are not already dead or set. */ | |
9454 | ||
9455 | for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++) | |
9456 | { | |
9457 | rtx piece = gen_rtx (REG, word_mode, i); | |
9458 | ||
9459 | if (reg_referenced_p (piece, PATTERN (place)) | |
9460 | && ! dead_or_set_p (place, piece) | |
9461 | && ! reg_bitfield_target_p (piece, | |
9462 | PATTERN (place))) | |
9463 | REG_NOTES (place) = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_DEAD, | |
9464 | piece, | |
9465 | REG_NOTES (place)); | |
9466 | } | |
9467 | ||
9468 | place = 0; | |
9469 | } | |
9470 | } | |
9471 | } | |
9472 | break; | |
9473 | ||
9474 | default: | |
9475 | /* Any other notes should not be present at this point in the | |
9476 | compilation. */ | |
9477 | abort (); | |
9478 | } | |
9479 | ||
9480 | if (place) | |
9481 | { | |
9482 | XEXP (note, 1) = REG_NOTES (place); | |
9483 | REG_NOTES (place) = note; | |
9484 | } | |
1a26b032 RK |
9485 | else if ((REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_DEAD |
9486 | || REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_UNUSED) | |
9487 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == REG) | |
9488 | reg_n_deaths[REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))]--; | |
230d793d RS |
9489 | |
9490 | if (place2) | |
1a26b032 RK |
9491 | { |
9492 | if ((REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_DEAD | |
9493 | || REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_UNUSED) | |
9494 | && GET_CODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == REG) | |
9495 | reg_n_deaths[REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))]++; | |
9496 | ||
9497 | REG_NOTES (place2) = gen_rtx (GET_CODE (note), REG_NOTE_KIND (note), | |
9498 | XEXP (note, 0), REG_NOTES (place2)); | |
9499 | } | |
230d793d RS |
9500 | } |
9501 | } | |
9502 | \f | |
9503 | /* Similarly to above, distribute the LOG_LINKS that used to be present on | |
5089e22e RS |
9504 | I3, I2, and I1 to new locations. This is also called in one case to |
9505 | add a link pointing at I3 when I3's destination is changed. */ | |
230d793d RS |
9506 | |
9507 | static void | |
9508 | distribute_links (links) | |
9509 | rtx links; | |
9510 | { | |
9511 | rtx link, next_link; | |
9512 | ||
9513 | for (link = links; link; link = next_link) | |
9514 | { | |
9515 | rtx place = 0; | |
9516 | rtx insn; | |
9517 | rtx set, reg; | |
9518 | ||
9519 | next_link = XEXP (link, 1); | |
9520 | ||
9521 | /* If the insn that this link points to is a NOTE or isn't a single | |
9522 | set, ignore it. In the latter case, it isn't clear what we | |
9523 | can do other than ignore the link, since we can't tell which | |
9524 | register it was for. Such links wouldn't be used by combine | |
9525 | anyway. | |
9526 | ||
9527 | It is not possible for the destination of the target of the link to | |
9528 | have been changed by combine. The only potential of this is if we | |
9529 | replace I3, I2, and I1 by I3 and I2. But in that case the | |
9530 | destination of I2 also remains unchanged. */ | |
9531 | ||
9532 | if (GET_CODE (XEXP (link, 0)) == NOTE | |
9533 | || (set = single_set (XEXP (link, 0))) == 0) | |
9534 | continue; | |
9535 | ||
9536 | reg = SET_DEST (set); | |
9537 | while (GET_CODE (reg) == SUBREG || GET_CODE (reg) == ZERO_EXTRACT | |
9538 | || GET_CODE (reg) == SIGN_EXTRACT | |
9539 | || GET_CODE (reg) == STRICT_LOW_PART) | |
9540 | reg = XEXP (reg, 0); | |
9541 | ||
9542 | /* A LOG_LINK is defined as being placed on the first insn that uses | |
9543 | a register and points to the insn that sets the register. Start | |
9544 | searching at the next insn after the target of the link and stop | |
9545 | when we reach a set of the register or the end of the basic block. | |
9546 | ||
9547 | Note that this correctly handles the link that used to point from | |
5089e22e | 9548 | I3 to I2. Also note that not much searching is typically done here |
230d793d RS |
9549 | since most links don't point very far away. */ |
9550 | ||
9551 | for (insn = NEXT_INSN (XEXP (link, 0)); | |
9552 | (insn && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL | |
9553 | && GET_CODE (PREV_INSN (insn)) != JUMP_INSN); | |
9554 | insn = NEXT_INSN (insn)) | |
9555 | if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i' | |
9556 | && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, PATTERN (insn))) | |
9557 | { | |
9558 | if (reg_referenced_p (reg, PATTERN (insn))) | |
9559 | place = insn; | |
9560 | break; | |
9561 | } | |
9562 | ||
9563 | /* If we found a place to put the link, place it there unless there | |
9564 | is already a link to the same insn as LINK at that point. */ | |
9565 | ||
9566 | if (place) | |
9567 | { | |
9568 | rtx link2; | |
9569 | ||
9570 | for (link2 = LOG_LINKS (place); link2; link2 = XEXP (link2, 1)) | |
9571 | if (XEXP (link2, 0) == XEXP (link, 0)) | |
9572 | break; | |
9573 | ||
9574 | if (link2 == 0) | |
9575 | { | |
9576 | XEXP (link, 1) = LOG_LINKS (place); | |
9577 | LOG_LINKS (place) = link; | |
9578 | } | |
9579 | } | |
9580 | } | |
9581 | } | |
9582 | \f | |
9583 | void | |
9584 | dump_combine_stats (file) | |
9585 | FILE *file; | |
9586 | { | |
9587 | fprintf | |
9588 | (file, | |
9589 | ";; Combiner statistics: %d attempts, %d substitutions (%d requiring new space),\n;; %d successes.\n\n", | |
9590 | combine_attempts, combine_merges, combine_extras, combine_successes); | |
9591 | } | |
9592 | ||
9593 | void | |
9594 | dump_combine_total_stats (file) | |
9595 | FILE *file; | |
9596 | { | |
9597 | fprintf | |
9598 | (file, | |
9599 | "\n;; Combiner totals: %d attempts, %d substitutions (%d requiring new space),\n;; %d successes.\n", | |
9600 | total_attempts, total_merges, total_extras, total_successes); | |
9601 | } |